Metro Line 1 (Versova To Ghatkopar)

Detailed Project Report
Mumbai MRTS Project

Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar Corridor
Client: Mumbai Metropolitan Region

Development Authority
T
PO
DE
I
ER
AD
DH
RO
A
A
A
AK
AL
AN
R
OV
T
EH
GA
OR
R
N
AK
RS
GA
GA
KA
W
NA
L
RP
CH
O
VE
NA
NA
NA
AD
AR
AI
N
AD
KI
RO
H
M
D
R
AS
SA
AZ
PE
A
BH
PH
KO
SU
AL
AT
AS
GH
prepared by Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.
February 2005
CONTENTS
Salient Features
Executive Summary
Page No.
1 Introduction
1.1 Background 1
1.2 Demographic Profile 1
1.3 Employment Scenario 2
1.4 Land use Policy 3
1.5 Vehicle Registration 4
1.6 Suburban Rail system 5
1.7 The Road Network 6
1.8 Bus transport system 9
1.9 Accidents 9
1.10 Air Pollution 10
1.11 Need for Metro 10
1.12 Types of Metros and their capacity 11
1.13 Advantages of a Metro system 11
1.14 Review of Past Studies 12
2 Evolution of Mumbai Metro Master Plan
2.1 Preliminary Net work 1
2.2 Master Plan 1
2.3 Phasing of Master Plan 2
3 Traffic Study
3.1 Study Area 1
3.2 Ridership forcast 1
3.3 Landuse policy 9
3.4 Stated preference survey 9
3.5 Planning parameters 9
3.6 Traffic demand forcast 13
3.7 Forcast of OD matrices 13
3.8 Assignment of OD matrices on the network 14
Ridership On Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar
3.9 14
Corridor
3.10 The Traffic forecast for ‘Stand Alone’ Scenario 14
4 System Selection
4.1 Choice of Gauge 1
4.2 Track Structure 2
4.3 Rail structure interaction 5
4.4 Welding 5
4.5 Traction System 5
4.6 Signalling 7
4.7 Telecommunication 12
4.8 Automatic Fare Collection 17
4.9 Rolling stock 21
5 Civil Engineering
5.1 Geometric Design Norms 1

4
5.2 Description of Alignment
5.3 Station Planning 26
5.4 Viaduct structure 49
5.5 Geotechnical Investigation 58
5.6 Utility diversions 63
5.7 Land 78
6 Depots
6.1 Introduction 1
6.2 Maintenance philosophy 1
6.3 Location of depot and its various Auxiliary buildings 2
6.4 Approach of maintenance for rolling stock 2
6.5 Rolling stock maintenance needs 2
6.6 Infrastructure facilities planned 4
7 Train Operation Plan
7.1 Operation Philosophy 1
7.2 Stations 1
7.3 Train operation Plan 2
7.4 Yearwise rake requirement 18
7.5 Cost Estimate 21
8 Power Supply and Traction
8.1 Power requirements 1
8.2 Need for high reliability of power supply 1
8.3 Sources of power supply 2
8.4 Auxiliary supply arrangements for stations & depot 4
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) & electromagnetic
8.5 5
compatibility (EMC)
8.6 Rating of major equipment 6
8.7 Standby diesel generator (DG) sets 6
Supervisory control & data acquisition (SCADA)
8.8 7
system
8.9 Energy saving measures 7
8.10 Electric power tariff 8
9 Environmental Impact Assessment & Mitigation Measures
9.1 Environmental base line data 1
9.2 Socio Economic profile 7
9.3 Positive Environmental Impacts 11
9.4 Negative Environmental Impacts 11
9.5 Checklist of Impacts 15
9.6 Environmental Management plan 16
9.7 Environmental monitoring plan 20
9.8 Environmental management system 21
9.9 Cost estimates 22
10 Cost estimate
10.1 Introduction 1
10.2 Civil engineering works 3
10.3 Depot 4
10.4 Utility diversions 4
10.5 Environmental impacts assessment 4
10.6 Rehabilitation and resettlement 5
10.7 Traction and power supply 5
10.8 Electrical services at stations 6
10.9 Signalling and Telecommunication works 6
10.10 Automatic fare collection 6
10.11 Rolling stock 7
10.12 General charges and contingencies 7
10.13 Taxes and Duties 7
10.14 Cost with alternatives proposals 8
11 Fare Structure, FIRR & Financing option
11.1 Introduction 1
11.2 Costs 1
11.3 Revenues 3
11.4 Financial Internal Rate of Return 5
11.5 Financing option 7
11.6 Implementation through PPP 11
11.7 Risk analysis 11
11.8 Recommendations 14
12 Economic analysis
12.1 Introduction 1
12.2 Economic analysis approach 1
12.3 Evaluation assumption 1
12.4 Estimation of costs 1
12.5 Estimation of benefits 2
12.6 Transport demand on MRT corridor 3
12.7 Reduction in Traffic congestion 4
12.8 Reduction in fuel consumption 4
12.9 Passenger time saving 4
12.10 Safety 4
12.11 Reduced air pollution 5
12.12 Saving in road infrastructure 5
12.13 Shadow Pricing 5
12.14 Result of Economic analysis 5
12.15 Sensitivity analysis 6
13 Implementation Plan
13.1 Way Forward for Implementing the project 1
13.2 Institutional arrangements 2
13.3 Implementation schedule 2
13.4 Implementation through SPV 3
13.5 Organisational setup 5
13.6 Legal frame work 8
13.7 Concessions from Government 11
13.8 Need for dedicated fund for Metro project 12
14 Conclusions 1
SALIENT FEATURES
MUMBAI MRTS PROJECT
1. Gauge (Nominal) 1435 mm
2. Route Length (between dead ends)
Elevated 11.07 Km
3. Number of stations
Elevated 12 Nos.
4. Traffic Forecast (Stand Alone System)

Passenger/day PHPDT
(Lakh)
Year 2011 4.28 15,565
Year 2021 6.65 23,590
Year 2031 8.83 30,550
5. Train operation
2011 2021 2031
a) Designed PHPDT 14136 17670 23560

b) Designed Train headway 3 minutes 3 minutes 3 minutes
c) Operational Headway 5 minutes 4 minutes 3 minutes
d) Train Composition 4 Cars 4 Cars 4 Cars
e) Coaches required 56 64 80
6. Design speed 80 kmph
7. Traction Power Supply
a) Traction system voltage 25 KV ac

b) Current Collection Over Head Catenary
c) Sub Station 2 No.
8. Rolling Stock
a) 3.20 m wide modern rolling stock with stainless steel body.

b) Axle load - 17 t
c) Seating arrangement - Longitudinal
d) Capacity of 4 coach unit - 1178 Passengers
e) Class of accommodation - One
9. Maintenance Facilities
Maintenance Depot - D N Nagar

Godrej (Alternative)
10. Signalling, Telecommunication & Train Control
a) Type of Signalling Cab signalling and

continuous automatic train
control with Automatic
Train Protection (ATP)
b) Telecommunication i) Integrated System with

Fibre Optic cable, SCADA,
Train Radio, PA system etc.
ii) Train information system,

Control telephones and
Centralised Clock System.
11. Fare Collection Automatic Fare Collection

collection system with BOM
and POM, Smart card etc.
12. Construction Methodology
Elevated viaduct consisting prestressed concrete 'U'-shaped

Girders on Single pier with pile/ Open foundations
13. Total estimated cost (at June, 2004 prices w/o taxes) Rs. 1488. Crores
Inclusive of taxes Rs. 1670 Crores
14. Financial Indices of MRTS Phase-I Network with this corridor

a) EIRR 21.53 %
b) FIRR
(i) Govt. Financing 7.56 %
(ii) PPP 11.06 %
****
Executive Summary
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
0.1 INTRODUCTION
Greater Mumbai - the capital of Maharashtra, is not only the financial
capital of India but the heart of commercial and trade activities of the
Country as well. The Island City has experienced rapid growth in economic
activity and its suburbs are growing faster than the Island City in terms of
population distribution and activity location. The major challenge is in
promoting growth by adequate inputs into infrastructure, which would
improve quality of life of the residents. MMRDA (Mumbai Metropolitan
Region Development Authority) is a nodal agency for promoting planned
development in this region, which makes it automatically the nodal agency
for studying and implementing transport related projects within Mumbai
Metropolitan Region.
Population
The total population of Greater Mumbai in 2001 was 11.91 million (more
than double of the 1971 population of 5.97 million). The population growth
in the island area during 1971 – 2001 is only 9 percent. However, the
growth in suburbs (western and eastern) has been phenomenal. The
suburban population has grown by almost 300 percent over the past 30
years.
Employment Scenario
As per 1998 census, the total employment in Greater Mumbai is 2.62
millions. The share of employment in Island City has fallen to 56 percent in
1991 from 72 percent in 1971. However, it has increased to 61 percent in
1998. The share of employment in western suburbs was around 25 percent
of total employment in Greater Mumbai in 1998 and that of eastern suburbs
was about 15 percent.
Land Use Policy

MMRDA prepared a Regional Plan for MMR for 1996 to 2011 which was
approved by GOM. As per the Regional Plan, a poly-nucleated land use
structure has been recommended for Mumbai Metropolitan Region (MMR).
This clearly brings out MMRDA’s plan of developing alternative employment
growth centres at Bandra Kurla Complex (BKC) in addition to the ones at
Navi Mumbai. As per latest estimates, BKC will generate around 200,000
jobs as compared to 700,000 jobs in Navi Mumbai. In the Island City Area
and the suburbs, valuable and significant land parcels have not been used
since long. These areas belong to textile mills, which were shut down in the
eighties. Recently, the Government of Maharashtra through MMRDA has
evolved certain strategies for development of these areas and to re-develop
valuable land resources.
Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 1 / 30

Final Report Versova - Andheri – Ghatkopar Corridor
Executive Summary
Vehicle Registration
The ratio of private vehicles per thousand person is growing steadily, and
has reached 68.30 in 2002. This clearly shows the inclination of people
towards private vehicles. The trend is also influenced by the rising income
level and saturation of public transport systems in Mumbai. The proportion
of vehicles in island area has steadily reduced from 73 percent in 1981 to 40
percent in 2002, which is the same as the proportion of vehicles in western
suburbs. The number of vehicles in eastern suburbs is only 21 percent of
total vehicles in Mumbai.
Suburban Rail System

Mumbai is served by two of India’s zonal railways, the Western Railway
(WR) and the Central Railway (CR). The Western Railway line runs
northwards from Churchgate terminus station in the Mumbai CBD parallel to
the West Coast of the island towards northern and western India. Suburban
operations extend for 60 kms northwards from Churchgate as far as Virar.
The Central Railway runs from Chhatrapati Shivaji Terminus (CST), located
on the eastern side of the CBD (approximately 1 km northeast of
Churchgate) and serves a large part of Central and Eastern Mumbai.
Suburban services extend from Mumbai CST as far as Kasara to the north
east (120 Km ) and Karjat to the south east (100 Km ) . Within the Mumbai
suburban system carries about 6.0 million passengers per day.
Bus Transport System

Public stage carriage bus services in the region are provided by BEST,
(within BMC and up to 20 km beyond the municipal boundary), TMT in
Thane and MSRTC elsewhere. With over 3,030 buses, BEST is by far the
largest provider of bus services in the region. However, due to financial
limitations bus replacement has been deferred in recent years. All routes
within Mumbai are provided by BEST. These include radial routes to and
from main centres, trunk routes linking main centres and feeder services
linking to the trunk routes and to railway stations. Bus routes from Mumbai
City to New Mumbai are provided by BEST and MSRTC. Routes from other
points in Greater Mumbai to New Mumbai and Thane are provided by
BEST, MSRTC and TMT. The dispersal of rail commuters from the main
railway terminals to their final destinations in the Mumbai CBD such as Fort,
Ballard Estate, Colaba or Nariman points is at present carried out primarily
by the bus system. Shared taxi routes are also operated, whilst a large
number of people make this final stage of their journey on foot. In the
morning peak these movements involve substantial volumes running into
the order of 30,000-40,000 passenger per hour from each terminus.
Road Network
The Mumbai road network has developed over many years, predominately
in north-south direction radial to the CBD within the constraints of the
islands. Extensive development over much of the island has led to the
major traffic movements being concentrated into three main corridors;
western, central and eastern. The east – west movement is constrained by
the Western and Central Railway tracks which also run for the majority of
the length of the Island city.
Executive Summary
Accidents
The number of road accidents involving injury to persons reported annually
in the Mumbai Metropolitan area has remained approximately constant
(25000 – 30000) over the last 30 years. The number of fatalities however
has fallen by 50% since 1981 and is currently about 350 per year. As the
number of vehicles in Mumbai has significantly increased, the number of
accidents per vehicle kilometer has gone down. The key factors for
reduction in accidents could be introduction of various traffic management
measures, improved driver education and more strict police enforcement of
road and traffic regulations. Lower speeds resulting from increased
congestion is also a factor. However, the annual accident total of about
30000 remains high, and there is a need to ensure further reduction.
Air Pollution
In Mumbai road traffic is a major source of air pollution, which has worsened
significantly in the last two decades and now poses a considerable health
problem and potentially lethal hazard. Data derived from the ambient air
quality monitoring by MCGB show that air pollution due to road traffic has
increased by almost 400% over the last two decades. Transport (principally
road traffic) now accounts for about 52% of the overall air pollution load in
Greater Mumbai.
Need for Metro

Public Transport System is an efficient user of space and energy, with
reduced level of air and noise pollution. As the population of the city grows,
the share of public transport, road or rail-based, should increase. With
Mumbai' s population crossing 12 million, the share of public transport at
88% is quite good. However, over the past decade the share has reduced
from 91% to 88% and is likely to reduce further if corrective measures are
not taken immediately. While upgradation of existing suburban system is
underway through MUTP, it is felt that additional mass transit corridors are
required to meet the expanding demand. Experience has shown that in
mixed traffic conditions, comprising slow and fast moving traffic prevailing in
most of our cities, road buses can optimally carry 10,000 persons per hour
per direction (phpdt). Thus when on a corridor, traffic density during peak
hours crosses this figure, provision of rail-based mass transport, i.e. Metro
system should be considered. In any case, Metro system may become
inescapable if the traffic density on a corridor reaches 20,000 phpdt.
Advantages of a Metro System

Metro systems are superior to other modes because they provide higher
carrying capacity, faster, smoother and safer travel, occupy less space, are
non-polluting and energy-efficient. To summarise, a Metro system:
• Requires 1/5th energy per passenger km compared to road-based

system
• Causes no air pollution in the city
• Causes lesser noise level

Executive Summary
• Occupies no road space if underground and only about 2 metres

width of the road if elevated
• Carries same amount of traffic as 7 lanes of bus traffic or 24 lanes of
private motor cars (either way), if it is a medium capacity system.
• Is more reliable, comfortable and safer than road based system
• Reduces journey time by anything between 50% and 75% depending
on road conditions.
Past Studies
A number of transportation studies were carried out in the past for Mumbai
Metropolitan Region (MMR). These studies discussed travel pattern,
network characteristics, and the degree of traffic saturation on the existing
roads in the Study Area. The following major studies, which recommended
transportation improvements in MMR, have been reviewed.
(i) Mass Transport Study (1969): The objective of this Study was to
determine the existing conditions of available mass transportation
services, future desire lines and to evolve a comprehensive, long
term mass transportation plan for Greater Mumbai.
(ii) Techno-Economic Feasibility of the 7th Rail Corridor: Indian

Railways carried out the techno-economic feasibility study of the
Seventh Corridor in the year 1974. Mumbai Metropolitan region was
considered as the Study Area. Detailed engineering feasibility was
also carried out and the corridor alignment was fixed.
(iii) East West Rail Corridor Study: MMRDA got this Study done In the
year 1975 for developing rail corridor connecting Bandra – Kurla –
Mankhurd – Panvel. The objective of this Study was to provide
access to New Mumbai with a view to assisting in its development.
(iv) Comprehensive Transport Study (CTS) for MMR: A study was

commissioned by the World Bank and MMRDA in 1993 to develop a
strategy for transport development in MMR.
(v) Mumbai Metro Study, by Mumbai Metro Planning Group: The

Study examined the feasibility of constructing and maintaining the 7th
rail corridor as a heavy metro.
(vi) MRTS Study by TEWET: The study objective was to identify two rail
based Mass Rapid Transit (MRT) Systems which are bankable, one
for the CBD and one in Greater Mumbai outside the CBD, and to
develop feasibility studies for the two projects.
(vii) Sky Bus Metro Study by MMRDA: The Konkan Railway

Corporation presented to GOM(Government of Maharastra) a
proposal for development of a new transport system called sky bus
metro system. It envisages a system, which will be elevated and
supported to central columns. The conclusion of this Study was that

Executive Summary
since this system has not been implemented anywhere in the world, it
needs to be further examined on a 2 km pilot section.
0.2 EVOLUTION OF MUMBAI METRO MASTER PLAN
Transport problems of any city can be solved by integrated transport

planning. While for the Mumbai city, the suburban rail system and road
based transport system is being taken care of by MUIP and MUTP, the
metro system proposed in the past was in a adhoc manner. Hence it was
necessary to prepare a master plan for the metro system in Mumbai. The
Master Plan covering entire Greater Mumbai geographical area has been
prepared .
Preliminary Net Work

With a view to broadly identify the most feasible and apparently
advantageous network section for possible inclusion in the final Master plan,
all such possible routes were listed based on the recommendations of
various studies carried out in the past. Accordingly, a primary network of
about 200 km was identified.
Master plan
Based on intensive site reconnaissance surveys, alternative probable
corridors were discussed with representatives of local authorities and
detailed study finally a network comprising of 146.5 km was selected as
Master Plan for Mumbai Metro. The Master Plan network was split in
suitable corridors as under:
Length (Km)
S. No. Corridor
Total Elev. U.G
1 Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar 15.00 15.00 -
Coloba – Mahim (Bandra) 18.00 8.10 9.90
2
Mahim (Bandra) – Charkop 18.00 18.00
3 Mahim – Kurla – Mankhurd 12.80 10.70 2.10
4 Charkop – Dahisar 7.50 7.50
5 Ghatkopar – Mulund 12.40 12.40
6 BKC – Kanjur Marg via Airport 19.50 11.00 8.50
7 Andheri (E) – Dahisar (E) 18.00 18.00
8 Hutatma Chowk – Ghatkopar 21.80 13.30 8.50
9 Sewri – Prabhadevi 3.50 3.50
Based on various criteria, such as ridership, availability of funds, limitation

on construction and their impact on environment etc., phasing has been
done for implementation of the master plan. The final approved phasing of
the Master plan is as under:

Executive Summary
Length(Kms) Total
Phase Corridors Cost
Total Elev. U.G
(Rs. Cr.)
1 a) Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar
b) Colaba – Charkop 63.80 51.80 12.00 8180
c) Mahim – Mankhurd
2 a) Ghatkopar – Mulund
19.90 19.90 - 1990
b) Charkop – Dahisar
3 a) BKC – Airport - Kanjur Marg
b) Andheri (E) – Dahisar (E)
62.80 42.30 20.50 9355
c) Hutatma Chowk – Ghatkopar
d) Sewri – Prabhadevi
Total 146.50 114.00 32.50 19525
0.3 TRAFFIC STUDY

The traffic forecasting for all the corridors has been done while preparing the
Master Plan for Mumbai Metro. However at present corridor is being
implemented separately, the traffic forecasting has also been done for stand
alone corridor with suitable assumptions. The traffic forecast for stand alone
corridor has been used for train operation plan and depot design. However
the station design takes care of traffic demand in case of complete phase I is
commissioned.
The projected traffic demand in 2011, 2021 and 2031 is given below.
Proposed Peak Hour Link loadings on Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar
Station Station 2011 2021 2031

To To To To To To
Versova Ghatkopar Versova Ghatkopar Versova Ghatkopar
Ghatkopar Asalpha 9755 12225 14890 17160 20485 23025
Asalpha Subhash Nagar 10115 12390 15390 17410 15300 23485
Subhash Nagar Saki Naka 10120 12390 15390 17410 21310 23485
Saki Naka Marol Naka 10440 12905 16165 18225 22360 24525
Marol Naka Airport 11860 14615 18945 21760 25385 27970
Airport Chakala 11860 14610 18950 21755 25385 27960
Chakala WEH 12155 15240 20050 23215 26745 30050
WEH Andheri 12210 15565 20070 23590 26880 30550
Andheri Azad Nagar 6480 7415 10605 11340 12710 13525
Azad Nagar D N Nagar 2025 1670 3250 2640 4285 3350
D N Nagar Versova 150 185 365 365 415 430

Executive Summary
Peak Hour Boarding and Alighting
2011 2021 2031

Station Name Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting
Versova 183 152 237 198 317 264
D N Nagar 1492 1874 1941 2439 2591 3256
Azad Nagar 5958 4670 7753 6081 10347 8116
Andheri Metro 9476 7059 12330 9191 16456 12267
WEH 1592 1858 2072 2419 2765 3228
Chakala 2077 2415 2703 3145 3607 4197
Airport Road 4 0 5 0 7 0
Marol Naka 1891 2191 2460 2852 3283 3807
Saki Naka 1502 2010 1954 2617 2609 3493
Subhash Nagar 4 0 5 0 7 0
Asalpha 365 168 474 219 633 292
Ghatkopar Metro 9756 12223 12694 15916 16942.4904 21243
34298 34618 44628 45076 59565 60163
0.4 System Selection
A. Permanent Way
Choice of Gauge
Standard Gauge (1435mm) is invariably used for metro railways world over
due to its unlimited advantages. During the last decade, 20 new metros have
been constructed in various cities of the world. All these metros have gone
in for Standard Gauge even though the national gauge for mainline railways
in some of these countries was different from Standard Gauge. In India the
national gauge is Broad Gauge (1676mm). The reasons for selection of
gauge is described in the report.
Track Structure
Track on Metro Systems is subjected to intensive usage with very little time
for day-to-day maintenance. Thus it is imperative that the track structure
selected for Metro Systems should be long lasting and should require
minimum or no maintenance and at the same time, ensure highest level of
safety, reliability and comfort, with minimum noise and vibrations.
Ballastless track with long welded head hardened rails has been proposed
as mainline track. In depot also ballastless track has been proposed as the
same is on elevated deck. However at Godrej depot the track structure shall
be ballasted similar to Indian railways track structure for depot and
workshops.
Rail Section
Keeping in view the proposed axle load and the practices followed abroad, it
is proposed to adopt UIC-60 (60 kg. /m) rail section. Since on main lines,
sharp curves and steep gradients would be present, the grade of rail on
main lines should be 1080 Head Hardened as per IRS-T- 12-96. As these
rails are not manufactured in India at present, these are to be imported. For

Executive Summary
the Depot lines, the grade of rails should be 880, which can be easily
manufactured indigenously.
Turnouts
· From considerations of maintainability and riding comfort, it is proposed
to lay the turnouts also with 1 in 20 cant. Further, it is proposed to adopt
the following two types of turnouts:
i) On main lines, 1 in 9 type turnout with a lead radius of 300

metres and permissible speed on divergent track as 40 km/h .
ii) On Depot lines, 1 in 7 type turnout with a lead radius of 140
metres and permissible speed on divergent track as 25 km/h.
· The Scissors cross-overs on Main Lines (1 in 9 type) will be with a
minimum track centre of 4.5 m .
B. Traction System
Traditionally, electric traction is used in Metro systems for requirement of

high acceleration and pollution-free services in urban areas. There are three
standard and proven systems of electric traction for use in suburban and
metro lines, viz.: - 750V dc third rail, 1500V dc overhead catenary and 25kV
ac overhead catenary system. All the three systems are presently in use in
India (750 V DC third rail in Kolkatta Metro, 1500V dc catenary in Mumbai
suburban of Central & Western Railways and 25kV ac catenary in Delhi
Metro & Indian Railways
Out of the three system mentioned above, 25kV ac traction has the
economical advantages of minimal number of traction sub-stations and
potential to carry large traffic (60,000-90,000 PHPDT).
Keeping in view the ultimate traffic requirements, standardisation,

commonality of traction system with Western & Central Railway and other
techno-economic considerations, 25kV ac Catenary traction system is
considered to be the best trade-off and hence, proposed for adoption on
Mumbai Metro System.
C. Signalling and Train Control
Metro carries large number of passengers at a very close headway requiring

a very high level of safety enforcement and reliability. At the same time
heavy investment in infrastructure and rolling stock necessitates
optimization of its capacity to provide the best services to the public. These
requirements of the metro are planned to be achieved by adopting a
automatic signaling in the section and balise based Automatic Train
Protection (ATP), State of Art automatic train supervision system.

Executive Summary
D. Telecommu nication
Introduction
The telecommunication system acts as the communication backbone for

Signalling systems and other systems such as SCADA, AFC etc and
provides telecommunication services to meet operational and
administrative requirements of metro network.
The telecommunication facilities proposed are helpful in meeting the

requirements for
1. Supplementing the Signalling system for efficient train operation.

2. Exchange of managerial information
3. Crisis management during emergencies
4. Passenger information system
The proposed telecom system will cater to the following requirements:
• Train Traffic Control

• Assistance to Train Traffic Control
• Maintenance Control
• Emergency Control
• Station to station dedicated communication
• Exchange Telephone
• Passenger Announcement System within the station and from
Central Control to each station.
• Centralised Clock System
• Train Destination Indicator
• Instant on line Radio Communication between Central Control and
Moving Cars and maintenance personnel.
• Data Channels for Signalling, SCADA, Automatic Fare Collection
etc.
E. Automatic Fare Collection
Mass Rapid Transit Systems handle large number of passengers. Ticket

issual and fare collection play a vital role in the efficient and proper
operation of the system. To achieve this objective, ticketing system shall
be simple, easy to use/operate and maintain, easy on accounting facilities,
capable of issuing single/multiple journey tickets, amenable for quick fare
changes and require overall lesser manpower. In view of above, computer
based automatic fare collection system is proposed.
AFC system proves to be cheaper than semi-automatic (manual system)

in long run due to reduced manpower cost for ticketing staff, reduced
maintenance in comparison to paper ticket machines, overall less cost of

Executive Summary
recyclable tickets (Smart Card/Token) in comparison to paper tickets and

prevention of leakage of revenue.
Integration of AFC with Suburban/Bus System
Common Smart Card based ticketing for both Suburban and Bus systems
is not proposed at this stage as this will require installation of AFC system
at all suburban stations and in buses also. A Clearing House system will
also be required for separation of revenue among various operators.
However, the proposed system has multioperator capability and in future
this will be possible to integrate various transport providers and other
agencies.
F. ROLLING STOCK
Rolling stock for Mumbai Metro is similar to the one adopted for Delhi Metro.
Rolling Stock has been selected based on the following criteria:
¨ Proven equipment with high reliability;

¨ Passenger safety features, including fire resistance;
¨ Energy efficiency;
¨ Light weight equipment and coach body;
¨ Optimised scheduled speed;
¨ Aesthetically pleasing Interior and Exterior;
¨ Low life cycle cost; and
¨ Flexibility to meet increase in traffic demand.
The controlling criteria are reliability, low energy consumption, light weight and
high efficiency leading to lower annualized cost of service. The coach should
have high rate of acceleration and deceleration.
Keeping the above features in mind, 3.2 m wide stainless steel light weight
coaches are proposed for the Mumbai Metro, with length of 22.24 m for trailer
coach and 22.46 m for motor coach (including couple buffers). Height of
coach is 3.9 m. Train length for 4 coach train is 89.5 m while that of 6 - coach
train is 134 m. The Axle load is about 17 t for which the structures are to be
designed.
Traction motors are 220 KW and propulsion system is 3-phase drive with
variable voltage and variable frequency (VVVF) control. Trains will have
regenerative braking system to save energy cost. Current collection is through
overhead catenary from 25 kV ac. Trains will be air-conditioned and provided
with automatic door closing and opening system with 4 wide doors per coach
on each side. The trains will have state of the art cab signalling with
continuous automatic train control and automatic train protection system. The
trains will have passenger information and announcement system.
Coaches have longitudinal seats with a seating capacity of 43 and 239

standees per motor coach and 50 seating and 257 standees per trailer coach
thus total dense crush capacity of 282 (MC) to 307 (TC), at 6 persons/sqm.

Executive Summary
The rolling stock proposed shall have design speed of 90 kmph and maximum
running speed of 80 kmph. Maximum acceleration and decleration is 0.8 m/s2
and 1.1 m/s2. During emergency braking the deceleration shall be 1.3 m/s2.
0.5 Civil Engineering
Geometric Design Norms

The design parameters related to the Metro system described herewith have
been worked out based on a detailed evaluation, experience and
internationally accepted practices. Various alternatives were considered for
most of these parameters but the best-suited ones have been adopted for
the system as a whole. The design parameters as suggested in the earlier
studies for Andheri - Ghatkopar section have also been modified so as the
same parameters are applicable for all metro corridors in Mumbai.
Horizontal curves are provided with mimimum radius of curve as 100 m

which will have permissible speed of 40 kmph. All the curves are
transistioned for comfort and safety. Vertical curves are provided at each
change of gradient with a radius of 2500 m except in certain cases the
radius is kept as 1500 m.
The viaducts carrying the tracks will have a vertical clearance of minimum
5.5 m above road level. For meeting this requirement with the ‘U’ shaped
pre-stressed concrete girders, the rail level will be about 8.5 m above the
road level. However, at stations which are located above central median,
the rail level will be 12 m above road level. These levels will, however, vary
marginally depending upon where the stations are located.
Gradients
Normally the stations shall be on level stretch. In limiting cases station may
be on a grade of 0.1 %. Between stations, generally the grades may not be
steeper than 2.0 %. However, Where existing road gradients are steeper
than 2 %, gradients upto 4% (compensated) can be provided in short
stretches on the main line.
Design Speed
The maximum sectional speed will be 80 km/h. However, the applied cant,
and length of transition will be decided in relation to normal speeds at
various locations, as determined by simulation studies (to be done at
detailed design stage) of alignment, vertical profile and station locations.
Description of Alignment
Project Area
The project area has two distinct sections viz.Versova-Andheri (western
segment) and Andheri-Ghatkopar (Eastern segment). Versova is the old
fishermen village located in the west cost. The Versova-Andheri area has
developed in the last 20 years and has mixed land use predominantly
residential and education institutions .Whereas, Andheri-Ghatkopar (upto

Executive Summary
Saki Naka) is the earlier development, Andheri is the most important sub
urban station on west ern Railway and Ghatkopar is the most important
station on Central railway. This area serves the Marol industrial area of
MIDC, Sahar International airport and nearby developing office/commercial
complexes. The section Saki Naka to Ghatkopar is mainly residential and
do not have proper road access.
Alignment
The corridor is proposed as elevated system and will traverse through the
center of the existing arterial roads of Jai Prakash Road and Mathuradas
Vasanji Road (Andheri-Kurla Road). A small length of the road near
Asalpha is not existing but is taken up for development by MMRDA as a part
of MUIP. The total length of the corridor is 11.07km. A maintenance depot
will be located on Jai Prakash Road near D.N. Nagar in about 12.25
Hectares of, land which is almost vacant. The key alignment is shown in
index plan and index section.
It is suggested that the longitudinal section of the proposed DP road in

Asalpha area be reviewd so as to reduce the pier height of the Metro
Alignment in Asalpha and Golibar road – Ghatkopar stretch.
It was indicated by MMRDA, that road widening /construction activity will be

taken up prior to Metro construction and the roads with their full ROW will be
available for Metro construction and existin median shall remain median of
widened road. Hence, the alignment planning, station planning, assessment
of land requirement for the Metro system and other associated facilities etc.
have been done accordingly.
Viaduct Structure
The proposed viaduct structure for the Mumbai Metro is a 'U' shape deck
carrying two tracks on single pier located on the median of the road. The
width of the deck is 9.1 m and the pier will be 1.45 m to1.6 m diameter. A
road clearance of 5.5 m is ensured below the viaduct structure. The
foundation shall be pile foundation at most of the locations though pile
foundation socketed in rock or open foundations may be necessary at
certain isolated locations. The superstructure shall be pre-cast segmental
construction which will cause minimal inconvenience to the road users.
Station Locations & Planning

Stations have been located so as to serve major passenger destinations
and to enable convenient integration with other modes of transport.
However effort has also been made to propose station locations, such that
inter station distances are as uniform as possible. The average spacing of
stations is kept close to one km.

Executive Summary
LIST OF STATIONS (VERSOVA - GHATKOPER)

SL.NO NAME CHAINAGE INT.-DIST(M)
DEAD END W 3733.66 -
1 VERSOVA W 3139.6 -
2 D N NAGAR W 2139.24 1000.36
3 AZAD NAGAR W 1344 795.24
4 ANDHERI 0 1344
5 WEH E 995.9 995.9
6 CHAKALA E 2279.09 1283.19
7 AIR PORT ROAD E 3014.28 735.19
8 MAROL NAKA E 3660.12 645.84
9 SAKINAKA E 4696.02 1035.9
10 SUBHASH NAGAR E 6046.49 1350.47
11 ASALPHA ROAD E 6788.51 742.02
12 GHATKOPER E 7786.31 997.8
DEAD END E 8253.33 -
AVG.INT.STN DITANCE 993.26
Twelve stations are planned on the Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor.

All the stations on the corridor are elevated. Stations are located on the
middle of the road and designed with elevated concourse with access from
both sides of the road.
All the elevated stations are provided with side platforms. This has been
planned to avoid reverse curves on approach of the stations. This
arrangement also provides the flexibility of constructing viaduct through the
stations and constructing the stations enveloping the viaduct or combined
structural arrangement for stations including the track carrying structure.
An interchange station with the North - South corridor is planned at

D.N.Nagar. The second corridor `Colaba- Bandra- Charkop’ (North – South)
flies over the first corridor as double elevated. The station has a common
concourse at ground level. A link line between the two corridors through
depot is also provided near this station for transfer of rakes for operational
purpose only.
Stations have been divided into two distinct areas, namely public and non-
public (technical areas). The public area is further sub divided into unpaid
and paid area. Provision for escalators are made at all stations in paid area
for future. However at a few important stations escalators shall be provided
from the beginning itself. Lifts for disabled passengers are provided at all
stations.
Traffic integration facilities are provided at following locations:-

· Andheri Metro Station with Andheri Suburban Railway Station.
· Ghatkopr Metro Station with Ghatkopar Suburban Railway Station

Executive Summary
· Versova with Versova Bus Depot.
In addition facilities are also proposed for integration with city buses at
importanat stations.
Geo Technical Investigation

Geotechnical investigations were carried out along both the corridors upto a
depth of 30 m in soil, 10 m in soft rock and 5 m in hard rock. Soil and rock
samples were collected and tested in laboratory.
The sub-soil strata at proposed site comprises of various types of layers

such as, Silty Sand, Sandy Clay, Silty Sandy Clay with gravel , Slightly
weathered to fresh BRECCIA/ SHALE/ LIMESTONE, Highly to moderately
weathered SANDSTONE/ BRECCIA/ BASALT Completely weathered rock.
For the elevated section pile foundation with 1.2m dia piles socketed in rock
is recommended. The bearing capacity of soil is not likely to cause any
problem for the foundations.
Utilities
The proposed Metro alignment is passing along major arterial roads of the
city road network, which are serving Institutional, commercial and residential
areas. A large number of surface and sub-surface utility services viz.
sewers, water mains, storm water drains, telephone cables, electric poles,
traffic signals etc. are existing along the proposed alignment. Details of the
existing utility services along the proposed alignment have been collected
from the concerned authorities, i.e. Municipal Corporation of Greater
Mumbai(MCGM), Public Works Deptt. (PWD), Irrigation and Flood
Department, MCGM, BEST (Bombay Electric Supply & Transportation),
Mumbai Traffic Police, BSES(Bombay Sub-urb Electric Supply)/Reliance
Energy, TATA Power, Mahanagar Gas Ltd., MMRDA & MAHADA, TATA
Tele Services, Reliance Info. Ltd, Western & Central Railway etc. The
affected portions of the services with reference to the proposed alignment
were identified and temporary diversion & relocation proposals of the
affected services have been indicated.
Land Requirement
Since land is a scarce commodity especially in metropolitan areas, every
effort has been made to keep land requirement to the barest minimum and
acquisition of private property is minimal. Land is mainly required for Depot
and route alignment on sharp bends, station buildings, platforms, entry/exit
structures, traffic integration, power sub-stations, administrative buildings
and temporary construction depots / work sites etc.
Land requirement on the Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor is about

12.64 hectares out which 0.031 hectares belongs to government while
balance 12.61 hectare is private land.

Executive Summary
Another depot is alternative site located at Godrej area (Exhibition Ground),

where 20 Hactare land is required for all facilities including Test Track.
0.6 MAINTENANCE DEPOTS
On the Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor a maintenance depot along

with minmum repairing facilities has been proposed at D.N.Nagar . The depot
is partly elevated due to site constraints. A transfer link between this corridor
and the North- South corridor ( Colaba- Bandra- Charkop) has also been
proposed from this depot. The area of the Depot being planned on the
corridor is about 12.25 Hectares. The site has a road approach from the J.P
Road. A washing plant is also proposed here.
Alternatively depot at Godrej land (exhibition ground) is also suitable though

it requires a link line of 1.625 km. for approach. It is suggested that the land
be reserved for future use as depot with full net work of Mumbai Metro.
Holding capacity of the Depot has been planned to be 45 rakes of 6 coach

each for inspection purposes. Daily tests and checks shall be done at
stabling sidings. 7 day, 15 day and 45 day inspection shall be done inside
the Inspection Shed. The facilities shall be provided in phases and
augmented as the train frequency and formation increases due to growth in
traffic. Overhauling of the rakes is not planned at this depot.
0.7 Train Operation Plan
Any public transport system, particularly a Metro system, is made attractive

by providing high frequency service both during peak and off-peak hours.
For this purpose short trains (4 coach consist) are proposed initially at 5
minutes frequency during peak periods. The frequency can be brought
down to 3 minutes in future depending upon the demand.
Salient features of the proposed train operation plan are:
¨ Running of services for about 19 hours of the day (4.30 AM to

midnight ) with a station dwell time of 30 seconds.
¨ Make up time of 5-10%, with 8-12% coasting.
¨ Average speed of 32 kmph.
Each 4-coach train will consist of two motor cars(MC) and two Driving
Trailer Cars (TC), ( DTC-MC-MC-DTC). while 6 coach train will consist of
two Motor Cars(MC) , two Driving Trailer Cars (DTC) and two Trailer
Cars(TC). The capacity of each coach and trains is given below:
DTC : 282 passengers, MC and TC : 307 passengers
4-Car Train : 1178 passengers , 6 Car Train : 1792 passengers

Executive Summary
Train operation plan (headway and train composition) for the year 2011,
2021 and 2031 during the peak hours is given below.
· Year 2011
The operation on Varsova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor is planned with
4-car trains at 5 minutes headway in the first year of operation with
Peak Hour Peak Direction Capacity of 14136 . The capacity planned is
less than the peak demand. This optimum capacity decided might slightly
cause over crowding on few inter station section, but will avoid excessive
under loading on most of the sections.
· Year 2021
The operation on - Varsova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor is planned
with 4-car trains at 4 minutes headway for the year of operation i.e. 2021
to meet the Peak Hour Peak Direction demand of 23590 . The capacity
planned is less than the peak demand. This optimum capacity decided
might slightly cause over crowding on three inter station sections, but will
avoid excessive under loading on most of the sections.
· Year 2031
The operation on Line 1- Varsova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor is
planned with 4 - car trains at 3 minutes headway for the year of
operation i.e. 2031 to meet the Peak Hour Peak Direction Demand of
30547 . The normal capacity planned is less than the peak demand. This
optimum capacity decided might slightly cause over crowding on some
inter station sections, but will avoid excessive under loading on most of the
balance sections.
Details of capacity provided is summarised below:
Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar Corridor
Year 2011 2021 2031

Cars/trains 4 4 4
Head way (Minutes) 5 4 3
PHPDT Demand 15565 23590 30550
PHPDT Capacity 14136 17670 23560
Available
6 car trains can be introduced in case demand picks up, particularly if

the other corridors are commissioned.
No. of Coaches required

The of coaches required in the year 2011, 2021, 2031 are also given below.
These includes operation and maintenance reserve.
2011 2021 2031

Total 56 64 80

Executive Summary
0.8 POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply System

Power supply is required for operation of Metro system – for running trains,
for station services, workshops, depots & other maintenance infrastructure.
Broad estimation of auxiliary and traction power demand is made based on
the following requirements: -
(i) Specific energy consumption of rolling stock – 70KWh/1000 GTKM
(ii) Regeneration by rolling stock – 30%
(iii) Elevated/at –grade station load – initially 250KW, which will increase
to 350 KW in the year 2031
(iv) Depot auxiliary load - initially 2000KW, which will increase to 2500
KW in the year 2031.
Power requirements have been assessed for the year 2011, 2021 and
2031, which are briefly summarized below:-
Power Demand Estimation (MVA)
Corridor Use
2011 2021
Traction 7 9
Versova – Andheri-
Auxiliary 6 8
Ghatkopar Corridor
Total 13 17
Keeping in view the reliability requirements, two 33/25kV Receiving Sub-

stations (one as stand by) are proposed to be set up (one at depot and
other at Marol Naka). This is an economical solution without compromising
reliability. Based on the discussions with Reliance Energy Ltd., it is
proposed to avail power supply for traction as well as auxiliary services from
the following grid sub-stations at 33kV voltage through cable feeders as
indicated below.
Sources of Power Supply

S. No Corridor Grid sub-station of Location of Approx. length
Reliance Energy Ltd. RSS of Metro of 33kV cables
(Input voltage) Authority
1. Versova Receiving Depot 1km.
Versova - sub-station (220/33kV) (Double circuit)
2. Ghatkopar Arrey Receiving sub- Marol Naka 3km.
section station (220/33kV) (Double circuit)
Further transmission of electric power will be done through 33kV cables,

which will be laid along the alignment on viaduct for catering to traction and
auxiliary power requirements.

Executive Summary
Auxiliary Sub-stations (33/0.415kV):- Auxiliary sub-stations (ASS) are to

be provided at each station. A separate ASS is required at depot. The ASS
will be located at mezzanine or platform level inside a room. The auxiliary
load requirements have been assessed at 350 kW for elevated stations.
Accordingly, two dry type cast resin transformers (33/0.415kV) of 400 kVA
capacity are proposed to be installed at the stations (one transformer as
standby). Depot ASS will also be provided with 2x2000 kVA auxiliary
transformers.
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system:-

The entire system of power supply (receiving, traction & auxiliary supply)
shall be monitored and controlled from a centralized Operation Control
Centre (OCC) through SCADA system.
Standby Diesel Generator (DG) sets:- In the unlikely event of

simultaneous tripping of all the input power sources or grid failure, the
power supply to stations as well as to trains will be interrupted. It is,
therefore, proposed to provide a standby DG set of 100 KVA capacity at the
stations to cater to the following essential services:
(i) Essential lighting
(ii) Signaling & telecommunications
(iii) Fire fighting system
(iv) Lift operation
(v) Fare collection system
Silent type DG sets with low noise levels are proposed.
Energy Saving Measures

Energy charges of any metro system constitute a substantial portion of its
operation & maintenance (O & M) costs. Therefore, it is imperative to
incorporate energy saving measures in the system design itself. The
auxiliary power consumption of metros is generally more than the traction
energy consumed by train movement during initial years of operation.
Subsequently, traction power consumption increases with increase in train
frequency/composition in order to cater more traffic.
Following Energy saving measures are recommended:
· Light weight, modern rolling stock with 3 phase VVVF drive

· Regenerative Braking
· Use of natural light at stations and sectioning of load
· Machine room less lifts
· Energy efficient, auto sensor escalators
· Energy efficient equipments
· SCADA for energy control
Electric Power Tariff

The cost of electricity is a significant part of Operation & Maintenance
(O&M) charges of the Metro System, which constitutes about 25-35% of
Executive Summary
total annual working cost. Therefore, it is the key element for the financial
viability of the Project. The annual energy consumption is assessed to be
about 30 million units in initial years (2011), which will double by horizon
year 2031. In addition to ensuring optimum energy consumption, it is also
necessary that the electric power tariff be kept at a minimum in order to
contain the O& M costs. Therefore, the power tariff for Mumbai Metro should
be at effective rate of purchase price (at 33kV voltage level) plus nominal
administrative charges i.e. on a no profit no loss basis. This is expected to
be in the range of Rs. 2.50-2.75 per unit. It is proposed that Government of
Maharashtra takes necessary steps to fix power tariff for Mumbai Metro at
“No Profit No Loss” basis. However financial analysis has been done with
tariff as Rs.2.75 per unit and Rs.4.50 per unit (present day tarriff)
0.9 Environmental Impact Assessment
A detailed Environmental Impact Assessment Study has been carried out

along the proposed alignment. As a part of this Study, comprehensive
environmental baseline data was collected. Both positive and negative
impacts of the project were assessed in detail. An important environmental
consideration of this project is that neither any forest area nor any plants /
trees of endangered species exist along the proposed alignment, though few
Jhuggi clusters / unauthorised constructions and residential / commercial
properties are affected. To minimise the negative environmental impacts, a
comprehensive Environment Management Plan needs to be drawn up
based on the recommendations of the environment report, both for
construction and operational phases, outlining necessary remedial
measures.
0.10 COST ESTIMATES
Preliminary Cost Estimates for the corridor has been prepared at June’2004
prices. The estimated cost at June’2004 prices is Rs.1488 crores without
taxes but including land cost. The cost including taxes and duties is Rs.
1670 Crores. The completion cost with project completion in the year 2010
is Rs 1936 crores including escalation, but excluding IDC.
ABSTRACT CAPITAL COST ESTIMATES (costs at June, 2004 price level)
Description Amount
S. No. (Rs. in
crores)
1. Land 304.65
2. Civil Engineering Works
2.1 Alignment and Formati on
2.1.1 Elevated 243.54
2.1.2 Utilities (Civil Works) including Road Restoration 33.21
2.1.3 Rehabilitation & Resettlement 7.00
2.1.4 Station Buildings (elevated) 127.00
2.2 Permanent Way 54.80
Sub-total (1 & 2) 777.2
3. Electrical Works
3.1 Traction & Power Supply including Lifts, Escalators, etc. 116.38
Executive Summary
Description Amount
S. No. (Rs. in
crores)
Sub-total (Item 3) 116.38
4. Signaling & Telecommunications Works
4.1 Signalling & Telecommunication including Cable Diversions 127.31
4.2 AFC Installations at Stations 30.00
Sub-total (Item 4) 157.31
5. Depot Elevated 130.00
6. Rolling Stock (in 2011) 238.00
7. General Charges @ 3% on all items except 1 33.21
8. Contingency (3% on all items from 1 to 7) 43.35
Grand Total: 1488.45
Say Rs. 1488 crores
The overall capital cost estimates with Duties and Taxes is given below:
the cost details of Airport Link is also shown:
Taxes and duties
Total
cost
without Total cost
Taxes & custom works excise sale with tax &
duties duty tax duty tax total Duties
Overall
Capital cost
excluding
Aiport link 1488.46 80.20 31.74 48.78 20.93 181.66 1670.12
Aiport link 88.88 7.23 1.11 3.01 1.49 12.84 101.72
Overall capital cost excluding Airport link Rs. 1670 cr
*Overall capital cost including Airport link Rs.1772 cr.
· The consultants have recommended not to include the Airport port link
connection, as there is no improvement in the revenues due to it’s addition.
In fact, it would be resulting in capacity reduction on Versova – Andheri –
Ghatkopar corridor and would increase the operation cost. However, the
study review committee recommended that the Airport link to be provided.
Therefore, the cost estimates have been shown separately.
0.11 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
Economic
The proposed system will provide a variety of benefits to the city and
society, viz. savings in fuel consumption, vehicle operating costs, travel time,
reduction in road accidents and air pollution etc. Economic analysis has
been carried out for the proposed Metro network by comparing “with” and
“without” project scenario. The ‘with’ project scenario takes into account,
estimated total costs that the local economy would be called upon to bear.
The ‘without’ project scenario envisages a situation wherein the existing
infrastructure continues to be utilized taking into account increased
estimated costs due to higher projected traffic.

Executive Summary
The benefits accruing as a result of project implementation are
· savings in vehicle operating cost

· reduction in congestion
· saving in passenger travel time
· reduced pollution and fuel consumption.
The cost and benefit streams arising under the above situations have been
estimated in terms of market prices and economic values have been
computed by converting the former using appropriate shadow prices.
The Economic Internal Rate of Return (EIRR) has been worked out using
Discounted Cash Flow technique to the net benefit stream at economic
prices and its value is estimated as 21.53 % . This falls to 20.00 and 21.04
respectively in case of increase in cost by 10% or decrease in traffic
materialization by 10% respectively.
0.12 FINANCIAL ANALYSIS
Costs
The project cost at June 2004 prices is Rs. 1488 crore including the land
cost of 305 crores. The completion cost including the escalation is Rs.
1720 crore. Year wise investment plan is given below. The expenditure
spills over to 2009-10 and 2010-11 though the commissioning of the
corridor is planned in 2009 end.
Year –wise Investment

Figs in Rs. Cr.
Construction Completion
Year Cost (Fixed) Land Cost Cost
2006-07 59 152.50 217
2007-08 414 152.50 628
2008-09 473 571
2009-10 177 225
2010-11 59 79
Total 1183 305 1720
The total O&M cost in the year 2009 is expected to be Rs. 75.39 crores. For
the purpose of financial analysis the depreciation cost (3% on project cost
excluding land cost) and the replacement cost (20 year life for signalling
equipments and 30 years for traction and rolling stock) has been taken into
account in addition to the capital cost in the year 2024 and 2034 for
additional rolling stock.

Executive Summary
Revenue
The trip generation and trip distribution for various years for the stand alone
system is as follows
Year Trips per day @ 60% of full

network traffic
2009 3.91
2011 4.28 (50%)
2021 6.65
2031 8.83
Trip Distribution
Trip Distribution
60.00%
50.00%
% of trips
40.00%
30.00%
20.00%
10.00%
0.00%
0-3 3.-8 >8
Average Distance (kms)
The fare structure has been estimated @ 1.5 times of the ordinary bus fare
prevalent in the year 2009. The bus fares for the year 2009 have been
obtained by escalating the existing BEST fares by an overall factor of 10%.
These fares have been escalated once every two years @ 5% per annum.
The proposed fare structure in the year of commissioning is given below:
Fare Structure in 2009 (in Rs.)

Distance in kms Bus Fare - Bus Fare - 1.5 times Metro fare -
2004 2009 bus fare 2009
0-3 3 3.3 4.95 5
3.-8 5 5.5 8.25 8
>8 7.5 8.25 12.38 12

Executive Summary
Other revenues from Property Development and advertisement have been

estimated at 5% of the fare box revenues. Apart from development of
property on metro stations and depot it is possible to raise resources
through leasing of parking rights at stations, advertisement on trains and
tickets, advertisements within stations and parking lots, advertisements on
viaducts, columns and other metro structures, co-branding rights to
corporates, film shootings and special events on metro premises.
Financial Internal Rate of Return (FIRR)
The Financial Internal Rate of Return (FIRR) obtained with the above
revenues and costs is 7.56 % over a horizon period of 30 years of operation
(2009-2039). The various sensitivities with regard increase/decrease in
capital costs, O&M costs and revenues are as shown below:
FIRR Sensitivity
CAPITAL COSTS
20% 10% 10% 5%
Increase Increase decrease Decrease
FIRR 6.02% 6.77% 8.43% 7.99%
REVENUES
5% 10% 10% 20%
Increase Increase Decrease Decrease
FIRR 8.33% 9.04% 5.73% 3.12%
O&M COST S
10% 10%
Increase Decrease
FIRR 6.75% 8.31%
Financing Options
A wide variety of models can be theoretically considered for financing of
metros ranging from completely government owned to totally privatised.
There are certain benefits and drawbacks of both. Whereas completely
government owned lack transparency and are shackled by bureaucracy the
completely privately owned ones would not serve the social sector but be
lured by the objective of profit maximisation. The social purpose of such
projects can never be ignored, however, at the same time it is of utmost
importance to run these systems with efficiency comparable to the private
sector. These purposes can be served by creating an SPV independent of
the bureaucratic controls and vested with sufficient powers to run the system
independently or be evolving some form of Public –Private partnership which
would bring together the strengths of both the public and private sectors.
The Delhi metro model is the SPV model which has been able to construct
and run the system efficiently without compromising the social objective.

Executive Summary
SPV Approach
The Corporate model involves the formation of a special purpose vehicle
(SPV) to own/implement and also to operate the project. There is a
possibility/potential of involving some private sector entity as equity holder.
The financial structure of the project can then be determined in such a way
that a part of the capital cost is contributed as equity and the remaining is
borrowed as senior or subordinate debt from the government, financial
institutions, banks or bilateral / multilateral funding agencies. Another source
of funding which has been extensively used in Hong Kong is funds from real
estate development for financing capital expenditure. In this case upfront
contribution required from the equity holders is much less than the project
cost. The debt and the interest there on are repaid by the SPV from its net
revenue streams. Long time debt is normally possible only when
government guarantees are made available for repayment of loan as well as
for the interest charges there on. Because of the need for high volume of
debts, the project viability depends to a large extent on the rate of interest
and the tenure of the debt. The SPV, being a corporate body, has flexibility
in implementation and operation of the project. It can be responsive to
customer requirement and can attempt various ways of revenue
augmentation. SPV being a corporate body is liable to pay corporate tax
and other taxes if applicable. The above model can be further improved
upon if after construction the SPV hands over the operations and
maintenance of the same to a private body.
PUBLIC-PRIVATE PARTNERSHIPS
The various forms Public-private partnerships can take are Supply and
service contracts, Management contracts, Leases, Concessions, Joint
ventures and Divestiture. Supply and service contracts and management
contracts are in the nature of contracts awarded to a private party as out
sourced jobs or management of the operations. Concessions not only give
the private operator the responsibility of O&M of utility asset but also for
investment. The ownership remains with the government but full use rights
vest with the operator. Concessions are a form of lease in which the
contractor agrees to make certain fixed investments and retains the use of
the assets for a longer contract period. In this approach, the state (or
municipality or other public entity) delegates the right to provide a service to
the private sector and yet retains some control over the sector by
incorporating a concession contract or license defining the terms and
conditions (including the rights and obligations of the service provider) that
will govern the infrastructure project or company. This type of arrangement
is most suited to sectors with monopolistic characteristics. This may take the
form of lease and operate (or affermage) contract, under which the private
contractor is responsible at his own risk for providing the service, including
operation and maintenance of the infrastructure against payment of a lease
fee. The other forms of concession could be BOOT/BOT/BOO. These are
used generally for Greenfield projects. The concessionare in such projects
is also responsible for building and financing new investments. At the end of
the concession term the sector assets are returned to the state. BOO (build
own operate) is a similar scheme but it does not involve transfer of assets.
Executive Summary
All these forms of concession stipulate transferring of the right and the
obligation to provide an infrastructure service to a private company. This
company takes over responsibility for the operations and at least for a part
of the commercial risk of service provision. The concessionaire is, by and
large, held responsible for achieving specified results in service delivery and
is given some freedom to choose the means for meeting those targets.
The success of this type of contracts depends on their duration which

reflects the number of years the investors need to recoup their investment.
In the French style concessions (affermage) the assets return to the state at
the end of the period free of charge or for a nominal amount. The public
authority remains responsible for financing most investments; hence,
affermage are shorter (10-15 years) than Greenfield BOTs or concessions
requiring major upfront capital expenditures. In the latter cases these can
exceed 30 years.
The concessionaire approach has not been adopted in the rail based urban
transit system in India because the project construction costs are very high.
This naturally involves requirement of huge amount of debt to be raised from
the market sources to undertake such a project. The highway sector has
been quite successful in the country in developing Highway projects through
the BOT .Power sector has a very limited experience of project development
under BOO route.
It is important to understand that project beyond the size of Rs 300 cr have
not been successful in attracting debt in the Indian market. Recent
experience of road sector suggests that projects in the size of Rs 50 to Rs
200 cr could only be developed under BOT mechanism, with majority of
projects in the lower end category. The success of these projects was solely
dependent on the assurance of traffic or revenue. These projects were
based on a clearly defined risk mitigation mechanism.
There is no available history to justify the development of mega transport

projects under BOT route in India except in the case of Konkan Railway
Corporation. KRCL was the first effort by the Indian Railways in the form of
a corporate enterprise for the construction of a railway track. The finances
for KRCL came from the promoters – the Ministry of Railways and the State
governments of Goa, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Kerala- and the issue of
tax-free bonds. The funds could be secured at an average cost of 11%.
This emerges from the inability of the major debt market players to provide
resources for large projects. The other, and the most important factor
responsible for the inability of raise resources from the market is the inability
of project developer to come out with a risk mitigation mechanism
acceptable to the lenders.
The project costs are excluding taxes and duties which presumes that
exemption from payment of taxes and duties would be available to the
project.
In case if PPP route is adopted for implementation, the land would be made
available to the concessionaire and the government would invest 26% of the
Executive Summary
project cost as equity. It is also presumed that the additional capital required
in the years 2024 and 2034 would be shared in the same proportion as the
original investment. Moreover, the replacement of the rolling stock would not
be to the concessionaire’s account. However, the return on (Pre Tax) equity
with a debt-equity ratio of 1.5:1 would be 7.81% and with debt : equity ratio
of 2:1would be 7.62. The rate of interest for the debt is assumed as 11% p.a.
In this option Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation’s (MMRC) role would be

limited to that of a regulatory authority. Thus MMRC would monitor the
implementation of the project and on its commissioning perform the tasks
such as laying down passenger fares, targets for the minimum number of
services to be run by the Concessionaire, their frequency, punctuality,
reliability and safety, etc. MMRC, in this option, will have to enter into an
agreement with the Concessionaire clearly listing out obligations and rights
of the Concessionaire and the client. Following are the important terms,
which are usually included in the agreement.
· Land required for the project and 26% of equity shall be made
available to the Concessionaire. The balance project cost is to be
mobilised by the Concessionaire himself.
· Implementation of the project and its subsequent operation and
maintenance is to be the responsibility of the Concessionaire. The
concession is for a period of 30 years of operation plus the period of
construction.
· A guarantee for the minimum level of ridership would be required to
be given to the concessionaire. If this level of ridership does not
materialize for any reason, the Concessionaire will have to be
compensated for the shortfall.
· Operation and maintenance expenditure for the project shall be
borne by the Concessionaire. All revenues generated shall go to the
Concessionaire including revenues from property development,
advertisements, etc.
· Standards to which the assets of the project are required to be
maintained and the quality of the assets at the time of transfer of
these assets to the Client at the end of the concession period should
be clearly spelt out.
· Normally a metro system will require addition of assets like rolling
stock, etc. over a period of time due to increase in traffic. The source
of funding of the same is explicitly spelt out in the agreement — the
Concessionaire or the Client. Similarly, the responsibility of
replacement of assets on completion of their life, if due during the
period of Concession, is clearly spelt out — whether by the client or
the Concessionaire.
· A mechanism for quick resolution of disputes between the
Concessionaire and the Client is provided for.
· Insurance liability of the Concessionaire is indicated.
· The Concessionaire transfers all the assets to the Client at the end of
the concession period at a nominal residual value or free of cost.

Executive Summary
In case of adopting PPP model, certain risks are to be shared between the
government and the concessionaire. The details of risks and mitigation
measures are described in the report.
0.13 IMPLEMENTATION PLAN
On receipt of the Detailed Project Report, following action will require to be

taken for implementing the Versova - Andheri - Ghatkopar section of
Mumbai Metro project:
· Approval of the Detailed Project Report by Maharashtra State

Government and the Central Government, both the Governments
committing to an investment decision.
· Signing of an MOU between Maharashtra State Government and the
Central Government for firming up arrangements for equity and other
related items pertaining to this project.
· Providing legal cover for construction as well as operation and

maintenance stages of the project.
· In case the project cann't be implemented through PPP, the two

Governments to agree to financing of the debt portion of the project
through an SPV and also to the time frame for completing the project.
Institutional Arrangement
It is recommended to form an SPV for implementation of the project. As the
SPV needs to be vested with adequate powers to implement and operate
the system, it is recommended to form the SPV on the lines of Delhi Metro
Rail Corporation (DMRC). The SPV can be named as Mumbai Metro Rail
Corporation (MMRC). It is proposed that the State Government and the
Central Government, each will have total equity of 40% shared equally.
State govt. shall provide the land cost as an interest free subordinate debt to
the SPV. As the SPV formed on the lines of DMRC will have equal equity
from Central and State Governments, the number of Directors from the State
and the Central Government will also be equal. While the Managing Director
will be a nominee of the State Government, the Chairman should be the
Secretary, Ministry of Urban Development and Poverty Alleviation of the
Central Government. The Board of Directors (BOD) are to be vested with full
powers to implement the project with adequate delegation of power to the
Managing Director for day to day working.
It is also recommended that a 'High Power Committee' headed by Chief

Secretary, Maharashtra Government and comprising secretaries of the
concerned departments of the State Government and heads of civic
agencies be constituted to sort out the problems connected with
implementation of the project.

Executive Summary
IMPLEMENTATION PROGRAMME
The suggested implementation schedule for implementing the project on
PPP basis is given below
Suggested Implementation Schedule on BOT
S. No. Item of Work Completion Date
1 Approval of DPR 31.10.2004
2 Obtain Government Clearances 28.02.2005
3 Arranging Consultant for selection of Completed
concessionaire
4 Calling for Tender on BOT (Based on In progress
Feasibility Report)
5 Finalising Suitable Concessionaire 30.05.2005
6 Financial closer 30.11.2005
7 Execution of work and Procurement of 01.12.2005 - 30.11.2008
equipments, coaches and installations
8 Testing and Commissioning 01.12.2008 - 31.12.2008
9 Revenue Operation 31.03.2009
The land acquisition process can start immediately after approval of DPR so
that land is available before construction works take off.
It is also recommended to appoint an independent engineering consultant to
monitor and advise MMRDA during the execution phase.
IMPLEMENTATION THROUGH SPV

In case the PPP approach is not successful, the project can be implemented
through public sector as in case of Delhi. In such a case a SPV is to be
formed on the pattern of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (DMRC) and can be
named as MMRC (Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation). Once the SPV formed,
it has to take action for appointment of General Consultants for project
management including preparation of tender documents. Till the General
Consultants are in position, MMRC should appoint an interim Consultant for
all preliminary and enabling jobs such as land acquisition, detailed design of
civil structures, utility diversions, etc.
A suggested project implementation schedule is given below. The proposed

date of commissioning of the section with suggested dates of important
milestones is given below

Executive Summary
Implementation Schedule through SPV

3 Attempt to fix Concessionaire 30.05.2005
4 Fix interim Consultant for preliminary 30.06.2005
works
5 Fix General Consultant 31.12.2005
6 Tender Finalisation for Civil Works for 30.06.2006
Viaduct
7 Execution of works and Procurement of 01.07.2006 - 31.06.2009
LEGAL FRAME WORK

Construction of Mumbai Metro phase I is expected to commence soon. Out
of its three corridors in phase I, the first corridor may be ready for
commissioning in about three years and other corridors may be ready for
commissioning after a further period of two years. Thus there is immediate
need to have a legislation to provide legal cover to the construction stage of
Mumbai Metro. Enactment of any new legislation is a time-consuming
exercise. Experience has shown that it takes a minimum of two to three
years from conceptualisation stage for a new legislation to be enacted. To
enable construction of Mumbai Metro to commence in the year 2005-06, it
has, therefore, become necessary to extend the Metro Railways
(Construction of Works) Act, 1978 to Mumbai.
As for the legal cover to the operation and maintenance stage of Mumbai
Metro, it is high time to go in for a comprehensive legislation which will cater
to both construction as well as operation and maintenance stages of Metro
Railways in all million plus cities. After that Act is enacted, the existing Acts,
namely, Metro Railways (Construction of Works) Act, 1978 and Delhi Metro
(Operation and Maintenance) Act, 2002 and the Calcutta Metro Railway
(Operation and Maintenance) Temporary Provisions Act, 1985 can be
repealed. The comprehensive legislation should, inter-alia, contain
provisions for the following:
· Functions and powers of the organisation to be entrusted with the

tasks of implementing a metro system and its subsequent operation
and maintenance. This organisation should be conferred adequate
powers to enable it to expeditiously implement the metro system and
later to operate and maintain it without any problem.
· Acquisition of land for construction of a metro railway, including
acquisition of rights to use underground space below privately owned
buildings for laying a metro line.

Executive Summary
· Safety organization for certifying safety of a metro line before it is

opened for public carriage of passengers. This organization should
also be entrusted with the role of enquiring into the causes of
accidents involving metro trains and suggesting remedial measures
for avoiding recurrence of such accidents.
· Statutory authority for deciding the compensation payable for losses,
injuries, casualties, etc. arising out of accidents involving metro
trains.
· Penalty for offences committed in metro trains or metro premises.
a maintenance depot along with minmum repairing facilities has been

proposed at D.N.Nagar in about 12.25 Hectares of land.
A transfer link between this corridor and the North- South corridor ( Colaba-
Bandra- Charkop) has also been proposed from this depot.
A washing plant is also proposed here.

Alternatively depot at Godrej land (exhibition ground) is also suitable though
it requires a link line of 1.625 km
On the Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor. The depot is partly elevated
due to site constraints. The area of the Depot being planned on the corridor
is about. The site has a road approach from the J.P Road.
. For approach. It is suggested that the land be reserved for future use as
depot with full net work of Mumbai Metro.
Holding capacity of the Depot has been planned to be 45 rakes of 6 coach

each for inspection purposes. Daily tests and checks shall be done at
stabling sidings. 7 day, 15 day and 45 day inspection shall be done inside
the Inspection Shed. The facilities shall be provided in phases and
augmented as the train frequency and formation increases due to growth in
traffic. Overhauling of the rakes is not planned at this depot.

Chapter 1 – Introduction
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 BACKGROUND
1.1.1 Greater Mumbai - the capital of Maharashtra, is not only the financial capital of
India but the heart of commercial and trade activities of the Country as well. The
Island City has experienced rapid growth in economic activity and its suburbs are
growing faster than the Island City in terms of population distribution and activity
location. The major challenge is in promoting growth by adequate inputs into
infrastructure, which would improve quality of life of the residents.
1.1.2 Mumbai has become a victim of its own success. The employment opportunities it
offers have served as a major attraction for immigration from rural hinterland as well
as from all parts of the Country. Four-fold growth of population since 1951 has
been largely accommodated in the suburbs while highest concentration of jobs has
remained in the Island City. Moreover, the physical characteristics of the City are
such that the suburbs have been constrained to spread northwards only, and all
transport facilities are concentrated within three narrow corridors. This has put
great stress on all modes operating in these corridors.
1.1.3 The City with its present population of over 12 million generates about 14 million
trips in a day, with about 88 percent of the total trips catered by the suburban
railway and the public transport bus services provided by BEST. The ever growing
vehicular and passenger demands coupled with constraints on capacity
augmentation of the existing network have resulted in chaotic condition during peak
hours of the day.
1.1.4 The Government of Maharashtra has adopted a number of policies to alleviate this
situation by decentralising the City. Most notables of these include the
development of Navi Mumbai and Bandra – Kurla Complex. Navi Mumbai has
attracted close to one million people and provided about 2 lakh jobs outside
Greater Mumbai. The gradual relocation of city’s wholesale markets to Navi
Mumbai and establishment of new container port at Nava Sheva have helped in re-
distributing commercial vehicle trips and reducing the demand for road space in the
Island City.
1.2 DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE
1.2.1 The total population of Greater Mumbai in 2001 was 119.14 lakh (double of the
1971 population of 59.7 lakh). The rise in population during 1971-81 was around
38 percent and has remained around 20 percent during 1981-91 and 1991-2001
respectively. (refer Table 1.1)

Final Report Versova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor
Table 1.1
Population Growth in Greater Mumbai (in Millions)
Western Eastern Greater
Year Island City
Suburbs Suburbs Mumbai
1971 3.07 1.71 1.19 5.97
1981 3.28 2.86 2.10 8.24
1991 3.17 3.95 2.80 9.93
2001 3.35 5.10 3.46 11.91
1.2.2 The population growth in the island area during 1971 – 2001 is only 9 percent.
However, the growth in suburbs (western and eastern) has been phenomenal. The
suburban population has grown to almost 300 percent over the past 30 years.
As is evident, the share of island population has been declining continuously. The
proportion of population in island area has declined to 28 percent in 2001 from 51
percent in 1971. The share of suburbs has gone up to almost 72 percent of the
total population of Mumbai. Also, in 2001, the proportion of population in Western
suburbs is almost 43 percent of the total population of Mumbai while that in eastern
suburbs is 29 percent only.
1.3 EMPLOYMENT SCENARIO
1.3.1 The employment data of Greater Mumbai collected from the National Economic
Census for 1971, 1981, 1991 and 1998 is classified in 10 categories as given
below:
1. Agriculture, Forestry and Fishing

2. Mining and Quarrying
3. Manufacturing and Repair services
4. Electricity, Gas and Water
5. Construction
6. Wholesale & Retail trade and Restaurants & Hotels
7. Transport, Storage and Communication
8. Financing, Insurance, Real estate and Business services
9. Community, Social and Personal services
10. Others
1.3.2 The employment growth during 1971-1998 in different areas of Greater Mumbai is
shown in Table 1.2. The share of employment in Island City has fallen to 56
percent in 1991 from 72 percent in 1971. However, it has increased to 61 percent
in 1998. The share of employment in western suburbs was around 25 percent of
total employment in Greater Mumbai in 1998 and that of eastern suburbs was
about 15 percent.

Table 1.2
Employment in Different Areas of Greater Mumbai (in Millions)
Western Eastern Greater
Year Island City
Suburbs Suburbs Mumbai
1.09 0.24 0.19 1.53
1971
(71.90) (15.38) (12.71) (100.00)
2.19
1.39 0.51 0.29
1981 (100.00)
(63.62) (23.03) (13.35)
1.34 0.64 0.44 2.42
1991
(55.62) (26.30) (18.08) (100.00)
1.59 0.65 0.38 2.62
1998
(60.51) (24.91) (14.58) (100.00)
Note : Figures in brackets indicate the proportion of total employment
The change in employment in Greater Mumbai is presented in Table 1.3. It may be

seen that during 1991-98, the growth of employment in Island area was 18 percent,
while in western suburbs it was only 2 - 3 percent. In the eastern suburbs, this
figure has reduced by about 13 percent during 1991-98.
Table 1.3
Decadal Change in Employment in Greater Mumbai( in %)
Decade Island City Western Eastern Greater
suburbs Suburbs Mumbai
1971-81 27.34 115.41 51.12 43.92

1981-91 -3.57 25.97 49.34 10.30
1991-98 17.74 2.53 -12.69 8.24
1.4 LAND USE POLICY
MMRDA prepared a Regional Plan 1996 – 2011, for MMR as required under the
Maharashtra Regional & Town Planning Act 1966, which was approved by GOM.
1.4.1 Major recommendations of the Regional Plan are as follows:
A new Industrial Growth Policy should be framed with specific economic,

environmental and urban development objectives. Unlike the past, it should
also promote modern, technologically advanced, environment friendly
industries in Mumbai Municipal limits, and encourage changes in Mumbai’s
industrial structure, by facilitating revival of sick and obsolete industries.
The policy should minimise the adverse impact of new industrial growth on
environmental and civic infrastructure.
The policy should facilitate direct industrial growth in the underdeveloped
part of the Region to achieve balanced regional development.
The policy should help generate new employment opportunities.
1.4.2 As per the Regional Plan, a poly-nucleated land use structure has been
recommended for Mumbai Metropolitan Region (MMR). This clearly brings out

MMRDA’s plan of developing alternative employment growth centres at Bandra

Kurla Complex (BKC) in addition to the ones at Navi Mumbai. As per latest
estimates, BKC will generate around 200,000 jobs as compared to 700,000 jobs in
Navi Mumbai.
1.4.3 In the Island City Area and the suburbs, valuable and significant land parcels have
not been used since long. These areas belong to textile mills, which were shut
down in the eighties. Recently, the Government of Maharashtra through MMRDA
has evolved certain strategies for development of these areas and to re-develop
valuable land resources. Table 1.4 presents the total land area, which belongs to
textile mills, and the envisaged uses of the land area:
Table 1.4
Proposed Redevelopment of Textile Mill Land Area
S. No. Land Uses Area Sq. m.

1 BMC : Open Space / Community Facilities 313291
2 MHADA : Low Income Housing 313291
3 Commercial Use 313291
Total 939,874
1.5 VEHICLE REGISTRATION
1.5.1 The data on private vehicles in Greater Mumbai is available for three regions,
namely, the Island City, the Western and Eastern suburbs. The number of private
vehicles registered in Greater Mumbai is given in Table 1.5. The ratio of private
vehicles per thousand population is growing steadily, and has reached 68.30 in
2002. This clearly shows the inclination of people towards private vehicles. The
trend is also influenced by the rising income level and saturation of public transport
systems in Mumbai.
Table 1.5
Greater Mumbai Motor Vehicle Statistics
Year Private Vehicle Population Private Vehicle per

Registration 1000 population
1971 108146 5970575 18.11
1981 229185 8243405 27.80
1986 365190 8958013 40.76
1991 506959 9925891 51.07
1995 516640 10678015 48.38
1997 604503 11075187 54.58
1998 649654 11279279 57.60
2000 736852 11698814 62.99
2002 828769 12133955* 68.30
Note
* Estimated Population

1.5.2 The proportion of vehicles in island area has steadily reduced from 73 percent in
1981 to 40 percent in 2002, which is the same as the proportion of vehicles in
western suburbs. The number of vehicles in eastern suburbs is only 21 percent of
total vehicles in Mumbai. Distribution of vehicles in Island and Suburbs is shown in
table 1.6.
Table 1.6
Distribution and Growth of Vehicles in Island and Suburbs
Year Island Western suburbs Eastern Suburbs Total

1981 73% 16% 11% 100%
1991 58% 27% 15% 100%
1996 44% 37% 20% 100%
1998 41% 38% 20% 100%
2000 40% 39% 20% 100%
2002 40% 40% 21% 100%
1.6 SUBURBAN RAIL SYSTEM
1.6.1 The main skeleton of the rail network in Mumbai was laid down over 100 years ago,
initially to link Mumbai and adjacent townships. Electric suburban rail services were
started in 1923 in Mumbai by the Grand Indian Peninsula Railway (forebearer of
the Central Railway in Mumbai).
1.6.2 Today Mumbai is served by two of India’s zonal railways, the Western Railway
(WR) and the Central Railway (CR). The Western Railway line runs northwards
from Churchgate terminus station in the Mumbai CBD parallel to the West Coast of
the island towards northern and western India and Delhi. Suburban operations
extend for 60 kms northwards from Churchgate as far as Virar. The Central
Railway runs from Chhatrapati Shivaji Terminus (CST), located on the eastern side
of the CBD (approximately 1 km northeast of Churchgate) and serves a large part
of Central India. Suburban services extend from Mumbai CST as far as Kasara to
the northeast (120-Km ) and Karjat to the southeast (100-Km )
1.6.3 The CR is also responsible for services on the “Harbour Line” which runs from CST
station along the East Side of Mumbai Island to Rawli junction where the line splits.
One branch runs north west to join the Western Railway main line at Bandra, with
the other line continuing northwards to Kurla, before turning eastwards to serve
Chembur and Mankhurd and cross the new Thane Creek bridge to access Navi
Mumbai. At Wadala, the Mumbai port rail lines join the Harbour line and north of
Wadala, the harbour lines are shared with freight traffic to and from Mumbai docks.
1.6.4 Within the Mumbai area both zonal railways carry a combination of suburban, long
distance passenger and freight traffic. Daily passenger volumes are about 6.0
million mostly commuter trips within the Metropolitan Region and approximately 2.0
lakh long distance travellers.
1.6.5 Within Mumbai many suburban stations are less than 1.5 km apart and in some
cases less than 1 km. Such close stations are characteristic of a metropolitan
urban railway rather than a suburban system. In addition to the lines radiating from
Mumbai there is also a double line track connection between Vasai Road on the
Western Railway and Diva / Dombivli on the Central Railway. This allows long
distance north-south trains to bypass Mumbai.
1.6.6 All Western and Central railway lines within the Mumbai suburban area are Indian
Broad Gauge (1.676 m) and electrified using the 1500 volt d.c. overhead system.
The traction system is planned for conversion to 25 kV a.c. In some areas tracks
are prone to flooding during the monsoon season due to drainage system
shortcomings on adjacent land or to inadequate or partially blocked storm water
outlets.
1.6.7 Suburban services operate electric multiple units (EMU’s) predominantly formed as
9 car rakes (being upgraded to 12 car rakes). A multiple aspect colour light
signalling system is used. EMU’s are fitted with an Auxiliary Warning System
(AWS) which prevents motormen from exceeding 38 km/h when running under
single yellow (caution) signals and makes an emergency brake application if a red
(danger) signal is passed.
1.7 THE ROAD NETWORK
1.7.1 The road network has developed over many years, predominately in north-south
direction radial to the CBD within the constraints of the islands. There are very few
cross links with any continuity across all radials. Extensive development over much
of the island has led to the major traffic movements being concentrated into three
main corridors; western, central and eastern. The western corridor generally
provides a higher level of service than the central and eastern corridors. The
central corridor, especially in the south Island area, is severely congested with high
pedestrian movements and bus traffic. The eastern corridor, which runs adjacent to
the port, carries large volume of truck traffic and suffers badly from long term
parking and informal roadside vehicle maintenance activities. The network is
shown in Figure 1.1.
1.7.2 The east – west movement is constrained by the Western and Central Railway
tracks which also run for the majority of the length of the Island city. Consequently
major traffic movements are concentrated on relatively few roads, resulting in major
points of congestion where east-west movements intersect the north-south corridor
at such points as Khodadad Circle, Gadkare Chowk and Sion intersection.
1.7.3 To the north of Mumbai Island, the east – west movements are further restricted by
the limited number of crossing points of the River Mithi. The lack of a good link
between places such as Santa Cruz and Chembur or Vashi often results in
considerable detours via Sion and the Western and Eastern Express Highways.
1.7.4 The roads of Mumbai serve not only as a means of transport provision but also
function as parking areas for vehicles, sites for hawkers and other commercial
activities, and extended footways. In some places, notably on the Western Express
Highway, part of the right of way (though not the carriageway) has also been
encroached upon by slums. These other functions, together with frequent


Bandra
Soin
Mahim Causway
MAHIM BAY
Dadar Wadala
Western
Eastern
Corridor
Corridor
Virar Central
Corridor
8
NH
Victoria
Terminus
Churchgate
Fort
Varsai-Virar 3
NH
Colaba
Ghodbunder BHIWANDI
SH 1 Insert
KALYAN
Borivilli
WEH
Thane
SUBRUBS
SH 4
2A
Andhari
NH
H
EE
Santa Cruz
Bandra
Turbhe
Vashi
Chembur
Kalamboli
Mankhurd Belapur
ISLAND NEW BOMBAY PANVEL

City Nhava
Sheva 41
SH
NH 4
Uran
See Insert
NH 17
Dharamtar Khopoli
Creek
Pen
Alibag
Fig 1.2
Existing Strategic road Network

disruption due to service provision and maintenance, severely reduce the traffic
capacity of the highways.
1.8 BUS TRANSPORT SYSTEM
1.8.1 Public stage carriage bus services in the region are provided by BEST, (within BMC
and up to 20 km beyond the municipal boundary), TMT in Thane and MSRTC
elsewhere.
1.8.2 With over 3,030 buses, BEST is by far the largest provider of bus services in the
region. However, due to financial limitations bus replacement has been deferred in
recent years and some 25% of this fleet is now more than 10 years old which is the
company’s preferred limit to bus life.
1.8.3 All routes within Mumbai are provided by BEST. These include radial routes to and
from main centres, trunk routes linking main centres and feeder services linking to
the trunk routes and to railway stations. Additionally, some routes operate on a
limited stop basis providing slightly faster journey times on the trunk routes between
the Mumbai City area and outlying parts of Greater Mumbai. However, the
improvement in journey time in many cases is marginal due to the traffic congestion
and the retention of too many stops on the routes due to public demand.
1.8.4 Bus routes from Mumbai City to Navi Mumbai are provided by BEST and MSRTC.
Routes from other points in Greater Mumbai to Navi Mumbai and Thane are
provided by BEST, MSRTC and TMT.
1.8.5 The dispersal of rail commuters from the main railway terminals to their final
destinations in the Mumbai CBD such as Fort, Ballard Estate, Colaba or Nariman
points is at present carried out primarily by the bus system. Shared taxi routes are
also operated, whilst a large number of people make this final stage of their journey
on foot. In the morning peak these movements involve substantial volumes running
into the order of 30,000-40,000 passenger per hour from each terminus.
1.8.6 BEST operates an “on demand” feeder service during the morning peak hour
between Churchgate or CST and Nariman Point or Colaba. This entails constantly
having buses queued up at the rail terminus to take passengers so as to avoid any
build up of waiting time for the passengers.
1.9 ACCIDENTS
1.9.1 The number of personal injury accidents, reported annually in the Mumbai
Metropolitan area has remained approximately constant (25000 – 30000) over the
last 30 years. The number of fatalities however has fallen by 50% since 1981 and
is currently about 350 per year. As the number of vehicles in Mumbai has
significantly increased, the number of accidents per vehicle kilometer has gone
down.
1.9.2 The reduction in accident rate and fatalities may be due to the introduction of
various traffic management measures, improved driver education and more strict
police enforcement of road and traffic regulations. Lower speeds resulting from
increased congestion is also a factor. However, the annual accident total of about
30000 remains high, and there is a need to ensure further reduction.
1.10 AIR POLLUTION
1.10.1 In Mumbai road traffic is a major source of air pollution, which has worsened
significantly in the last two decades and now poses a considerable health problem
and potentially lethal hazard.
1.10.2 Data derived from the ambient air quality monitoring by MCGB show that air
pollution due to road traffic has increased by almost 400% over the last two
decades. Transport (principally road traffic) now accounts for about 52% of the
overall air pollution load in Greater Mumbai. The air pollution from traffic is
principally carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrous Oxide (NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC)
whereas industrial pollution takes the form of suspended particulates (SPM),
sulphur dioxide (SO2) and to a lesser degree NOx.
1.10.3 Within the traffic stream the large numbers of motor cycles, motor scooters and
autorickshaws are estimated to produce 34.5% of total pollutants, this is more than
trucks and buses (33.2%) or cars (32.3%). Carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons
are the main pollutants from two and three wheelers. Since auto rickshaws are
concentrated in the suburbs (they are banned from operations in the Island City),
they are an important source of air pollution in the suburban centres of Mumbai and
in the principal towns of the region. The GOI Central Motor Vehicle Rules lay down
emission standards for new two and three wheeler vehicles and for “light duty
vehicle” in respect of CO and HC for current application, with tighter standards for
application after 1995 and 2000. These future higher standards aim to reduce
emissions to less than 20% of the currently permitted levels.
1.10.4 Many people in Mumbai would appear to have a high tolerance to traffic noise,
which is at present not seen as a widespread problem, although levels of noise
near the main highways are high by Western standards. It is likely that noise will
become more of a perceived problem as traffic volumes increase and if increased
traffic flows take to filtering through residential areas. Traffic engineering and
environmental traffic management measures will be necessary to control this in
future.
1.11 NEED FOR METRO
Public Transport System is an efficient user of space and energy, with reduced
level of air and noise pollution. As the population of the city grows, the share of
public transport, road or rail-based, should increase. For a city with population of
1.0 million, the share of public transport should be about 40 - 45%. The percentage
share of public transport should progressively increase with further growth in the
population of the city, reaching a value of about 75% when the population of the
city touches 5 million mark. With Mumbai' s population crossing 12 million, the
share of public transport at 88% is quite good. However, over the past decade the
share has reduced from 91% to 88% and is likely to reduce further if corrective
measures are not taken immediately. While upgradation of existing suburban

system is underway through MUTP, it is felt that additional mass transit corridors
are required to meet the expanding demand.
Whether the public transport system on a corridor in the city should be road-based
or rail-based will depend primarily on the traffic density during peak hours on the
corridor. Experience has shown that in mixed traffic conditions, comprising slow
and fast moving traffic prevailing in most of our cities, road buses can optimally
carry 10,000 persons per hour per direction (phpdt). When traffic density on a
corridor exceeds 10,000 phpdt, the average speed of buses comes down, journey
time increases, air pollution goes up, and commuters are put to increased level of
inconvenience.
Thus when on a corridor, traffic density during peak hours crosses this figure,
provision of rail-based mass transport, i.e. Metro system should be considered. In
any case, Metro system may become inescapable if the traffic density on a corridor
reaches 20,000 phpdt.
1.12 TYPES OF METROS AND THEIR CAPACITY
Rail based mass transport in cities can be brought mainly under three categories:-
Since, the number of commuters to be dealt is relatively less in LRTS, its trains
consist of 2 to 3 coaches and other related infrastructure is also of a smaller size.
For medium capacity Metro systems, the train generally comprises 3 to 6 coaches
with ultimate train headway of about 3 minutes. The other related infrastructure
e.g. civil works, stations, passenger handling equipment etc. are also planned
accordingly.
Heavy capacity metro systems have to deal with large traffic densities ranging from
50,000 to 80,000 phpdt. Accordingly, the trains have 6 to 9 coaches and other
related infrastructure is also of large size. Beyond the traffic level of 80,000 phpdt,
additional parallel lines are normally planned. The metro system being constructed
in Delhi is heavy capacity system.
1.13 ADVANTAGES OF A METRO SYSTEM
Metro systems are superior to other modes because they provide higher carrying
capacity, faster, smoother and safer travel, occupy less space, are non-polluting
and energy-efficient. To summarise, a Metro system:
• Requires 1/5th energy per passenger km compared to road-based system

• Causes no air pollution in the city
• Causes lesser noise level
• Occupies no road space if underground and only about 2 meter width of the
road if elevated
• Carries same amount of traffic as 7 lanes of bus traffic or 24 lanes of private
motor cars (either way), if it is a medium capacity system.
• Is more reliable, comfortable and safer than road based system

• Reduces journey time by anything between 50% and 75% depending on

road conditions.
1.14. REVIEW OF PAST STUDIES
A number of transportation studies were carried out in the past for Mumbai
Metropolitan Region (MMR). These studies discussed travel pattern, network
characteristics, and the degree of traffic saturation on the existing roads in the
Study Area. The following major studies, which recommended transportation
improvements in MMR, have been reviewed.
(i) Mass Transport Study (1969): The objective of this Study was to determine
the existing conditions of available mass transportation services, future
desire lines and to evolve a comprehensive, long term mass transportation
plan for Greater Mumbai. Travel projections were made upto the year 1981.
These projections formed the basis for identifying the 6th and 7th Rail
Corridors.
(ii) Techno-Economic Feasibility of the 7th Rail Corridor: Indian Railways

carried out the techno-economic feasibility study of the Seventh Corridor in
the year 1974. Mumbai Metropolitan region was considered as the Study
Area. Passenger traffic of 1.78 million per day was estimated to be carried
by the 7th Corridor in 1981.
Detailed engineering feasibility was also carried out and the corridor
alignment was fixed. The corridor runs underground (South to North) from
Colaba to Bandra (17.38 km) and East to West from Bandra to Kurla
elevated (4.90km) and a spur to the airport (4.1 km).
(iii) East West Rail Corridor Study: MMRDA got this Study done In the year
1975 for developing rail corridor connecting Bandra – Kurla – Mankhurd –
Panvel. The objective of this Study was to provide access to Navi Mumbai
with a view to assisting in its development.
Out of the proposed corridor, Mankhurd – Vashi – Panvel section has been
completed. The Bandra-Kurla section of this corridor has not been
developed so far.
(iv) Comprehensive Transport Study (CTS) for MMR: A study was

commissioned by the World Bank and MMRDA in 1993 to develop a strategy
for transport development in MMR.
The Study focused on the strategies for transport development, institutional

strengthening for effective implementation of the proposed strategies and
suggesting an investment program with appropriate prioritization.
The recommended strategy covers investments worth a total of Rs. 11,300

crore, including rail system investment of Rs. 7000 crore, bus and ferry
system investments of Rs. 570 crore and a highway programme of Rs. 3730

crore including a substantial traffic engineering and management

component.
(v) Mumbai Metro Study, by Mumbai Metro Planning Group: The Study
examined the feasibility of constructing and maintaining the 7th rail corridor
as a heavy metro, and covers a detailed techno-economic study, market
survey, estimates of ridership on the new corridors, cost estimates of capital
investments and operation, revenue expected and financial aspects.
(vi) MRTS Study by TEWET: The study objective was to identify two rail based
Mass Rapid Transit (MRT) Systems which are bankable, one for the CBD
and one in Greater Mumbai outside the CBD, and to develop feasibility
studies for the two projects.
The TEWET study also identified total network for Greater Mumbai after
examining 3 alternatives. The recommended Network is of 57 km length
with an estimated cost of Rs. 12,000 crore and in Island city it follows the 7th
Corridor alignment. In the suburbs, the line is extended North upto Andheri
with two branches; one going upto Charkop in west suburbs & other leading
to Mulund via Ghatkopar.
The detailed feasibility study was done for part of the Master Plan namely
Andheri – Ghatkopar section with a spur to Sahar Airport. Total length was
about 10 km and estimated cost Rs. 800 crore. Most of the alignment was
elevated except small underground stretch of 1.5 km below flyover at
Andheri MMR.
(vii) Sky Bus Metro Study by MMRDA: The Konkan Railway Corporation
presented to GOM a proposal for development of a new transport system
called sky bus metro system. It envisages a system, which will be elevated
and supported to central columns. MMRDA carried out a techno-economic
feasibility study of this system for Andheri – Ghatkopar section. The
conclusion of this Study was that since this system has not been
implemented anywhere in the world, it needs to be further examined on a 2
km pilot section.

Chapter 2 - Master Plan for Mumbai Metro
Chapter 2
EVOLUTION OF MUMBAI METRO MASTER PLAN
2.0 BACKGROUND
Mumbai's transport problems can be solved by integrated transport planning.

While suburban rail system and road based transport system is being taken care
of by MUIP and MUTP, the metro system had been proposed in the past in
adhoc manner. Hence it was necessary to prepare a master plan for the metro
system in Mumbai. The procedure followed and rigorous exercise and
consultation done in evolving an acceptable Master Plan covering entire Greater
Mumbai geographical area has been described in Detail in the Report on phase I
of this study. The same is summarized below:
2.1 PRELIMINARY NET WORK
With a view to broadly identify the most feasible and apparently advantageous
network section for possible inclusion in the final Master plan all such possible
routes were listed based on the following inputs:
i) Recommendation of the earlier studies for various rail based systems

such as 6th/7th corridor, SMART study, MMG study.
ii) Existing and future land use plans including Regional plan for MMR which
indicate the locations and intensity of population and employment growth
and development pf alternate City centers.
iii) Suburban Rail Improvement Plans arising out of Department budgetary

schemes and MUTP (phase I & II).
iv) Availability of suitable lands for depot to minimize dead running and land
cost.
v) Arterial road network expansion programme envisaged under the

sanctioned projects of MUTP and MUIP.
vi) The suggestion of the members of the study review committee.
Accordingly, a preliminary network of about 200 km was identified.
2.2 MASTER PLAN
Thereafter intensive site reconnaissance surveys were carried out. The

alternative probable corridors were discussed with representatives of local
authorities and finally a network comprising of 146.5 km was selected as Master
Plan for Mumbai Metro. The most important criteria in finalizing the Master plan
were
Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 1/3

Final Report Versova - Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor
• Feasibility of the minimum values for system parameters in terms of vertical

curves, horizontal curves and gradients.
• Maximum intermodal integration with existing and committed suburban rail
network.
• To serve areas of population and employment concentration not served here
to.
• Easy connectivity to Depot sites.
• To ensure regional linkages and connectivity to rail system proposed in
adjoining regions like Thane and Navi Mumbai.
The Master Plan network was split in suitable corridors as under:
Length (Km)
S. No. Corridor
Total Elev. U.G
1 Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar 15.00 15.00 -
Coloba – Mahim (Bandra) 18.00 8.10 9.90
2
Mahim (Bandra) – Charkop 18.00 18.00
3 Mahim – Kurla – Mankhurd 12.80 10.70 2.10
4 Charkop – Dahisar 7.50 7.50
5 Ghatkopar – Mulund 12.40 12.40
6 BKC – Kanjur Marg via Airport 19.50 11.00 8.50
7 Andheri (E) – Dahisar (E) 18.00 18.00
8 Hutatma Chowk – Ghatkopar 21.80 13.30 8.50
9 Sewri – Prabhadevi 3.50 3.50
2.3 PHASING OF MASTER PLAN
The Master Plan of Metro finalized for Greater Mumbai consists of approximately
146.50 km of Rail network. It is practically not feasible to develop the entire
network at one go for many reasons like (i) Availability of sufficient funds (ii)
limitation on civil work construction (iii) The environmental and traffic impacts
during construction (iv) difficulties in acquisition of open lands as well as built up
structures (v) resettlement of project affected families.
The Master Plan Network was therefore grouped into different phases. The
criteria adopted in finalizing the phases were
i) Ridership per unit length of the corridor.

ii) Ridership per unit investment on the corridor.
iii) Sectional traffic loads, and
iv) Environmental Impact
After detailed deliberation with the study review committee suitable weightages
were assigned to these four criteria as under
i) Ridership per unit length = 40 %

ii) Ridership per unit investment = 25 %

iii) Sectional traffic loads = 25 %

iv) Environmental Impact = 10 %
The preliminary results of phasing exercise were discussed in the meeting of the
Executive Committee of MMRDA, chaired by the Chief Secretary, GOM and later
in the meeting of the Authority of MMRDA chaired by the Chief Minister of GOM.
The final approved phasing of the Master plan is as under:
Length(Kms) Total
Phase Corridors Cost
Total Elev. U.G
(Rs. Cr.)
1 a) Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar
b) Colaba – Charkop 63.80 51.80 12.00 8180
c) Mahim – Mankhurd
2 a) Ghatkopar – Mulund
19.90 19.90 - 1990
b) Charkop – Dahisar
3 a) BKC – Airport - Kanjur Marg
b) Andheri (E) – Dahisar (E)
62.80 42.30 20.50 9355
c) Hutatma Chowk – Ghatkopar
d) Sewri – Prabhadevi
Total 146.50 114.00 32.50 19525

Chapter 3 – Traffic Forecast
Chapter 3
TRAFFIC FORECAST
3.0 BACKGROUND
The methodology adopted for forecasting commuter rider-ship in Greater Mumbai

and on the Metro corridors is discussed in detail in the phase 1 Report. It is
emphasized here that most vigorous & in-depth exercise was undertaken at
Master Plan preparation level itself by utilizing the “TRIPS model” and with the
help of expert from TCS & IIT, Mumbai. Same is described in brief here under.
3.1 STUDY AREA, TRAFFIC ZONING AND PLANNING PERIOD
3.1.1 The Study Area includes the geographical limits of Greater Mumbai (upto Dahisar
in the North, Mulund in the North – East and Airoli and Vashi in the East).
3.1.2 The traffic zone system of the Study has been designed with the help of 88
census sections, based on following criteria:
♦ Conformance with ward boundaries

♦ Conformance with census section boundaries (as far as possible)
♦ Regular shape of the zone
♦ Un-skewed land use distribution
♦ Conformance with natural and artificial boundaries such as creek, river,
major roads, rail corridors etc.
3.1.3 The zoning system of the Study Area (Greater Mumbai) for development of Metro
Master Plan comprises of 105 zones (46 in the island area and 59 in the suburbs).
These 105 zones in Greater Mumbai are the same for the prior base year (1996),
the base year (2003) and all future base years (upto 2031). The traffic zones in
the island and suburbs are shown in Figure 3.1 and Figure 3.2 respectively. In
addition to the 105 internal zones, three external zones have been considered for
the prior base year (1996). For the base year (2003) and the horizon year (2031),
the three external zones are split into four to account for the change in the pattern
of external traffic.
3.2 METHODOLOGY FOR RIDERSHIP FORECAST
The Study methodology followed for the ridership forecasting on the Mumbai
Metro consists of the following five stages.
1. Database Preparation
2. Prior Base Year Analysis
3. Base Year O-D Validation
4. Base year Model Development
5. Ridership forecasting and Sensitivity Analysis
The following sub-sections briefly describe each stage.

52 88
92
48 47
39 37
40 38 36
35
44 42
34 33
41
43
31
45
46 32
30
23 25
29 24
18 26
22
27
9
17 11
21 10
20 19 13
14 8 7
16
5
6
4
3

106
36
83
82
81 84 85
78
79
80
107
77
74 76
75
104
105
72
71 69 103
70
63 1002
64 102
67 101
61 62
66
61 65
91
60 99
57 100
98
59
50 56 58
90
55 87 95
49 51 53 89
88 92
48 39 93
37
95
38 36
35
42 94
44 41 34 33
43
31
45
Figure 3.2 : Mumbai Subrubs : Traffic Zoning System

Stage – 1 Database Preparation
This stage involved preparation of database required for the development of

demand forecasting model. The activities under this stage include collecting data
required for the Study from primary and secondary sources, and analyzing and
compiling the results in the required format.
This stage results in generation of the following information:
• Adjusted traffic zone-wise demographic and socio-economic data for

previous (1996) and current (2003) base years
• Projected planning variables for the horizon years
• Transport (Public Transport and Highway) network for the prior base year
and all horizon years
• Mode-wise external OD matrices
• Growth factors for projecting external and commercial vehicle trips
Stage – 2 Prior Base Year Analysis
The mode-wise (Public Transport - PT, Private Vehicle - PV, Taxi - TX) internal O-
D matrices of 1996 were adopted from the Study directly, as these matrices have
been thoroughly validated (Mumbai Metro Study Final Report, 1996). The Mode-
wise daily internal trip end and Gravity models were calibrated for the prior base
year (1996) using adjusted planning variables (mode-wise O-D matrices and
travel time skims). Travel time skims were obtained by simple assignment of O-D
matrices on 1996 network. The process is shown in Figure 3.3.
Adjusted Zonal Mode – wise O–D(PV,

Planning Variables for PT,TX) for 1996 Network for 1996
1996
Calibrate Simple
Modewise Trip Assignment
models
Mode wise Trip
ends for 1996
Calibrate Skims for 1996
Modewise Gravity
models
Fig. 3.3
Stage – 3 Base year O-D Validation
The main objective of this stage was to develop thoroughly validated mode-wise
O -D matrices for the base year (2003). Calibrated trip end and distribution
models (obtained from stage – 2), together with the base year planning variables
and network data, were used to update the base year travel pattern. The internal
commercial vehicle matrix of 1996 was updated to the base year, by using the
appropriate zonal growth factors, and by using the Furness technique for
distribution. The external travel pattern for the base year was obtained from the
O-D survey conducted at external cordon stations.
The mode-wise trip matrices obtained were further adjusted for trip rates and
assigned on the base year network. This helps in obtaining the link flows. These
modelled link flows were validated against the observed link flows across the
screen lines. If the deviation exceeds specified limits, the trip matrices were
estimated using the Maximum likelihood method from the link volumes, and by
assigning confidence levels to the O-D data.
The O-D matrices obtained were thoroughly validated and used for model
development. Base year OD matrix validation is depicted in Figure 3.4.
Stage – 4 Base Year Model Development
Using the planning variables and validated total O-D matrix for base year (2003),
trip end models were calibrated for the total internal passenger travel. A single
gravity model was calibrated using the validated trip ends and skims (generalized
cost) obtained from Stage 3 assignment process as the seed values. The revised
skims obtained after successive modal split and traffic assignments were used to
calibrate the gravity model.
A binomial Logit it modal split model was devised, to determine the share of public
transport and private vehicles. The modal was based on the generalized cost
functions developed using stated preference data. The Public transport matrix
includes the person trip performed by bus, rail, auto and taxi, while the Private
vehicle matrix include person trips by car and two-wheeler. The cost skims that
were obtained from the assignments were used to calibrate the mode choice
model.
The daily public transport passenger matrix was assigned to the public transport
network, which includes a) Bus network (prepared by coding all the BEST bus
routes), b) Intermediate Public Transport (IPT) routes on the road network and c)
Rail Network with all the existing suburban rail links. The public transport
assignment was based on generalized time, which was a combination of In-
Vehicle Travel Time (IVTT), Waiting Time (WT), Transfer Time (TR), Fare in time
units and Discomfort.
There are two important steps in public transport assignment. These are path
building and loading trips on these paths. The purpose of path building is to
identify all reasonable paths between zones and provide associated travel
information in generalized time, so that the proportion of trips using each path
may be calculated at the loading stage. Between any pair of zones, the maximum
number of trips were loaded on to the best path. The other paths with longer
generalized times were loaded with fewer trips. The proportion of trips to be
loaded were calculated on the basis of a logistic choice function based on
generalised time.
The public transport assignment was also required to assign the trips as per the
observed modal shares. In order to achieve this, the parameters of the
generalised time were fixed based on the values obtained from the analysis of

Planning Calibrated Mode-wise

Variables for Mode-wise Trip Trip Ends
2003 End Model
Calibrated
1996 Skims Mode-wise
Gravity Model Growth
Factors for
CV trips
Mode-wise Internal External Trips Projected 2003

Trip Matrices for from Cordon CV Matrix using
2003(PV,PT & TX) Surveys Growth factors
2003
Mode- wise O-D (PV,PT,TX & CV *) for 2003 Screen Line
Counts
Assignment
Matrix
Network for Estimation
Validate
2003 from Screen
Lines
Validated O-D Matrices for Base Year 2003
Figure 3.4 Validation of Matrices for Base Year

2003

stated preference surveys. After performing the public transport assignment, the
assigned flows across the screen lines were compared with the observed flows.
Highway assignment was carried out for peak hour, preloading the highway
network with peak hour public transport and commercial vehicle flows. The daily
public transport loadings are factored by the peak hour flow to daily flow ratios to
obtain the peak hour public transport flows. These peak-hour public transport
(bus and IPT) and commercial vehicle flows in terms of PCU’s were preloaded on
to the highway network before loading the private vehicle passenger O-D
matrices. The private vehicle passenger matrices were converted into peak hour
PCU units, by using appropriate regional peak hour ratios and passenger – PCU
conversion factors, based on observed occupancies at screen lines. An
incremental capacity restraint procedure based on generalised cost was used in
loading private vehicle matrices.
The public transport network was revised with the speeds obtained after assigning
the private trips. The assignment of public transport trips was performed on the
revised network, and the next iteration of private traffic assignment was carried
out by taking the bus, taxi, auto and truck flows as preloads. This iterative
process between public and private vehicles traffic assignment was repeated until
there was no appreciable change in the link loadings and link costs.
Two skims namely the highway time and highway travel costs were obtained from
the loaded network. The skims obtained were used for calibrating the gravity
model and the modal split-modal. The process of distribution, modal split and
assignment was repeated till the OD matrices become stable. The complete
model development process is graphically represented in Figure 3.5.
Stage – 5 Ridership Forecasting
The calibrated base year trip end models along with the projected planning
variables and horizon year networks were used to forecast the future daily internal
passenger trip ends for the horizon years (2011, 2021 and 2031).
These future year trip ends were distributed by applying the calibrated gravity
distribution model with the previous cost skims available for the initial run (the
base year cost skims were used for estimating travel pattern of 2011). The OD
matrix of total daily passenger trips obtained for the horizon year under
consideration were split into public transport and private vehicle total daily OD
matrices using the calibrated mode choice model. Truck OD matrix and mode-
wise external trips (inter-city trips) were forecast using zonal growth factors and
by Furnessing. The cost skims used in gravity distribution model and mode
choice models were revised using the ones obtained by assigning the public
transport trips and highway trips on to their respective networks. The cost/time
skims obtained using the final stabilized link costs were used to get the final mode
wise daily passenger O-D matrices.
The ridership estimates for various corridors have been made presuming that the
entire Master Plan network exists as well as separately for phase I scenario.
However, for Versova - Andheri - Ghatkopar section, it is presumed to carry 60%

Planning
Variables
for 2003
Calibrate Total
Daily Trip End
Model for 2003
Validated Total
O-D Matrix for
2003
Calibrate Total
Updated
Single Gravity
Skins
Model
Generalised Cost
Function
modified based
on SP Survey
Model Split
PV & PT
Are O-D No
Matrices PT Highway
Stable Assignment Assignment
Yes
2003
Network
Updated CV
Trip Matrix for
2003
Capacity Resistant
Assignment
Fig 3.5 Base Year Model Displacement

of the ridership as "stand alone" section as compared to estimated ridership for

phase I on this Corridor.
3.3 LAND-USE POLICY
The MMRDA has prepared a Regional Plan (1996-2011) for Mumbai Metropolitan
Region, which has recommended a poly-nucleated land-use structure with
alternate growth centers at Bandra-Kurla Complex and Navi Mumbai. In the
Island City large parcels of land belonging to the Textile Mills which became
redundant since 80’s are potential source for intensive development.
3.4 STATED PREFERENCE SURVEY
With a view to determine commuter behavior with respect to mode of travel,

commuter preferences and willingness to shift to the proposed metro, limited SPS
was carried out. The subjective values of time obtained from SP survey are
presented below:
Mode WT (Rs./hr.) TT (Rs./hr.) DC (Rs./hr. per

unit shift in a DC)
TW 44.00 36.50 27.00
CAR * 79.00 65.00
BUS 22.50 20.00 1.90
II Rail 15.00 13.00 1.50
I Rail 24.00 20.00 2.80
* This variable has not found significant for car mode.
3.5 PLANNING PARAMETERS
3.5.1 Population
The population projections of Island city, Western Suburbs and Eastern Suburbs
of Greater Mumbai as given by the planning division of MMRDA are as shown in
Table 3.1. The corresponding annual growth rates of population are given in
Table 3.2.
Table 3.1
Areawise Population Projection for Greater Mumbai
Name of 2001 2011 2021 2031

the Population Share Population Share Population Share Population Share
Area
Greater 11,914,398 100.00 13,504,324 100.00 15,166,615 100.0 16,675,115 100.0
Mumbai
Island 3,326,837 27.92 3,360,255 24.88 3,394,009 22.38 3,411,017 20.46
City
Western 5,095,685 42.77 6,031,316 44.66 6,999,588 46.15 7,886,378 47.29
Suburbs
Eastern 3,491,876 29.31 4,112,753 30.46 4,773,018 31.47 5,377,720 32.25
Suburb
Table 3.2
Annual Growth Rates: Greater Mumbai
Name of the Area 1991-2001 2001-2011 2011-2021 2021-2031

Greater Mumbai 1.92 1.26 1.17 0.95
Island City 0.60 0.10 0.10 0.05
Western Suburb 2.58 1.70 1.50 1.20
Eastern Suburb 2.35 1.65 1.50 1.20
Using the aggregate estimates and following the guidelines of the Committee, the
census sectionwise population was worked out.
Table 3.3
Population Growth in MMR
(Population in Lakh)
Region 2001 % Gr 2011 % Gr 2021 % Gr 2031
Gr. Mumbai 119.1 1.26 135.0 1.17 151.7 0.95 166.7
Western Region 11.9 4.40 18.3 3.79 26.6 3.05 35.9
North East Region 41.9 2.86 55.7 2.47 71.1 1.85 85.5
Navi Mumbai Region 10.5 5.62 17.4 4.11 25.9 3.46 36.5
Neral Karjat Region 1.9 1.65 2.3 1.61 2.7 1.55 3.2
Pavvel-Urban Reg.
(Ourside Navi Mumbai 2.6 4.06 3.9 4.63 6.1 4.89 9.9
Pen Region 0.9 1.05 1.1 1.29 1.2 1.74 1.4
Alibag Region 1.2 0.92 1.3 0.85 1.4 0.75 1.5
TOTAL 190.0 235.0 286.7 340.6
3.5.2 Employment
The employment projections of Island City, Western Suburbs and Eastern

suburbs of Greater Mumbai as provided by the planning department of MMRDA
(based on national economic census data) are as shown in Table 3.4. The
corresponding annual growth rates of employment are given in Table 3.5.
Table 3.4
Areawise Employment Projections for Greater Mumbai
(Employment in lakh)
Year Greater Mumbai Island City Western Suburb Eastern
Suburb
1980 22.0 14.0 5.1 2.9
1990 24.3 13.5 6.4 4.4
1998 26.3 15.9 6.5 3.8
2001 27.1 16.0 7.1 4.1
2011 29.3 16.1 8.4 4.8
2021 31.6 16.3 9.7 5.6
2031 33.6 16.4 10.9 6.3

Table 3.5
Annual Growth Rates of Employment for Greater Mumbai
Period Greater Island City Western Eastern

Mumbai Suburb Suburb
1980-1990 0.99 -0.36 2.34 4.09
1990-1998 0.99 2.06 0.31 -1.68
1998-2001 1.09 0.17 2.60 2.23
2001-201 0.78 0.10 1.70 1.65
2011-2021 0.75 0.10 1.50 1.50
2021-2031 0.62 0.05 120 1.20
Using the aggregate estimates and following the guidelines of the Committee, the
employment distribution was worked out considering the following development
scenarios.
Scenario 1.
The following development aspects form this scenario.
1. There will be additional employment of 88,011 by 2011 due to mill land

development in Island city. This has been worked out assuming 10 sqm
built area per employee. The corresponding shift of assumed employment
from Western and Eastern Suburbs to Island City has been in the
proportionate manner.
2. In addition, the growth of Bandra – Kurla complex (i.e. census section 48)
has been considered by increasing the employment figures to 75,000 in
2006, 1,000,00 in 2011 and 2,00,000 in 2031.
3. Also the growth in Andheri (E) i.e. MIDC & SEEPZ (i.e. census section 55)
has been considered by increasing the employment to 190,000 by 2031
and implementing a reduction of 16,000 in Mahul, Trombay, Govandi,
Vadavali Borla Mankhurd & Mandala (i.e. census section 80).
Scenario 2
The following development aspects form this scenario.
1. There will be additional employment of 88,011 by 2011 due to mill land

development in island city. This is considered as new employment adding
to the total employment of Greater Mumbai.
2. In addition, the rapid growth of Bandra – Kurla Complex (i.e. census

section 48) has been considered by increasing the employment figures to
75,000 in 2006, 1,00,000 in 2011 and 2,00,000 in 2031.
3. Also the growth in Andheri (E) i.e. MIDC & SEEPZ (i.e. census section 55)
has been considered by increasing the employment to 190,000 by 2031
and implementing a reduction of about 26,000 in Mahul, Trombay,

Govandi, Vadavali Borla Mankhurd & Mandala (i.e. census section 80).
3.5.3 Vehicle Ownership
In order to design the vehicle ownership variable and to use it in modeling of the
trip ends of the base year (2003), the vehicle ownership data for Greater Mumbai
was used. Table 3.6 presents this data from 1981 to 2002 for Greater Mumbai.
Table 3.6
Private Vehicle Ownership in Greater Mumbai
Year Pvt Vehicle Population Pvt Vehicle per

Population 1000 population
1981 229185 8243405 27.80
1986 365190 8958013 40.76
1991 506959 9925891 51.07
1995 516640 10678015 48.38
1998 649654 11279279 57.60
2002 828769 12133955 68.30
A logistic model of the form
Y = S/ (1 + a e – bt)
Where
Y = Vehicles owned per thousand population

S = Saturation level
T = time in year
a and b = parameters to be estimated
was used for the vehicle ownership data. The analysis was based on the
assumption that the vehicle ownership would reach a saturation level of 150
veh/1000 population eventually. The estimates of vehicle ownership obtained for
the years, 2011, 2021 and 2031 are given in Table 3.7.
Table 3.7
Projected Vehicle Ownership in Greater Mumbai
Year Vehicles per 1000 Population No. of Vehicles

population
2011 86 13504324 1161415
2021 106 15166615 1608210
2031 120 16675115 1996032
For estimation of the number of vehicles in each zone, the projected number of
private vehicles of each region were distributed to the zones of that region,
proportionately, based on the population and projected vehicles per 1000
population in that year.
3.6 TRAFFIC DEMAND FORECASTING
3.6.1 Updating of Travel pattern from prior base year (1996)
Separate trip and models were developed for public Transport, Private Vehicles
and IPT passenger using connected planning variables. Trip end models were
developed using stepwise multiple regression technique. The network for 1996
was further strengthened and incorporated in TRIPS.
3.6.2 Conversion of Daily O-D Matrix to Peak Hour Matrix
The peak hour O D Matrix was obtained by applying appropriate daily to ph

conversion factors using area specific factors and separately for each mode.
3.6.3 Assignment of Base Year O-D Matrices and validation
The O D matrices for 2003 were thoroughly validated by comparing the

interchange of assigned trips across seven lines with the volume counts.
The public transport assignment is done based on generalized time. The

components of generalized time are in-vehicles travel time, waiting time, transfer
time, fare and discomfort in time units.
3.6.4 Highway Assignment
The highway assignment has been carried out for peak hour preloading the
highway network with P H public transport flows. An equilibrium procedure based
on generalized cost was used in loading these matrices.
3.6.5 Validation with Link flows across screen lines
The rail flows assigned across the screen lines were compared with rail flows
projected by MRVC. In the case of road-based flows the assigned link flows for
all the screen lines were found to match within reasonable degrees of accuracy
with observed flows.
3.6.6 Base Year (2003) Model
Trip Ends of internal passenger trips by all modes for the base year (2003) were
calculated from validated O-D matrices. These were developed using stepwise
linear regression technique for Trip production and Trip attraction. A Gravity Trip
Distribution model was calibrated for distributing the total passenger trips. The
Modal split parameters for Public Transport and private vehicle split were
estimated using the skims obtained from P T and Highway assignment.
3.7 FORECASTING OF O D MATRICES
The calibrated trip end equations were for the daily internal person trips were
applied on the projected planning variables for 2011, 2021 and 2031 to get the
future trip ends of internal daily person trips.

The O-D matrix of daily person trips thus obtained for the future was split into
public transport matrix (passenger trips) and daily private vehicle passenger trips,
using calibrated mode choice model.
3.8 ASSIGNMENT OF O-D MATRICES ON THE NETWORK
The peak hour O-D matrix P T passenger trips was assigned to public transport
network, for BEST bus, suburban train and Metro plan. Similarly daily matrices of
private vehicle person trips were converted to Peak Hour O-D matrix in
passenger car units by applying appropriate factors. The truck peak hour PCU
matrix was loaded on to the preloaded network. The appropriate speed flow
relationships were used for this purpose.
3.9 RIDERSHIP ON VERSOVA – ANDHERI – GHATKOPAR CORRIDOR
The station to station link loading in both directions during peak hour for the years
2011, 2021 and 2031 are given in the Table 3.8 , below as per the traffic forecast
made at the time of preparation of Mumbai Metro Master Plan:
Table 3.8
Station – station Link Loads
To To To To To To
Asalpha Subhash 20235 24778 25646 29016 25501 39144
Nagar
Subhash Saki 20243 24778 25653 29016 35515 39144
Nagar Naka
Saki Naka Marol 20889 25809 26944 30374 37264 40872
Naka
Marol Airport 23716 29225 31578 36270 42306 46615
Naka Road
Airport Chakala 23718 29219 31580 36256 42309 46600
Chakala WEH 24307 30484 33420 38691 44574 50085
WEH Andheri 24418 31126 33449 39316 44799 50912
Metro
Andheri Azad 12957 14831 17672 18904 21186 22542
Metro Nagar
Azad DN 4051 3341 5419 4403 7138 5580
Nagar Nagar
DN Versova 304 365 609 609 694 716
Nagar
3.10 THE TRAFFIC FORECAST FOR “STAND ALONE” SCENARIO
The traffic forecast on the Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor has been
described in the earlier paragraphs. As the MMRDA was of the view that it is
likely that this corridor alone will be functional at least in the year 2011 it is
necessary to forecast the traffic on the corridor on stand alone basis.
The Master Plan estimates are slightly higher than those of the earlier studies of
SMART (1997) and CES update (2003). The main reason is that in our
methodology taking into account the element of “Discomfort in time units” as part
of generalized time. The discomfort values are based on the stated preference
surveys. The other governing factors for ridership forecast are population and
employment growth and distribution. These factors are largely dependant upon
the Government policies, attractiveness of Mumbai in general and growth of
surrounding influence / catchment areas around Versova _ Andheri – Ghatkopar
corridor. Also, there are other competing modes like BEST bus Service, Auto
rickshaws and Taxies, whose services offer greater penetration and accessibility
(almost door-to-door) as compared to fixed route and station controlled MRTS
system. Therefore the shift expected from these modes to Metro system may not
reach the values as assumed theoretically. Besides, any new system introduced
in existing urban scenario will require some time to settle and win commuter
confidence and entice them to reorganize their travel behavior.
Keeping in view the above uncertainty it is expected that ridership estimates will
be less than the model results. Such conservative estimates will also project
realistic economic / financial benefit and help to generate confidence in the BOOT
operators. For the purpose of DPR the loadings and PHPD flows are assumed to
be 50 % of the Master plan estimates in the year 2011 and 60% in the year 2021
and beyond. It is estimated that about 40% of reduction is because of discomfort
element , shift from competing modes, population and employment projection
short fall and initial time required to build up confidence in the users.
Another 10% reduction in the year 2011 is because of the fact that in that year
entire master plan corridors will not be in place. The traffic for intermediate years
have been estimated by interpolation. The peak hour link loading and
Boarding/Alighting figures are shown in Table 3.9 and 3.10 respectively.
Table 3.9
Proposed Peak Hour Link loadings on Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar adopted for
Economic analysis & Station Planning

To To To To To To
Asalpha Subhash Nagar 10115 12390 15390 17410 15300 23485
Subhash Nagar Saki Naka 10120 12390 15390 17410 21310 23485
Saki Naka Marol Naka 10440 12905 16165 18225 22360 24525
Marol Naka Airport 11860 14615 18945 21760 25385 27970
Airport Chakala 11860 14610 18950 21755 25385 27960
Chakala WEH 12155 15240 20050 23215 26745 30050
WEH Andheri Metro 12210 15565 20070 23590 26880 30550
Andheri Metro Azad Nagar 6480 7415 10605 11340 12710 13525
Azad Nagar D N Nagar 2025 1670 3250 2640 4285 3350
D N Nagar Versova 150 185 365 365 415 430

Table 3.10
Peak Hour Boarding and Alighting
2011 2021 2031

Station Name Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting Boarding Alighting
Versova 183 152 237 198 317 264
D N Nagar 1492 1874 1941 2439 2591 3256
Azad Nagar 5958 4670 7753 6081 10347 8116
Andheri Metro 9476 7059 12330 9191 16456 12267
WEH 1592 1858 2072 2419 2765 3228
Chakala 2077 2415 2703 3145 3607 4197
Airport Road 4 0 5 0 7 0
Marol Naka 1891 2191 2460 2852 3283 3807
Saki Naka 1502 2010 1954 2617 2609 3493
Subhash
Nagar 4 0 5 0 7 0
Asalpha 365 168 474 219 633 292
Ghatkopar
Metro 9756 12223 12694 15916 16942 21243
34298 34618 44628 45076 59565 60163

Ch. 4 – System Selection
CHAPTER 4
SYSTEM SELECTION
4.0 PERMANENT WAY
4.1 CHOICE OF GAUGE
Standard Gauge (1435mm) is invariably used for metro railways world

over. During the last decade, many metros such as Cairo, Madrid,
Bangkok, Manila, Beijing etc. have been constructed in various cities of
the world. All these metros have gone in for Standard Gauge even though
the national gauge for mainline railways in some of these countries was
different from Standard Gauge. In India the national gauge is Broad
Gauge (1676mm). The question whether Mumbai Metro should go in for
Broad Gauge or Standard Gauge has, therefore, been examined with
following important parameters.
(i) Metro alignments in a city have to pass through heavily built-up

areas for optimal passenger utilisation and this imposes severe
restrictions on the selection of curves. As in most of the cities in
India no 'right of way' has been reserved for metro systems, the
alignments have to follow the major arterial roads. These roads
may often have sharp curves and right-angle bends. In such a
situation adoption of Standard Gauge is advantageous since it
permits adoption of sharper curves compared to Broad Gauge to
minimise property acquisition along the alignments.
(ii) In Standard Gauge 1 in 7 and 1 in 9 turn-outs, which occupy lesser

length, are feasible compared to 1 in 8 ½ and 1 in 12 turn-outs
required for Broad Gauge. Length of cross-overs for Standard
Gauge is thus lesser than for Broad Gauge. Land requirement for
depots where a large number of lines connected together in the
shape of ladder is also reduced. Standard Gauge is, therefore,
more suited for use in built up environment where land availability
is scarce.
(iii) For Standard Gauge, optimised state-of-the-art rolling stock

designs are available ‘off-the-shelf’. This is not so for Broad Gauge
where new designs for rolling stock have to be specially developed
which entails extra time and cost.
(iv) Because of the availability of a very large market, constant up-

gradation of technology takes place for Standard Gauge coaches.
Thus upgraded technology is available on a continued basis in
case of Standard Gauge. This is not so in case of Broad Gauge.
(v) For the same capacity gross weight of a metro coach is lower for
Standard Gauge than for Broad Gauge. Standard Gauge rolling

stock thus results in recurring saving in energy consumption during

operation.
(vi) Once technology for Standard Gauge coaches get absorbed and a
manufacturing base for them is set up in India, there will be
considerable export potential for the coaches, since almost all the
countries use Standard Gauge for their metros. This is not so in
case of Broad Gauge.
(vii) It is some time argued that adoption of Broad Gauge for metros
would enable inter-running of metro trains with Indian Railways
since the latter uses Broad Gauge. Inter-running is, however,
technically and / or operationally not feasible as the two systems
have different:
• Rolling Stock characteristics,

• Signalling Systems,
• Headways,
• Tariffs,
• Moving dimensions, and
• Loading standards.
(viii) Track gauge is not a technical parameter for any metro rail system.
It is a planning parameter. This issue was also examined in
January 2000 by the Ministry of Law and Justice who had opined
that the choice of gauge is a matter which lies within the jurisdiction
of the metro rail organisation entrusted with the responsibility of
implementing and operating the metro systems.
Since inter-running is not feasible, choice of Gauge for a metro system

should be based solely on technical and economic considerations on
which Standard Gauge turns out to be superior.
From the above, it is seen that Standard Gauge will be cost-effective and
at the same time enable Mumbai Metro to be at par with world-class
metros and enable it to remain technically up-dated in future. Standard
Gauge will also enable setting up a manufacturing base for coaches
required for metros in other cities of the country as well create an export
potential for such coaches. Adoption of Standard Gauge is, therefore,
recommended for Mumbai Metro. A wider gauge is not justified for 3.2 m
wide coach and axle loads are as low as 17 ton for Standard Gauge
Metro.
Further a note on selection of gauge and use of 3.20m wide coaches

instead of 3.66m wide coaches as Annexure 1 at end of this chapter.
4.2 TRACK STRUCTURE
Track on Metro Systems is subjected to intensive usage with very little

time for day-to-day maintenance. Thus it is imperative that the track
structure selected for Metro Systems should be long lasting and should
require minimum or no maintenance and at the same time, ensure highest

level of safety, reliability and comfort, with minimum noise and vibrations.
The track structure has been proposed keeping the above philosophy in
view.
4.2.1 General
Two types of track structures are proposed for any Metro. The normal
ballasted track is suitable for At-Grade (surface) portion of Main Lines and
in Depot (except inside the Workshops, inspection lines and washing plant
lines. The ballastless track is recommended on Viaducts and inside
tunnels as the regular cleaning and replacement of ballast at such location
will not be possible. In case of Versova - Andheri - Ghatkopar corridor
even the depot is elevated, hence ballastless track is proposed for
adoption throughout.
From considerations of maintainability, riding comfort and also to contain

vibrations and noise levels, the complete track is proposed to be joint less
and for this purpose even the turnouts will have to be incorporated in
LWR/CWR.
The track will be laid with 1 in 20 canted rails and the wheel profile of
Rolling Stock should be compatible with the rail cant and rail profile.
4.2.2 Rail Section
Keeping in view the proposed axle load and the practices followed abroad,
it is proposed to adopt UIC-60 (60 kg. /m) rail section. Since on main
lines, sharp curves and steep gradients would be present, the grade of rail
on main lines should be 1080 Head Hardened as per IRS-T- 12-96. As
these rails are not manufactured in India at present, these are to be
imported. For the Depot lines, the grade of rails should be 880, which can
be easily manufactured indigenously.
4.2.3 Ballastless Track on Main Lines (Viaducts)
On the viaducts, it is proposed to adopt plinth type ballastless track

structure with RCC derailment guards integrated with the plinths (shown in
Fig.1). Further, it is proposed to adopt Vossloh-336 Fastenings System
(shown in Fig.2) or any other suitable system on both types of ballastless
track structures, with a base-plate to base-plate spacing of 65 cm. on
viaducts. Most of the components of Vossloh-336 fastening system are
now indigenously available. The toe load design for the clips is to be
finalised at the detail design stage.
4.2.4 Ballastless Track in Depot
The ballastless track in Depot may be of the following types:

• Discretely supported on concrete/steel pedestal for inspection lines.

• Embedded rail type inside the Workshop.
• Plinth type for Washing Plant line.
• Normal Ballastless (as on viaduct) for Stabling and other running lines.
4.2.5 Turnouts
• From considerations of maintainability and riding comfort, it is

proposed to lay the turnouts also with 1 in 20 cant. Further, it is
proposed to adopt the following two types of turnouts:
i) On main lines, 1 in 9 type turnout with a lead radius of 300 metres

and permissible speed on divergent track as 40 km/h (shown in
Fig.3).
ii) On Depot lines, 1 in 7 type turnout with a lead radius of 400 metres
and permissible speed on divergent track as 25 km/h (shown in
Fig.4).
• The Scissors cross-overs on Main Lines (1 in 9 type) will be with a

minimum track centre of 4.5 m (shown in Fig.5).
• The proposed specifications for turnouts are given below: -
i) The turnouts should have fan-shaped layout throughout the turnout

so as to have same sleepers/base-plates and slide chairs for both
LH and RH turnouts.
ii) The switches and crossings should be interchangeable between

ballasted and ballastless turnouts (if required).
• The switch rail should be with thick web sections, having forged end
near heel of switch for easy connection with lead rails, behind the heel
of switch. The switches should have anti creep device at heel of
switch for minimising the additional LWR forces transmitted from
tongue rail to stock rail.
• The crossings should be made of cast manganese steel and with

welded leg extensions. These crossings should be explosive
hardened type for main lines and without surface hardening for Depot
lines.
• The check rails should be with UIC-33 rail section without being
directly connected to the running rails.
4.2.6 BUFFER STOPS
On main lines and Depot lines, friction buffer stops with mechanical impact
absorption (non-hydraulic type) need to be provided. On elevated section

the spans on which friction buffer stops are to be installed are to be

designed for an additional longitudinal force of 85 T, which is likely to be
transmitted in case of Rolling Stock impacting the friction Buffer Stops.
4.3 RAIL STRUCTURE INTERACTION
For continuing the LWR/CWR on Viaducts, the elevated structures are to

be adequately designed for the additional longitudinal forces likely to be
transmitted as a result of Rail-Structure interaction. Rail structure
interaction study will determine the need and locations of Rail Expansion
Joints (REJ) also. REJ in ballasted track will be for a maximum gap of 120
mm, whereas on ballastless track for a maximum gap of 180 mm.
4.4 WELDING
Flash Butt Welding Technique is to be used for welding of rails. Alumino-

Thermic Welding is to be done only for those joints which cannot be
welded by Flash Butt Welding Technique, such as joints at destressing
locations and approach welds of switches & crossings. For minimising the
population of Thermit welds, mobile (rail-cum-road or portable) Flash Butt
Welding Plant will have to be deployed.
4.5 TRACTION SYSTEM
Traditionally, electric traction is used in Metro systems for requirement

of high acceleration and pollution-free services in urban areas. There
are three standard and proven systems of electric traction for use in
suburban and metro lines, viz.: - 750V dc third rail, 1500V dc overhead
catenary and 25kV ac overhead catenary system. All the three systems
are presently in use in India (750 V DC third rail in Kolkatta Metro,
1500V dc catenary in Mumbai suburban of Central & Western Railways
and 25kV ac catenary in Delhi Metro & Indian Railways). However,
conversion of 1500 V dc to 25kV ac is currently in progress in Mumbai
suburban areas of Central and Western Railways.
750V dc third rail system has been extensively used in metros and
more than 60% of existing metro systems in the world utilise 600-750V
dc third rail system. The system does not negate the aesthetics of the
city as it is laid alongside the track and also requires smaller tunnel
diameter for underground section compared to other systems. This
system has a technical limitation beyond a traffic level of 60,000
PHPDT on account of requirement of large number of traction sub-
stations and difficulty in differentiation between over-current and short-
circuit currents. Few recently commissioned Metro systems with 750V
dc third rail are Bangkok Transit System (1999), Athens Metro (2000),
Istanbul Metro (2001) and Tehran Metro (2000). All these are medium
capacity Metro systems designed for a traffic level up to 45000 PHPDT.

1500V dc catenary system has been adopted by some of heavy metros

to overcome the limitation imposed by 750V dc system for catering to
traffic level of 60,000-80,000 PHPDT (e.g. Singapore, Hong Kong,
Guangzhou etc.). This system requires use of catenary masts and
messenger wires on elevated viaducts thereby affecting aesthetics of
the city.
Stray current corrosion is often encountered in dc-electrified railways

and therefore, suitable measures are required for protection against
corrosion of metallic structures, reinforcement and utility pipes caused
by dc stray current. Some of the old Metros are spending heavily on
corrosion repairs caused by dc stray currents.
25kV ac traction has the economical advantages of minimal number of

traction sub-stations and potential to carry large traffic (60,000-90,000
PHPDT). The system requires catenary masts on surface/elevated
section, thereby affecting aesthetics and skyline of the city. Suitable
measures are required for mitigation of electro-magnetic interference
(EMI) caused by single-phase 25kV ac traction currents. EMI
mitigation measures are simple and well known compared to dc stray
current corrosion protection.
Typical 25kV AC Catenary Arrangement
Traffic requirements of the Mumbai Metro have been projected in the

range of 50,000-60,000 PHPDT in horizon year 2031. The alignment of

proposed corridor is on elevated viaducts and future extensions are also

mostly on elevated sections. Keeping in view the ultimate traffic
requirements, standardisation, commonality of traction system with
Western & Central Railway and other techno-economic considerations,
25kV ac Catenary traction system is considered to be the best trade-off
and hence, proposed for adoption on Mumbai Metro System. Since the
route is on elevated viaducts with wide roads, it would not be prone to
safety hazards to public and residents of nearby buildings as well.
However, suitable measures will have to be implemented for mitigation of
EMI & EMC caused by 25 kV single-phase traction currents.
4.6 SIGNALLING
4.6.1 Introduction
The signaling system shall provide the means for an efficient train
control, ensuring safety in train movements. It assists in optimization of
metro infrastructure investment and running of efficient train services
on the network.
4.6.2 Signalling and Train Control
4.6.2.1 Overview
Metro carries large number of passengers at a very close headway

requiring a very high level of safety enforcement and reliability. At the
same time heavy investment in infrastructure and rolling stock
necessitates optimization of its capacity to provide the best services to
the public. These requirements of the metro are planned to be
achieved by adopting a automatic signaling in the section and balise
based ATP, State of Art automatic train supervision system. This will:
• Provide high level of safety with trains running at close headway (3

minutes), ensuring continuous safe train separation.
• Eliminate accidents due to driver passing Signal at Danger by
continuous speed monitoring and automatic application of brake in
case of disregard of signal / warning by the driver.
• Provides safety and enforces speed limit on section having
permanent and temporary speed restrictions.
• Improve capacity with safer and smoother operations. Driver will
have continuous display of Target Speed / Distance to Go status in
his cab enabling him to optimize the speed potential of the track
section. It provides signal / speed status in the cab even in bad
weather.
• Increased productivity of rolling stock by increasing line capacity
and train speeds, and enabling train to arrive at its destination
sooner. Hence more trips will be possible with the same number of
rolling stock.

• Improve maintenance of Signalling and telecommunication

equipments by monitoring system status of trackside and train born
equipments and enabling preventive maintenance.
A Signalling and control system shall be provided on all running tracks

of the metro including car shed except for lines used mainly for local
shunting. At all stations with points and crossings, computer based
interlocking will be provided for operation of points and
crossings/setting of routes including track of adjacent station. The
control of train operation will be done from computer based operation
control centre (OCC) and will be supervised by Traffic Controller.
Facilities for setting of the route and clearing of the signals will also be
provided from workstation/CCIP located at stations with points and
crossings. The depot shall be interlocked and equipments with a
workstation / CCIP to control and supervise the movements within its
yards.
To ensure safety with close headway of train services (3 minutes
headway) and for optimization of heavy investment in the infrastructure
and rolling stock, the metro shall be provided with an automatic train
protection and supervision system. This will enable running of optimum
train services meeting traffic requirements in the most efficient and cost
effective way.
4.6.2.2 Selection of System
The Signalling and Train Control system shall be as below:
a. Interlocking System:
At all stations with points and crossings, Solid State Interlocking

(SSI) will be provided for operation of points and crossings and
setting of routes.
The setting of the route and clearing of the signals will be done
by work station which can be either locally (at station) operated
or operated remotely from the Operation control Centre (OCC).
All the sections on the corridor is automatic signaling.
b. Train Depot : Signalling
The depot for Versova - Ghatkopar corridor is situated at

Versova. All depot lines except the ones used for shunting and
in workshop shall be interlocked. A workstation each shall be
provided in the Depot Control Centre for electrical operation of
the points, signals and routes of the depot yard.

c. Automatic Train Protection
To ensure safety in train operation and to provide optimum train

services on the section the train control on the metro shall be
provided with Automatic Train Protection (ATP) system. For this
the transmission from track to train will be intermittent through
balise based ATP. Facilities for automatic enforcement of
temporary / permanent speed restrictions shall also be built in to
enhance safety during maintenance work.
d. Train supervision and Control Office
A train supervision system will be installed to facilitate the

monitoring of train operation and also remote control of the
stations .The train supervision will log each train movement and
display it on the workstations with each Traffic Controller at the
OCC and on one workstation placed in the Station Control room
(SCR) with each Station Controller.
4.6.2.3 Standards
The following standards will be adopted with regard to the Signalling

system.
Description Standards
Solid State Interlocking adopted for station having switches and

crossing. All related equipment as far as possible will be
Interlocking centralised in the equipment room at the station. The depot shall
be interlocked except for lines mainly used for shunting,
workshop/inspection shed areas.
With Direct current 110V D.C. point machines or 380 volts 3

Operation of Points
phase, 50 Hz. AC point machines.
Audio frequency Track circuits on running section, test track and
Track Circuit
in depot.
Signals at Stations Line Side signals to protect the points (switches).
UPS (uninterrupted power at
For Signalling and Telecommunications
stations as well as for OCC)
Automatic signalling (Three aspect) . LED type signals for
Signalling along the line.
reliability and reduced maintenance cost.
Automatic train control with over speed protection and protection

Train protection systems
against signal passing at danger.
Movement of all trains to be logged on to a central computer and

Train Describer System displayed on workstations in the Operational Control Centre and
at the SCR. Remote control of stations from the OCC.

Redundancy for TP/Train Future space provision for redundancy for Train born
Describer. equipments. Redundancy to be provided for ATS at OCC.
Cables Cables will be steel armoured, as far as possible.
SIL-4 safety levels as per CENELEC standard for signal

Fail Safe Principles
application.
All data transmission on telecom cables/ OFC/Radio. All

Immunity to External
Signalling and telecom cables will be separated from power
Interface.
cables. CENELEC standards to be implemented for EMC.
Train Working Under
Running on site with line side signal.
emergency
Environmental Conditions Air-conditioners for all equipment rooms (except UPS room).
Philosophy of continuous monitoring of system status and
preventive & corrective maintenance of Signalling equipments
Maintenance philosophy shall be followed. Card / module / sub-system level replacement
shall be done in the field and repairs under taken in the central
laboratory/ manufacturer’s premises.
4.6.3 Specifications
4.6.3.1 Line Side Signalling and Train Protection
Line Side Signalling and Train protection is the primary function of the
train control systems. This sub-system will be inherently capable of
achieving the following objectives in a fail-safe manner.
• Prevent rear-end or side collision resulting from one train trying to

over-take the other.
• Prevent trains being routed on the conflicting routes.
• Prevent the possibility of points / switches moving just ahead of or
under train.
• Not hindering the vehicles attaining maximum permissible speed.
Basic sub-system will include the following modules:-
i) Train detection
ii) Train Protection
iii) Solid State Interlocking
iv) Signal and speed enforcement.
v) Brake assurance
vi) Interface with electrical sub-systems of the vehicle like brake
control.
• Track circuits will be used for vehicle detection.

• Balise will be used for transmission of data from track to train
• Sub-system/components will conform to international standards like
BS, IS, CENELEC, IEC, ITU-T etc.

4.6.3.2 The cab borne equipment
These will be of modular sub-assemblies for each function for easy

maintenance and replacement. The ATP assemblers will be fitted in the
vehicle integrated with other equipment of the rolling stock.
4.6.3.3 Train Supervision
Train supervision system will be installed in the Operation control

center and at the stations with point and crossings and will have a
panoramic view of the sectional jurisdiction showing the status of
tracks, points, signals and the vehicles operating in the relevant
section/ whole system. The system shall provide train information in
real time and in printouts for later analysis. It shall be possible to set
route of trains at terminals, mid-terminals and runback stations, etc.
both locally and remotely. It shall have audio-visual alarms for
deficiencies / malfunctioning.
4.6.3.4 SSI at Stations
This sub-system is used for controlling vehicle movements into or out

of stations automatically from a workstation. All stations having points
and crossings will be provided with workstations for local control. Track
occupancy, point position, etc. will be clearly indicated on the
workstation. It will be possible to operate the workstation locally, if the
central control hands over the operation to the local station. The
system design will be on the basis of fail-safe principle.
The equipment will withstand tough environmental conditions

encountered in a Mass Transit System. Control functions in external
circuits will be proved both in the positive and negative wires. Suitable
IS, IRS, BS standards or equivalent international standards will be
followed in case wiring, installation, earthing, cabling, power supply and
for material used in track circuits, relays, point operating machines,
power supply etc.
4.6.4 Space Requirement for S & T Installations
Adequate space for proper installations of all Signalling equipment at

each of the stations has to be provided keeping in view the case of
maintenance and use of instrumentation set up for regular testing and
line up of the equipment/system. The areas required at each of the
stations for S & T equipment shall be generally 40 sq.m for UPS
Room (common for signaling and telecom) and 40 sq.m at interlocked
station with points & 25 sq.m at other stations for Signalling. These
areas shall also cater to local storage and space for maintenance
personnel to work. At the OCC and the Depot, the areas required

shall be as per the final configuration of the equipments and network

configuration keeping space for further expansion.
4.6.5 Maintenance Philosophy for Signalling systems
The philosophy of continuous monitoring of system status and

preventive & corrective maintenance of Signalling and
telecommunication equipments shall be followed. Card / module / sub-
system level replacement shall be done in the field. Maintenance
personnel shall be suitably placed at intervals and they shall be trained
in multidisciplinary skills. Each team shall be equipped with a fully
equipped transport vehicle for effectively carrying out the maintenance
from station to station.
The defective card/ module / sub-system taken out from the section
shall be sent for diagnostic and repair to a centralised S&T repair lab
suitably located on the section. This lab will be equipped with
appropriate diagnostic and test equipments to rectify the faults and
undertake minor repairs. Cards / modules / equipments requiring major
repairs as specified in suppliers documents shall be sent to
manufacturer's workshop.
INTERLOCKING CUBICLE
4.7 TELECOMMUNICATION
4.7.1 Introduction
The telecommunication system acts as the communication backbone

for Signalling systems and other systems such as SCADA, AFC etc
and provides telecommunication services to meet operational and
administrative requirements of metro network.

4.7.2 Telecommunication
4.7.2.1 Overview
The telecommunication facilities proposed are helpful in meeting the

requirements for
1. Supplementing the Signalling system for efficient train operation.

2. Exchange of managerial information
3. Crisis management during emergencies
4. Passenger information system
The proposed telecom system will cater to the following requirements:
• Train Traffic Control

• Assistance to Train Traffic Control
• Maintenance Control
• Emergency Control
• Station to station dedicated communication
• Exchange Telephone
• Passenger Announcement System within the station and from
Central Control to each station.
• Centralised Clock System
• Train Destination Indicator
• Instant on line Radio Communication between Central Control and
Moving Cars and maintenance personnel.
• Data Channels for Signalling, SCADA, Automatic Fare Collection
etc.
4.7.2.2 Telecommunication System and Transmission Media
i) Optical Fibre Cable - Main Telecommunication Bearer
The main bearer of the bulk of the telecommunication network is

proposed with optical fibre cable system. Considering the
channel requirement and keeping in view the future expansion
requirements a optical fiber cable is proposed to be laid in ring
configuration with path diversity.
SDH STM-1 155 Mbps based system shall be adopted with SDH
nodes at every station, OCC and depot. Access 2MB
multiplexing system will be adopted for the lower level at each
node, equipped for channel cards depending on the
requirement of channels in the network. Further small routers
and switches shall be provided for LAN network at station.

ii) Telephone Exchange
For a optimised cost effective solution a mix of medium and

small exchanges are planned. Three EPABX of 512 ports will be
provided at four locations preferably one at the OCC, one at an
intermediate station and other at the depot. Small exchanges of
30 port each shall be at each station. These are to be connected
together through optical fiber, which will provide communication
at each stations and depots. The Exchanges will serve the
subscribers at all the stations, OCC and depot. The exchanges
will be interconnected at multiple 2 MB level through optical fibre
cable. The Exchanges shall be software partitioned for EPABX
and Direct Line Communication from which the phones shall be
extended to the stations.
iii) Mobile Radio Communication
Mobile Radio communication system having 8 channels is

proposed for on-line emergency communication between
Motorman (Front end and Rear end) of moving train and the
Central Control. The system shall be based on Digital Trunk
Radio Technology to TETRA International standard. This system
now is widely adopted for mobile radio communication in metro /
rapid transit services abroad. All the stations and Car Depot will
be provided with fixed radio sets. Mobile communication facility
for maintenance parties and Security Personnel will be provided
with handheld sets.
These persons will be able to communicate with each other as

well as with central control. To provide adequate coverage,
based on the RF site survey to be carried out, base stations for
the system will be located at a site conveniently selected after
detailed survey. Preliminarily it is anticipated that minimum
seven Radio Base stations shall be required, interlinked to the
Central Radio Equipment at the OCC through channels on the
optical fibre system.
The frequency band for operation of the system will be that for
TETRA in 400/800 MHz band depending upon availability of
frequency. Instant mobile radio communication between the
motorman of the moving cars from any place and the Central
Control can be established. The motorman can also contact any
station in the network through the central control, besides
intimating the approaching trains about any emergency like
accident, fire, line blocked etc., thus improving safety
performance.

Radio Tower
iv) Passenger Announcement System
The system shall be capable of announcements from the local

station as well as from OCC. Announcements from OCC will
have over-riding priority in all announcements.
v) Centralised Clock System
This will ensure an accurate display of time through a

synchronization system of slave clocks driven from a Master
Clock at the operation control center. The Master Clock signal
shall also be required for synchronization of SDH and
Exchanges. The System will ensure identical display of time at
all locations. Clocks are to be provided at platforms, concourse,
Station Master's Room and other service establishments etc.
vi) Train Destination Indicators
These shall be located at convenient locations at all stations to

provide bilingual visual indication of the status of the running
trains and will typically indicate information such as destination,
arrival/departure time, and also special messages in
emergencies. The boards shall be provided at all platforms and
concourses of terminal & junction stations.
vii) Network Monitoring and Management
For efficient and cost effective maintenance of the entire

communication network, it is proposed to provide a network
management systems (NMS), which will help in diagnosing
faults immediately from a central location and attending the
same with least possible delay, thus increasing the operational
efficiency and reduction in manpower requirement for
maintenance.
The proposed NMS system will be covering radio
communication, Optical Fiber Transmission system and
Telephone Exchange.

4.7.2.3 Standards
The standards proposed to be adopted for telecommunication systems

are shown in Table below:
System Standards
• Transmission System SDH based for the entire telecom network.

Optical Fibre system as the main bearer for bulk of the
• Transmission Media
telecommunication network,
EPABX of 512 ports is to be provided at four locations preferably one at
• Telephone Exchange OCC, one at an intermediate station and other at both depot. Further
small exchanges shall be at each station.
Digital Train radio (TETRA) communication between motorman of
• Train Radio System
moving cars, stations, maintenance personnel and central control.
LED based boards with adequate visibility to be provided at convenient
• Train Destination
location at all stations to provide bilingual visual indication of the status
Indicator System
of the running trains, and also special messages in emergencies.
Accurate display of time through a synchronisation system of slave
• Centralized clock
clocks driven from a master clock at the OCC and sub – master clock in
system
station. This shall also be used for synchronisation other systems.
• Passenger Passenger Announcement System covering all platform concourse
Announcement System areas with local as well as Central Announcement.
Redundancy on Radio base station equipment.
• Redundancy
Path Redundancy for Optical Fibre Cable by provisioning in ring
(Major System)
configuration.
• Environmental
All equipment rooms to be air-conditioned except UPS room.
Conditions
System to have, as far as possible, automatic switching facility to
alternate routes/circuits in the event of failure.
• Maintenance Philosophy of preventive checks of maintenance to be followed. System
Philosophy networked with NMS for diagnosing faults and co-ordination.
Card/module level replacement shall be done in the field and repairs
undertaken in the central laboratory/manufacture's premises.
4.7.3 Car Depot
Car Depot will be provided with a Mobile Radio Dispatcher System for
Depot/Yard communication connected from the central infrastructure at
the OCC, to provide communication from the Depot Control Room to
Mobile sets in the Cabs of the cars and hand held sets with the
maintenance personnel of the depot.
All the offices and the Maintenance installations at Car Depot will be
connected with EPABX telephones and will be fed from the nearest
Exchange.

4.7.4 Space Requirement for Telecom Installations
Adequate space for proper installations of all Telecommunication

equipment at each of the stations has to be provided keeping in view
the case of maintenance and use of instrumentation set up for regular
testing and line up of the equipment/system. The areas required at
each of the stations for S & T equipment shall be generally 40 sq.m
each for Telecomm Room, UPS Room (common for signal and
telecom). These areas shall also cater to local storage and space for
maintenance personnel to work. Radio tower shall be located at
approximately 5 km interval along the section. The tower may be
placed as near to Base Station Equipment Rooms as possible but not
more than 40 - 50 m away from it. Necessary land/ space acquisition
(8mX8m) for the same should be planned. However at detailed design
stage it can be checked whether these can be provided over the
station. At the OCC and the Depot, the areas required shall be as per
the final configuration of the equipments and network configuration
keeping space for further expansion.
4.7.5 Maintenance Philosophy for S & T systems
The philosophy of continuous monitoring of system status and

preventive & corrective maintenance of Signalling and
telecommunication equipments shall be followed. Card / module / sub-
system level replacement shall be done in the field. Maintenance
personnel shall be suitably placed at intervals and they shall be trained
in multidisciplinary skills. Each team shall be equipped with a fully
equipped transport vehicle for effectively carrying out the maintenance
from station to station.
The defective card/ module / sub-system taken out from the section
shall be sent for diagnostic and repair to a centralized S&T repair lab
suitably located on the section. This lab will be equipped with
appropriate diagnostic and test equipments to rectify the faults and
undertake minor repairs. Cards / modules / equipments requiring major
repairs as specified in suppliers documents shall be sent to
manufacturer's workshop.
4.8 AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION
4.8.1 Introduction
Mass Rapid Transit Systems handle large number of passengers.

Ticket issual and fare collection play a vital role in the efficient and
proper operation of the system. To achieve this objective, ticketing
system shall be simple, easy to use/operate and maintain, easy on
accounting facilities, capable of issuing single/multiple journey tickets,
amenable for quick fare changes and require overall lesser manpower.

In view of above, computer based automatic fare collection system is

proposed.
AFC system proves to be cheaper than semi-automatic (manual
system) in long run due to reduced manpower cost for ticketing staff,
reduced maintenance in comparison to paper ticket machines, overall
less cost of recyclable tickets (Smart Card/Token) in comparison to
paper tickets and prevention of leakage of revenue.
Relative advantages of automatic fare collection system over manual
system are as follows:
A) Manual fare collection systems have the following inherent

disadvantages:
1. Large number of staff is required for issue and checking of

tickets.
2. Change of fare structure is time consuming as has to be
done at each station.
3. Manipulation possible by jamming of mechanical parts.
4. Staff and passenger interaction leading to more chances of
confrontation.
5. 100% ticket checking at entry / exit impossible.
B) Automatic fare collection systems have the following

advantages:
1. Less number of staff required.

2. Less possibility of leakage of revenue due to 100% ticket
check by control gates.
3. Recycling of ticket fraudulently by staff avoided.
4. Efficient and easy to operate, faster evacuation both in
normal and emergency.
5. System is amenable for quick fare changes.
6. Management information reports generation easy.
7. System has multi-operator capabilities. Same Smart Card
can be used for other applications also,
8. AFC systems are the worldwide accepted systems for Metro
environment.
The proposed ticketing system shall be of Contactless Smart

Token/ Card type. The equipments for the same shall be
provided at each station Counter/Booking office and at
convenient locations and will be connected to a local area
network with a computer in the Station Master's room.
Equipment and installation cost of Contactless Smart Card
/Token based AFC system is similar to magnetic ticket based
AFC system, but Contactless system proves cheaper due to
reduced maintenance, less wear and tear and less prove to
dusty environment.

C) Choice of Control Gates
Retractable flap type Control Gates are proposed which offer

high throughput (45 passengers per minute), require less
maintenance and are latest in modern metros internationally.
Tripod turnstile type or pneumatic flap type gates offer less
throughput and require more maintenance. Bi-parting flap gates
though offer good throughput but require more discipline from
patrons.
D) Passenger Operated Machine
Space for provision of Passenger Operated Machines

(Automatic Ticket Dispensing Machines) for future, shall be
provided at stations.
4.8.2 Standards
The standard proposed for AFC systems are as under:

Standards Description
a) Contactless smart token – For single journey. They shall have
stored value amount for a particular journey. Tokens are captured
• Fare media at the exit gate.
b) Contactless smart card – For multiple journeys.
Computer controlled retractable flap type automatic gates at entry and exit.
There will be following types of gates:
• Entry
• Gates
• Exit
• Reversible – can be set to entry or exit
• Disabled – Wide reversible gate for disabled people.
All the fare collection equipments shall be connected in a local area
network with a station server controlling the activities of all the machines.
• Station computer,
These station servers will be linked to the central computer situated in the
Central computer and
operational control centre through the optic fibre communication channels.
AFC Net work
The centralised control of the system shall provide real time data of
earnings, passenger flow analysis, blacklisting of specified cards etc.
• Ticket office machine Manned Ticket office machine shall be installed in the stations for selling
(TOM/EFO) cards/ tokens to the passengers.
• Ticket reader and Ticket reader shall be installed near EFO for passengers to check information
portable ticket decoder. stored in the token / cards.
• UPS (uninterrupted
power at stations as Common UPS of S&T system will be utilised.
well as for OCC).
Being fully Contactless systems, manpower requirement for maintenance is much
• Maintenance
less compared to system with magnetic tickets. However, adequate facilities to be
philosophy
provided similar to that of S&T systems.

4.8.3. Integration of AFC with Suburban/Bus System
Common Smart Card based ticketing for both Suburban and Bus
systems is not proposed at this stage as this will require installation of
AFC system at all suburban stations and in buses also. A Clearing
House system will also be required for separation of revenue among
various operators. However, the proposed system has multioperator
capability and in future this will be possible to integrate various
transport providers and other agencies.
Entry/Exit
Ticket Collecting System

4.9 ROLLING STOCK
The required transport demand forecast is the governing factor for the
choice of the Rolling Stock. In a metro city like Mumbai, the forecasted
Peak Hour Peak Direction Traffic ( PHPDT ) precludes use of Light
Rail Vehicle. Considering the future expected population increase, the
use of Mass Rapid Transit Rail Vehicle of similar to DMRC has been
considered
4.9.1 Optimisation of Coach Size
The Versova -Andheri- Ghatkoper, Line-1 is on elevated track i.e. 8-10

meter above ground level. Considering the clearances and also the
space required for service and cables etc., the coach with following
principal dimensions has been prescribed
Table 6.4.1
Size of the coach
Length Width at Height over

Door AC portion of
Roof
Driver Motor Car 21.84 m 3.2 m 3.9 m
Trailer car 21.74 m 3.2 m 3.9 m
Principal dimensions are shown in Figure 4.9.1 & 4.9.2.
4.9.2 PASSENGER CARRYING CAPACITY
In order to maximize the passenger carrying capacity, longitudinal

seating arrangement shall be adopted. The whole train shall be
vestibuled to distribute the passenger evenly in all the coaches.
Criteria for the calculation of standing passengers are 3 persons per
square meter of standing floor area in normal state and 6 persons in
Crush State of peak hour.
Therefore Driving Trailer with 21.84 m carbody length, with 3.2 m

carbody width and longitudinal seat arrangement conceptually have
the capacity of 43 seated, 239 standing thus a total of 282 passengers
for a car, and a Motor car with 21.74 m carbody length, with 3.2 m
carbody width and longitudinal seat arrangement conceptually have
the capacity of 50 seated, 257 standing thus a total of 307 for a car is
envisaged considering a standee area of 6 persons/sq. meter. Table
6.4.2 shows these figures.

Table 6.4.2
Carrying Capacity of Mass Rail Vehicles
Driving Motor Trailer car / 4 car 6 car 8 car

car Non-driving Train Train Train
motor car
Normal Crush Normal Crush Crush Crush Crush
Seated 43 43 50 50 136 286 386
Standing 120 239 129 257 992 1506 2020
Total 163 282 179 307 1178 1792 2406
NORMAL-3 Per/sqm of standee area

CRUSH -6 Per/Sqm of standee area
4.9.3 WEIGHT
The weights of motor cars and trailers are estimated as in Table 6.4.3,
referring to the experiences in Delhi Metro. The average passenger
weight has been taken as 60 kg.
Table 6.4.3
Weight of Mass Rail Vehicles (TONS)
DMC TC MC
TARE 42 42 42
Passenger
(Normal) 9.8 10.7 10.7
(Crush) 16.9 18.4 18.4
Gross
(Normal) 51.8 52.7 52.7
(Crush) 58.9 60.4 60.4
Heavy rush of passenger, having 10 standees per sq. meter can be

experienced occasionally. As done in DMRC, it will be advisable to
design the coach with sufficient strength so that even with this
overload, the design will not result in overstresses in the coach.
Coach and bogie should therefore be designed for 17 T axle load.
4.9.4 Required Power
For a typical average intersection distance of 1 Km, the running time

will be 82.5 sec to 72.85 sec to achieve schedule speed of 32 to 35
KMPH with dwell station time of 30 sec. To achieve this running time
between stations, the following values of acceleration and
deceleration were assumed in consideration of riding comfort,
adhesion and requirement of make up time.

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai Metro Rail System 23 / 40
Draft Final Report Versova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor
Draft Final Report Versova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor
Chapter 4 – System Selection
Max. Acceleration: 0.78 m/s2

Max. Deceleration 1.0 m/s2 (Normal brake)
More than 1.3 m/s2 (Emergency brake)
Traction in constant speed

Decelerating
Accelerating Coasting
Velocity ↑
30
0.78 m/s2 -1.0m/s2
0
Time →
Fig 4 - Simplified velocity – time operation curve
Necessary power for a train of about 239 t in gross weight to accelerate in 0.78
m/s2 at schedule speed of 32 Km/h, on a level and straight track would be about
1,450 KW.
Since the track on a viaduct could possibly be constructed with mild gradients
on a level and the traction motors could be operated with overload for a short
time, 8 traction motors with about 220 KW installed on a four car train would be
enough, even if the equivalent gradients on a curved section of track are
considered. It was also assessed that failure of one motor car in a train running
on a 4% and 5% grade having a R-100 curvature will still be giving sufficient
acceleration to the train to clear the section.
4.9.5 Coach design and basic parameters
The important criteria for selection of rolling stock are as under:

(i) Proven equipment with high reliability
(ii) Passenger safety feature
(iii) Energy efficiency
(iv) Light weight equipment and coach body
(v) Optimised scheduled speed
(vi) Aesthetically pleasing Interior and Exterior
(vii) Low Life cycle cost
(viii) Flexibility to meet increase in traffic demand
The controlling criteria are reliability, low energy consumption, lightweight and
high efficiency leading to lower annualised cost of service. The coach should
have high rate of acceleration and deceleration.
4.9.6 Selection of Technology
Low life cycle cost
The low life cycle cost is achieved by the way of reduced scheduled and
unscheduled maintenance and high reliability of the sub-systems. It is possible
to achieve these objectives by adopting suitable proven technologies. The
selection of following Technologies has been adopted to ensure low life cycle
cost.
(I) Car body
In the past carbon high tensile steel was invariably used for car bodies.
In-fact almost all the coaches built by Indian Railways are of this type.
These steel bodied coaches need frequent painting and corrosion repairs
which may have to be carried out up to 4-5 times during the service life of
these coaches. It is now standard practice to adopt stainless steel or
aluminium. The car bodies with aluminium requires long and complex
extruded sections which are still not manufactured in India. Therefore
aluminium car body has not been considered for use. Stainless steel
sections are available in India and therefore Stainless steel car bodies
have been specified. No corrosion repair is necessary on stainless steel
cars during the service life of the cars.
The stainless steel car body leads to energy saving due to light weight. It
also results in cost saving due to easy maintenance and reduction of
repair cost from excellent anti corrosive properties as well as an
improvement of riding comfort and safety in case of crash or fire.
Austenitic stainless steel with yield point of 70kg/mm2 has been
recommended as in Delhi Metro. For coach design, buffing load of 80
Tones has been considered as it is a stand alone system .A design life of
30 years for coach has been recommended.
(II) Bogies
Bolsters less light weight bogies with rubber springs are now universally
adopted in metro cars. These bogies require less maintenance and
overhaul interval is also of the order of 4,20,000km. The use of air spring
at secondary stage is considered with a view to keep the floor level of the
cars constant irrespective of passenger loading unlike those with coil
spring. The perturbations from the track are also dampened inside the car
body on account of the secondary air spring along with suitable Vertical
Hydraulic Damper. The primary suspension system improves the curve
running performance by reducing lateral forces through application of
conical rubber spring. A smooth curving performance with better ride index
is being ensured by provision of above type of bogies
INTERIOR VIEW
(I) Braking System
The brake system shall consist of –
(i) An electro-pneumatic (EP) service friction brake

(ii) A fail safe, pneumatic friction emergency brake
(iii) A spring applied air-release parking brake
(iv) An electric regenerative service brake
(v) Provision of smooth and continuous blending of EP and
regenerative braking
The regenerative braking will be the main brake power of the train and will
regain the maximum possible energy and pump it back to the system thus
fully utilise the advantage of 3 phase technology. The regenerative braking
should have air supplement control to bear the load of trailer car. In
addition , speed sensors mounted on each axle control the braking force
of the axles with anti skid valves, prompting re-adhesion in case of a skid
.The brake actuator shall operate either a tread brake or a wheel disc
brake .
(II) Propulsion System Technology
In the field of Electric Rolling Stock, DC series traction motors have been
widely used due to its ideal characteristics and good controllability for
traction applications. But these required intensive maintenance because
of commutators and electro-mechanical contactors, resistors etc
The brush less 3 phase induction motors have now replaced the d.c.
series motors in traction applications. The induction motor, for the same
power output, is smaller and lighter in weight and ideally suited for rail
based Mass Rapid Transit applications. The motor tractive effort and
speed is regulated by ‘Variable Voltage and Variable frequency’ control
and can be programmed to suit the track profile and operating
requirements. Another advantage of 3 phase a.c. drive and VVVF control
is that regenerative braking can be introduced by lowering the frequency
and the voltage to reverse the power flow and to allow braking to very low
speed.
For Mumbai Mass Rapid Transit System, three phase AC traction drive
that are self ventilated, highly reliable, robust construction and back up by
slip/slid control have been recommended for adoption.
GANG WAYS
using insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT). Thus three phase

variable voltage variable frequency output drives the traction motors for
propulsion.
The inverter unit uses optical fiber cable to connect the control unit to the
gate interface. This optical l fiber cable transmits the gate signals to drive
the advanced IGBT via the gate interface. This optical fiber cable provide
electrical isolation between the advanced IGBT and the control unit and
are impervious to electrical interference. These are recommended for
adoption in Trains of Mumbai MRTS .
(III) Interior and gang ways
The passenger capacity of a car is maximized in a Metro System by

providing longitudinal seats for seating and utilizing the remaining space
for standing passenger . Therefore all the equipments are mounted on the
under frame for maximum space utilization . The gangways are designed
to give a wider comfortable standing space during peak hours along with
easy and faster passenger movement especially in case of emergency .
(IV) Passenger Doors
For swift evacuation of the passenger in short dwell period, four doors of
adequate width, on each side of the coach have been considered. These
doors shall be of such dimensions and location that all the passenger
inside the train are able to evacuate with in least possible time without
conflicting movement .As the alignment passes through elevated section
at 10 to 12 meters above ground, automatic door closing mechanism is
envisaged from consideration of passenger safety. Passenger doors are
controlled electrically by a switch in Driver cab. Electrically controlled door
operating mechanism has been preferred over pneumatically operated
door to avoid cases of air leakage and sluggish operation of doors.
PASSENGER DOORS
The door shall be of Plug Swing Type as this has the advantage of being
flush with coach body when closed giving it a stream line look apart from
increasing the available space along width inside the coach.
(VI) Air –conditioning
With passenger loading of 6 persons/m2 for standee area and doors being
closed from consideration of safety and with windows being sealed type to
avoid transmission of noise, the air conditioning of coaches has been
considered essential. Each coach shall be provided with two air
conditioning units capable of automatically controlling interior temperature
throughout the passenger area at 27 C with 65% RH at all times under
varying ambient condition up to full load. For emergency situations such
as power failure or both AC failure etc ventilation provision supplied from
battery will be made .Provision shall be made to shut off the fresh air
intake and re-circulate the internal air of the coach, during an emergency
condition , such as fire outside the train causing excessive heat and
smoke to be drawn in to the coach .
(VII) Cab Layout
The modern stylish driver panel shall be FRP moulded which give
maximum comfort and easy accessibility of different monitoring
equipments to the driver along with clear visibility. The driver seat has
been provided at the left side of the cabin.
DRIVING CAB
4.9.6 Communication
The driving cab of the cars are provided with continuous communication with
base Operational Control Center and station control for easy monitoring of the
individual train in all sections at all the time.
Public Address and Passenger Information Display System is provided in the

car so that passengers are continuously advised of the next stoppage station,
final destination station, interchange station, emergency situations if any, and
other messages. The rolling stock is provided with Talk Back Units inside the
cars which permit conversation between passengers and the drivers in case of
any emergency.
4.9.7 Noise and Vibration
The train passes through heavily populated urban area .The noise and vibration
for a metro railway become an important criteria from public acceptance view
point. The source of noise are (i) rail-wheel interaction (ii) noise generated from
equipment like Blower, Compressor ,air conditioner, door , Inverter etc.(iii)
traction motor in running train .For elimination and reduction of noise following
feature are incorporated :-
¾ Provision of anti drumming floor and noise absorption material

¾ Low speed compressor , blower and air conditioner
¾ Mounting of under frame equipments on anti-vibration pad
¾ Smooth and gradual control of door
¾ Provision of GRP baffle on the via-duct for elimination of noise
transmission
¾ Provision of sound absorbing material in the supply duct and return grill of
air conditioner
¾ Sealing design to reduce the aspiration of noise through the gap in the
sliding doors and piping holes
The lower vibration level has been achieved by provision of bolster less type
bogies having secondary air spring.
4.9.8 Passenger Safety Features
(i) ATP
The rolling stock is provided with Continues Automatic Train Protection to

ensure absolute safety in the train operation. It is an accepted fact that
most of the accidents take place on account of human error. Adoption of
this system ensures freedom from human error. The on board
computerized ATC system compare and verify the continuous data like
speed etc .for safest train control
(ii) Fire
The rolling stock is provided with fire retarding materials having low fire
load, low heat release rate, low smoke and toxicity inside the cars. The
electric cables used are also normally low smoke zero halogen type which
ensures passenger safety in case of fire.
(iii) Crash worthiness features
The rolling stock is provided with inter car couplers having

crashworthiness feature which reduces the severity of injury to the
passengers in case of accidents.
(iv) Gangways
Broad gangways are provided in between the cars to ensure free

passenger movement between cars in case of any emergency.
Main Parameters of Mumbai Rolling stock
Gauge 1435 m
Rake formation
4 Car DT-MC-MC-DT
6 Car DT-MC-T-MC-MC-DT
8 Car DT-MC-TC-MC-TC-MC-MC-DT
DT = Trailer car with cab
MC = Motor Car
TC = Trailer Car
Minimum operational life 30 years
Curves and Grades
Min Horizontal curve
In Main line 100 m
In Depot 100m
Min curve Vertical 1500 m
Maximum Gradient
In main line 3%
In Depot 4%
Performance Parameters
Maximum Design speed 90 kmph
Maximum Operating speed 80 Kmph
Station Stoppage Time 30 Sec
Schedule speed 32 Kmph
Level of coasting 8%
Axle load 17 T
Adhesion
Traction 18%
Braking 16%
Acceleration 0.78 m/s/s ± 5%
Service braking rate 1.0m/s/s
Emergency braking rate 1.3m/s/s
Jerk rate 0.70±0.05m/s/s/s
Reliability No delay to service of 3 minutes or more,
and no premature withdrawal of a train
from service, shall occur in less than
40,000 km/train
Ride index 2.5

Train control ATO and ATP – MC
ATO – RC
Car body
Vehicle dimensions
Length
Cab length 2430mm
Length over body
DT 21,640mm
MC 21,340mm
TC 21,340mm
Length over body with fairing
DT 21,840mm
MC 21,740mm
TC 21,740mm
Length over body between coupler buffer faces

DT 22,460 mm
MC 22,240 mm
TC 22,240 mm
Width
Width at floor level 3,082 mm
Max. width over body 3200mm
Height
Panto locked down condition from TOR 4118mm
Air conditioner portion of roof from TOR 3898mm
non-AC portion of roof from TOR 3868mm
Head room 2075.5mm
Height of floor from TOR 1130mm
Coupler Height 810mm
Train length
4 car train 89,400mm
Bogie
Bogie wheel base 2400mm
Distance between bogie centers 15,000mm

Wheel diameter (new) 860mm
Wheel diameter (fully worn) 780mm
Gangway
Width 1400mm
Clear Width 1250mm
Length 450mm
Gangway Head room 1900mm
DOOR
Door type Externally hung, sliding, biparting door
Door opening width 1400mm

Automatic obstruction detection feature Provided
Push back feature Provided
Type of window Double glazed
Material of coach Stainless steel
Flatness of the body 1mm/1000mm
Carrying capacity
Seating arrangement Longitudinal
Coach carrying capacity
DT 282 (seating - 43; standing - 239)
MC 307 (seating - 50; standing - 257)
TC 307 (seating - 50; standing - 257)
Train Carrying capacity
4 car train 1178 (seating - 186; standing - 992)
6 car train 1792 (seating - 286; standing - 1506)
8 car train 2406(seating - 386; standing -2020)
Weight
Tare Weight DT 42T
Tare Weight MC/TC 42T
Passenger weight 60 kg
Passenger weight DT(kg) 16920
Passenger weight MC(kg) 18420
Train weight in tare condition
4 car train 168
6 car train 252
8 car train 336

Buffing force 1200 kN
Fire load 22000 MJ for RC
Fire standard BS 6853
Type of cables Low smoke Halogen free flame retardant
cables
Illumination level 300 Lux at 1 metre above FL
Couplers
Cab ends Automatic at the end of unit
Non cab end Semi permanent at inner end of unit
Bogie
Primary suspension Chevron rubber
Secondary suspension Air spring
Wheel disc dia New – 860 mm
Worn out - 780 mm
Wheel disc type Mono block
Flange lubrication system Not provided
Bearing attention Life > 3 million km
Brake system
Brake Electro pneumatic service brake
Electric regenerative brake
Pneumatic friction Emergency
Parking brake
Smooth and continuos blending
Electric brake fade speed <5 kmph
Wheel slid protection Digital wheel slide protection
Propulsion details
Traction system Voltage 25 KV AC OHE
Transformer Type Silicon oil cooled
Transformer capacity 1170 kVA
Traction Motors 4 x 220 kW (continuous) self ventilated
transversely mounted 3 phase induction
motor
TM Mounting arrangement Bogie mounted

Power converter/ Inverter IGBT Voltage source inverter with PWM,
air cooled
Power converter/ Inverter 220 kV
No of converter/inverter per motor car 2

Auxiliary Inverter 151 KVA
Type of Battery Ni-Cd
Supply of Emergency load > 60 minutes
Air conditioning
No of Air condition 2 per car
Mounting Arrangement Roof mounted
Type of coolant R22
Inside temperature 29 ºC with 65% humidity –RC
27 ºC with 65% humidity –MC
Out side temperature 43 ºC with 33% humidity
Emergency air supply 18 m3/ hour / person
Cab Ventilation Separate cab AC with air supply of 144
m3/ hour
Communication system
Two way communication between OCC
and driver
Emergency passenger announcement
Simplex conversation between
passenger and driver
Conversation between both cabs
Automatic voice announcement system
Passenger information system
Chapter 5 - Civil Engineering
Chapter 5.0
Civil Engineering
5.1 GEOMETRIC DESIGN NORMS
5.1.1 General
The design parameters related to the Metro system described herewith

have been worked out based on a detailed evaluation, experience and
internationally accepted practices. Various alternatives were considered for
most of these parameters but the best-suited ones have been adopted for
the system as a whole.
The design parameters as suggested in the earlier DPR for Andheri -

Ghatkopar section have also been modified so as the same parameters are
applicable for all metro corridors in Mumbai.
5.1.2 Horizontal Alignment
On consideration of maximum allowable cant of 125 mm and cant deficiency

of 100 mm on Metro tracks, the safe speed on curves of radii of 400 m or
more is 80 km/h. On elevated section use of curves with minimum radius of
200 m, having speed of 60 km/h shall be adopted. There are, however,
exceptional situations where due to site constraints; use of sharper curves is
unavoidable. Under such situations on this project, curves of 100-m radius
(safe speed of 40 km/h) have been adopted.
For maximum permissible speed on curve with various radii Table 5.1 may
be referred.
Horizontal curves
Curve radius in mid section:

Elevated Section
Minimum 200 m
Absolute minimum : 100 m
Minimum curve radius at stations : 1000 m
Maximum permissible cant (Ca) : 125 mm
Maximum cant deficiency (Cd) : 100 mm
Transition curves
The existing roads also have frequent curves. For the Metro alignment,
which normally follows the median of the road, similar curves are introduced
for the Metro alignment. However it is necessary to provide transition curves

at both ends of the circular curves for comfort and safety of the passengers.
Due to change in gradients at various locations in the corridor it is
necessary to provide frequent vertical curves along the alignment. In case of
ballastless track, it is desirable that the vertical curves and transition curves
of horizontal curves do not overlap. These constraints may lead to reduced
lengths of transition curves. However for safety and comfort of passengers,
the transition curves have to be designed with certain minimum parameters.
- Minimum length of Transitions of

Horizontal curves (m) : 0.44 times actual cant or
cant deficiency (in mm),
which ever is higher.
Desirable : 0.72 times actual cant or
cant deficiency, (in mm)
which ever is higher
- No overlap is allowed between transition curves and vertical curves.

- Minimum straight between two Transition curves : either 25 m or NIL.
- Minimum curve length between two transition curves: 25 m
5.1.3 Vertical Alignment
a) Elevated Sections
The viaducts carrying the tracks will have a vertical clearance of

minimum 5.5 m above road level. For meeting this requirement with
the ‘U’ shaped pre-stressed concrete girders, the rail level will be
about 8.5 m above the road level. However, at stations which are
located above central median, the rail level will be 10.5 m above the
road level if no mezzanines are provided and the ticketing and other
technical areas are located outside the right of way of the roads. If,
however, concourses are provided below the station structures, then
the rail level shall be 12 m above road level. These levels will,
however, vary marginally depending upon where the stations are
located.
The distance between track centers on the elevated section is kept

as 4.1 m uniform through out the corridor to standardize the
superstructure. However, at scissors crossings the track centers are
kept at 4.5 m . Scissors cross overs are proposed at three locations,
one each at terminal stations for train reversal purpose and another
for Airport link at Airport Road Station.

b) Gradients
Normally the stations shall be on level stretch. In limiting cases

station may be on a grade of 0.1 %. Between stations, generally the
grades may not be steeper than 2.0 %. However, Where existing
road gradients are steeper than 2 %, gradients upto 4%
(compensated) can be provided in short stretches on the main line.
- Maximum gradient at stations : 0.1 %

- Desirable gradient at stations : level
- Maximum gradient in mid section:
Normal : 2.0 %
Exceptional : 4.0 %
c) Vertical Curves
Vertical curves are to be provided when change in gradient exceeds

0.4%. However it is recommended to provide vertical curves at every
change of gradient.
- radius of vertical curves:
• On main line (desirable) : 2500 m
(minimum) : 1500 m
• Other Locations : 1500 m
• Minimum length of vertical curve : 20 m
5.1.4 Design Speed
The maximum sectional speed will be 80 km/h. However, the applied cant,
and length of transition will be decided in relation to normal speeds at
various locations, as determined by simulation studies of alignment, vertical
profile and station locations. Computerized train simulation studies need to
be conducted with proposed gradients at the time of detailed design stage.
This is with the objective of keeping down the wear on rails on curves to the
minimum.
Table 5.1
Cant, Permitted speed and Minimum Transition length for various Curves
Radius Actual Cant Cant Deficiency Permitted Speed Minimum Transition

(m) (mm) (mm) (km/h) (m)
3000 20 8.72 80 10
2000 30 13.09 80 15
1000 50 36.17 80 25
800 60 47.72 80 30
500 90 82.35 80 40

400 125 90.43 80 55

300 125 100 70 55
200 125 100 55 55
150 125 100 50 55
120 125 100 40 55
100 125 100 40 55
5.1.5 Station Locations
Stations have been located so as to serve major passenger destinations

and to enable convenient integration with other modes of transport.
However effort has also been made to propose station locations, such that
inter station distances are as uniform as possible. The average spacing of
stations is kept close to one km.
5.2 DESCRIPTION OF ALIGNMENT
5.2.1 Introduction
An West-East corridor from Andheri to Ghatkopar was identified as priority

corridor in SMART (Selection of Mass Rapid transit System) study carried
out by MMRDA under Indo-German Technical Co-operation through
consortium led by TEWET in association with DE-Consult & TCS during the
year 1997-2000. Further, in the year 2003 MMRDA appointed M/s. CES
(Consulting Engineering Services (I) Pvt. Ltd.) to update the SMART report
and also examine the feasibility of extending the corridor up to Versova
towards West.
In Mid 2003, MMRDA engaged DMRC to prepare a Master plan for a Metro
Rail System for the entire Greater Mumbai with horizon year as 2031. In this
plan, a total network of 146.5 kms consisting of seven corridors was
identified for implementation in three phases. The Master Plan incorporates
the extension of Ghatkopar - Andheri corridor to Versova. Total length of the
priority corridor is 11.51Km. Subsequently, MMRDA sought the services of
DMRC for preparation of detailed project report for the part of phase – I
corridors of the master plan (48.3km) as under:
In addition to the SMART study report and it’s CES update, MMRDA desired
to upgrade the feasibility study between Andheri - Ghatkopar to DPR level.
For this purpose the available data of Topographic survey handed
over by MMRDA has been used. As per scope of work,no fresh
surveys need to be carried out in the eastern segment. But, fresh
survey has been carried out in Golibar road area. However for Andheri -
Versova section, fresh surveys were carried out.

5.2.2 Project Area
The project area has two distinct sections:
(i) Versova-Andheri (western segment) and Andheri-Ghatkopar (Eastern

segment). Versova is the old fishermen village located in the west
cost. The Versova-Andheri area has developed in the last 20 years
and has mixed land use predominantly residential and education
institutions. Whereas, Andheri-Ghatkopar (upto Saki Naka) is the
earlier development. Andheri is the most important sub urban station
on western Railway and Ghatkopar is the most important station on
Central railway. This area serves the Marol industrial area of MIDC,
Sahar International airport and nearby developing office/commercial
complexes. The section Saki Naka to Ghatkopar is mainly residential
and do not have proper road access due to undulating terrain caused
by a local hillock.
The metro corridor is proposed, as elevated, traverses through the

center of the existing arterial roads of Jai Prakash Road and
Mathuradas Vasanji Road (Andheri-Kurla Road). A small length of
the road near Asalpha is not existing but is taken up for development
by MMRDA as a part of MUIP. The total length of the corridor is
11.07km. A maintenance depot with link line to North – South
corridor is proposed at Jai Prakash Road near D.N. Nagar in about
12.25 Hectares of land, which is almost vacant. This location of the
depot is suitable for North – south corridor also. An alternative depot
location is in the Godrej land (Exhibition ground) on North east of
Ghatkopar station, measuring 20 Ha. This land is recommended for
acquisition for depot facilities which will be needed if complete Metro
Network is to be commissioned or if D N Nagar land is not available.
(ii) DP Road in Asalpha Area
DP Road with a ROW of 45.7 m has been planned which is proposed

to pass over the hill at Asalpha across Kadam Road, Golibar Road,
Lal Bahadur Shastri Marg opposite to Hirachand Desai road meeting
Eastern Express Highway.
A sharp curve has been planned in the DP Road just after

crossing the Mehta Road, perhaps to reduce the affected
properties. This may require review as metro alignment can not
take such sharp curve and requires construction of portals.
Further, two viaducts have been planned in the D P Road before
reaching Kadam Road as the existing ground is too low.

DP Road has been planned with almost no cutting of the hill though it
appears that Kadam road needs to be diverted. The road level of
the proposed DP Road near the Sarvodaya Hospital is such that
the metro alignment has to be kept very high on Golibar Road
and up to Ghatkopar Station. Thus, the longitudinal section of
the proposed D. P. Road needs to be reviewed.
5.2.3 Reference Point
For planning convenience and also to enable flexibility in deciding end

points in either direction, center line of the proposed Andheri Metro station
(center line of the plat form) is assumed as Reference Point ZERO. The
chainage towards Ghatkopar in eastern direction shall be written with a
suffix `E’ and the chainage towards Versova in western direction shall be
written with a suffix `W’.
As explained in the previous para, the center line of the proposed Andheri
metro station is assumed as 0.000. The center of the Andheri Metro station
is located at 9.83 m east of the inter section point of center lines of MV
Road & Andheri Station road.
5.2.4 Proposals Under MUIP
The MMRDA has decided to Implement MUIP (Mumbai Urban Infrastructure

Project) which will include flyovers, elevated roads , construction of missing
road links, widening of roads etc. The implementation of Phase-I scheme of
MUIP has commenced since May 2004. The major MUIP schemes in the
vicinity of Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar corridor are given below:
a) Road Widening
The roads along which the alignment is proposed, are being widened
to their full Right of Way (ROW) as indicated in DP (Development
Plan) and are detailed below:
S.No Road Stretch ROW as per DP Reference of

DP Sheet
1 Versova Versova to West 27.45M (90’00’’) No.W/38 of
Road/ Jai of Andheri K/west Ward;
Prakash Rly.Stn No.W/39 of
Road (SV Road) K/East &
K/west Ward;
2 M.V.Road East of Andheri 27.45M(90’00’’) No.W/42 of
Rly.Stn to K/East &
Western K/west Ward;
Express
Highway.
3 M.V.Road WEH to 36.60M No.W/42 of
/Andheri- Surodiya (120’00’’) K/East &
Kurla Road Chowk/Junction K/west Ward;
with Pipe Line
road.
4 Andheri – Surodiya 45.7M No.W/43 of
Ghatkopar Chowk/Junction (150’00’’) K/East
Road with Pipe Line Ward;E/18 of
road to Junction N&L ward.
with DP Road
5 DP Road Subhash Nagar 45.7M(150’00’’) E/18 of N&L
to Sarvodaya ward; E/21 of
Hospital N&L ward.
6 Golibar Up to Junction 18.30M(60’00’’) E/22 of N
Road with LBS Marg ward.
7 Hira Chand Junction with 18.30M(60’00’’) E/22 of N
Desai LBS Marg to ward.
Marg Ghatkopar
Rly.stn.
It was indicated by MMRDA, that road widening /construction

activity will be taken up prior to Metro construction and the roads
with their full ROW will be available for Metro construction. During
discussions with MMRDA authorities, it was also informed that the
road widening would be carried out on either side equally with
respect to the present road center. Hence, the alignment planning,
station planning, assessment of land requirement for the Metro
system and other associated facilities etc. have been done
accordingly. Some adjustment to median shall be needed as the
metro alignment does not matches exactly with the central of existing
median.
b) New Flyovers, Missing Links and Elevated Roads
The roads along which the alignment is proposed are being widened
to their full Right of Way (ROW) as indicated in DP (Development
Plan) sheets.
(i) A flyover is proposed across Jay Prakash road in North- South

direction at its junction with linking road.
(ii) A flyover cum ROB is indicated across W. Rly tracks

connecting Jai Prakash Road and M.V. Road. The CES report
on updation of SMART study has therefore suggested to
locate the Andheri-Metro station leaving row of M. V. Road.
(iii) A three armed flyover (FL3) at the junction of MV Road with `

Maha Kali caves Road’ is proposed.
(iv) Further, a continuous elevated road (EL1) from Surodiya

Chowk (Junction of MV Road & Guru Hargovindji Road) up to
Saki Naka Junction is proposed.
It may be observed that MRTS alignment proposed in this corridor is

elevated at level ranging between 8.5 and 12m. This will clearly clash with
the proposals of the flyovers and elevated road and auto rickshaw deck.
There are 2 options (i) Raise the level of MRTS to about 18 - 20m or (ii)
Realign the flyover. The option (i) is costly as well as passenger friendly. It
is strongly recommended that MRTS system be given the highest priority for
implementation. The need for flyover be re-examined in view of likely
reduced road traffic and redesigned later. Thus these schemes need review
and are to be integrated with the metro system. Some of the schemes may
not be required (or deferred) due to construction of the metro. However the
ROB at Andheri station may be required. In such a case the alignment
proposed in feasibility report can be adopted with shift in Station Location.
c) Proposals under MUTP
SATIS scheme at Andheri
MMRDA has prepared GAD for the proposed SATIS scheme at

Andheri suburban railway station, which is part of MUTP. The
sanctioned GAD includes an elevated continuous deck for Auto
rickshaw to the west of Andheri. One arm of this deck along Jai
Prakash Road.
This scheme also needs to be reviewed as providing metro, ROB and

auto track will require major remodelling of roads on both side of the
Andheri station.
5.2.5 Eastern Segment
The Eastern segment of the Ghatkopar – Andheri –Versova, corridor starts

at Km.0.00 and runs along the center of the M.V Road . The alignment
crosses the elevated Western Express Highway in double elevated position
and continues on the MV Road, (Andheri – Kurla Road) and Andheri –
Ghatkopar Road up to Subhash Nagar. From Subhash Nagar, the alignment
follows the proposed DP road through Asalpha Village up to its intersection
with Golibar Road. In this particular stretch between Subhash Nagar and
Golibar road the alignment passes through cutting of two hillocks on either
side of Kadam road. After deviating from DP road near Sarvodaya Hospital
it continues on Golibar road and crosses the Lal Bahadur Shastry Marg and
terminates at Ghatkopar Railway station on Hirachand Desai Marg. Length
of the eastern segment is 7.860 Kms and is abutted by mixed land use viz.
Residential, Commercial and Institutional. The roads along which alignment
is proposed have different ROW as indicated in earlier.
As advised by MMRDA, the data such as topographic survey, Utilities, Geo-

technical investigation etc., available from the feasibility report for the metro
and the drawings prepared for the DP road in Asalpha area by other
consultants. However the longitudinal section of existing ground profile does
not match in the 2 sets of drawing. No fresh surveys have been carried out,
excepting Environmental & Social Impact assessment studies and
Topographic survey of Golibar Road.
(i) Alignment from Km 0.000 to Km E 0.800.
This stretch of the alignment along M.V.Road is almost straight. The

Andheri Metro Station lies in this stretch. The alignment is located on
the center of the existing road.
(ii) Alignment from Km E 0.800 to Km E 3.700
Alignment in this stretch is also more or less straight except mild

curves. The most important feature in the alignment is crossing of
N.S. flyover along Western Express Highway (WEH), which crosses
M V Road in elevated position. Width of the WEH flyover and the
roads on either side of it is about 61 m. Hence a special spanning
arrangement with 60 m span is proposed. The Rail level will be at a
height of 21.27m from the existing road level and it will be highest rail
level in this particular corridor. A gradient of 3.2% rise is provided for
a distance of 350 m prior to crossing the WEH.
Following four stations have been located in this stretch .
1. WEH station at Km. E 0.995

2. Chakala Station at Km. E 2.279
3. Airport road Station at Km. E 3.014
4. Marol Naka Station at Km. E 3.660
Airport Connection
In the original feasibility report, connection to the international airport has

been suggested from airport road station. It has been proposed to run few
trains from Versova to Airport station, however, this connection requires
shifting of airport road station towards west to provide for the turnouts and
crossovers for a right turn. Alternative alignment for this link is also included
in DPR. However, the link may not be beneficial & viable as very few
potential users will be attracted to this link since, the metro trains are not
planned for carrying heavy baggages with the passengers & from
international Airport normally carry.
The airport station is proposed as a side platform with single platform line
and the second line has been proposed for stabling. The cost estimate for
the same has been given in the DPR.
(iii) Alignment from Km E 3.700 to Km E 5.000
This stretch of the alignment has six curves out of which two curves
are with radius less than 300M. One station i.e., Saki Naka at
Km.E4.696 is located on the center of the Andheri – Kurla road and
at a distance of 130 m East of Saki Naka Junction.
(iv) Alignment from Km E 5.000 to Km E 6.350
This portion the alignment runs along the center of the Andheri-
Ghatkopar road and this stretch has three curves with radius 300 m
and above. Subhash Nagar station is located at Km E6.046.
(v) Alignment from Km E 6.350 to Km E7.200
Alignment in this stretch is planned along the center line of the

proposed DP road with ROW of 45.7 m under MUIP, which passes
through Asalpha village.The alignment will be cutting between
E6.916 and km E7.163. At Km. E 7.200, the alignment deviates from
the DP road through a right hand curve of radius 100M towards
Ghatkopar Rly. Station on to Golibar road.
(vi) Alignment from Km E7.200 to Km E7.450
After taking off from the DP road, the alignment follows the Golibar
Road and crosses LBS Marg and then follows the center of the Hira
Chand Desai Marg up to Ghatkopar Railway station. The Ghatkopar
metro station is located at Km E 7.786.
At present, the Ghatkopar station will be the eastern terminal of the

corridor. Due to space constraints, beyond the station, a crossover is
proposed to be located in front of the station, for train reversal
purposes.
5.2.6 Western Segment

The western segment of the Ghatkopar – Andheri –Versova, corridor starts
at Km.0.00 and runs along the center of the M.V Road in western direction.
The alignment crosses Western Railway tracks in elevation and follows the
J.P.Road, up to it’s terminal at Versova. The entire alignment has been
planned as elevated. The J.P Road is almost straight except at few
locations. The corridor road is abutted by mixed land use viz. Residential,
Commercial and Institutional. The proposed ROW of this road is 27.45 M
and the road is being widened to its full ROW under MUIP road widening
scheme. A total of three stations are located on this alignment. Out of the
three stations, two are located on the center of the road and one is located
away from the center of the road (but within the ROW) due to site
constraints. MRTS corridor from Colaba to Charkop would cross each other
at the junction of J.P Road with New Link road. The North - South corridor
would cross the East – West corridor in double elevation. A maintenance
depot offering facilities for minor repairs and stabling is being planned
North-East of this junction. Length of the western segment is 3.210Kms.The
alignment at different stretches is detailed as below:
(i) Alignment from Km. 0.000 to Km. W 0.160
This stretch of the alignment lies in railway portion and is straight and
crosses the western railway tracks in skew. This includes the
crossing of W. Rly tracks. The alternative studied are described
below:
a) Crossing of Western Railway Tracks Near Andheri
Railway Station.
A notable feature of the elevated alignment is that the

alignment crosses Andheri suburban station having six railway
tracks. The proposed metro alignment is crossing the western
railway tracks in skew. The center to center distance between
the end tracks along the metro alignment is 39.4m and the
crossing length of the metro alignment in the railway property
is 53.8m. All these lines are electrified with 1500 V dc traction
which is under conversion to 25 kV ac traction. The layout of
the tracks is shown in the plan enclosed as Fig.5.1
Line No. 1 is Down Harbour

Line No. 2 is Up Harbour
Line No. 3 is Down Local

Line No. 4 is Up Local
Line No. 5 is Down Through/Fast
Line No. 6 is Up Through/Fast

b) Spanning arrangement options:
Two alternative spanning arrangements for crossing the

Railway lands have been considered. They are :
(i) Alt. 1 : Single span across railway tracks.

(ii) Alt II : Two spans of 35 m and 25m.
Alt. 1 (Single span)
For spanning the 6 tracks, by a single span the minimum clear

distance between the piers should be as follows:
a) Distance between centres of end tracks = 39.4

b) Lateral clearance for the end tracks (2 X 2.65 m) = 5.3
c) Clear span (a) + (b) = 44.7
d) Overall Span (C + 2.5m-pier thickness) = 47.2
A single span of 47.2m, would therefore be adequate

technically. But ,foundations for the support piers of the span
will be rather close to end tracks and it would perhaps be
necessary to keep line No. 1 and 6 out of commission during
the period of piling for foundations and constructions of the
piers. This would require the co-ordination with the Railway
authorities.
As a clearance of 4.8 m to line No.1 and 9.6 m to line No.6

from the railway boundary is available, the overall span length
can be calculated as below :
a) Distance between centres of end tracks = 39.4

b) Lateral clearance for the end tracks (4.8+9.6 m) = 14.4
c) Clear span (a) + (b) = 53.8
d) Overall Span (C + 2.5m-pier thickness) = 56.3
Use of a span of 56.3 m would ease construction without

hampering the normal railway operations. The span can be
constructed by balanced cantilever method (in case of
prestressed concrete) or by launching of through type steel
girders with composite deck structure.
The highest Rail top level of the western railway tracks is at

RL 10.72 m. The proposed rail level being RL 21.25m, vertical
clearance obtainable above the Western Railway tracks would
be more than the desired 6.0 m vertical clearance.
Alt. II : Crossing with 2 Spans
Crossing of the tracks with 2 spans of 35.0 m &25.0 m, will

require construction of an intermediate pier in between line
nos. 2&3. This will also help in lowering the rail level of the
Metro tracks due to reduction in the depth of the girders.
Launching of girders shall also be easy as standard spans can
be utilised.
c) Preferred spanning arrangement
Out of two discussed alternatives, Alternative –II, i.e., crossing

of Rly. tracks with two spans is considered to be the best. But,
it requires permission from & co-ordination with the Railways .
In the event of railways disagreement to alternative-II, the
alternative –I is recommended. Though, this alternative
appears to be little more costly, but it would be easier and
ultimately proves to be an economical option. Co-ordination
with the Railways will be easy and minimal in this alternative.
(ii) Alignment from Km. W 0.160 to Km. W 0.480
At present , the ROW of JP Road, from west of Andheri station for a

length of about 300 m, is very limited and below 20 m. Most of the
properties/structures abutting this stretch on either side are old
structures having single or double storey. Number of trials were
made by locating the alignment off the road in northern side and
southern side of the J.P.Road to minimise the affected property. But,
this has not improved the situation. Since, the ROW as per DP is
27.45M , it is proposed to keep the alignment on the center of the
J.P.Road. The alignment in this stretch is almost straight with one
curve of radius 1500m.
(iii) Alignment from Km. W 0.480 to Km. W 2.949
The ROW in this stretch up to Seven Bungalows Junction is wide

enough and is of the order of 30 m with variations at few places, but
minimum being 20 m. Hence, the alignment in this stretch has been
planned on the center of the road. In this stretch two stations viz.
Azad Nagar at Km.W1.344 and D.N.Nagar station at Km.W2.154 are
located on the center of the road.
Between Km. W 0.480 and Km. W 1.129, right of way of road is 20

to 28 m. The existing road is on sharp curves. Hence, a reverse
curve with two circular curves on either end with radius as sharp as
121.2m and 270 m on the either end are provided with no straight
portion in between. The alignment is mostly on the middle of road.
Between Km. W1.107 and W1.403 the alignment is almost straight.

However, a flatter curve of radius 2500 is provided in this stretch on
which station Azad Nagar at W1.344 is located on the middle of the
road. The right off way in this particular stretch is in the order of 25 to
30 m.
The stretch between Km.W1.403 and Km.W1.692 the road is on a

curve hence a reverse curve with 2 circular curves on either end with
a radius of 425 m and 457 m is provided with zero straight in
between. Right of way in this stretch is sufficient and the alignment is
almost on the center of the road.
Between Km. W1.692 and Km. W2.927, the road is almost straight.
However only one curve with a radius of 7000 m is provided and the
alignment is located on the center of the road. The N-S alignment
(Colaba - Charkop) crosses, the alignment at Km.W2.056. Both the
alignments are being elevated, the N-S corridor will be crossing the E
– W corridor in double elevation. As a multi-level station is not
possible at this location of crossing , due to site constraints, the
stations are being planned in L shape with common concourse. Just
after the D.N.Nagar station towards Versova, on the northern side of
the alignment, an open land of about 12.25 Hectares (350mX 350m)
is available. This land would be suitable for locating a maintenance
depot with stabling & workshop facilities.
iv) Alignment from Km. W 2.949 to Km. W 3.210
The seven Bungalows bus depot is located north of J.P Road in this
location and the western terminal of the metro named as ` Versova ,
is located at Km. W 3.139 towards north of the J.P.Road. Due to the
site constraints, the alignment here is little away from the central
verge, and the road here requires realignment.
In the present phase of implementation, it is proposed to construct

the corridor up to Seven Bungalows junction only. Accordingly, dead
end is located at km. W 3.210 west of the Versova station along the
J. P. Road. A scissors crossing to enable reversal facilities has
been provided before (east of )the versova station. This very cross
over also provide access to Depot from UP&DN lines. However,
alignment for future extension beyond Versova station is also shown.
The take off for the depot is at chainage Km E2.970. A third line is
necessary from this point to the Versova station for providing
isolation from main lines. The viaduct in this stretch is to be designed

specifically for carrying 3 tracks.
5.2.7 Terminal Stations
a) Western terminal :
Versova metro station will be the western terminal on Versova-

Andheri –corridor. Due to its proximity to near by residential
settlements, BEST bus depot and availability of vacant land the
present station location offers good integration facilities. The dead
end on the western end at Km W3.210 is located on the JP road.
A 1 in 81/2 scissors cross over is provided before this station to

enable train reversal as well as entry to depot.
b) Eastern Terminal :
Ghatkopar metro station will be the eastern terminal on Versova-

Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor. This station is located abutting the
Ghatkopar Sub-urban railway station providing better integration with
it.
A 1 in 81/2 scissors cross over is provided in front of the station to
enable train reversal.
List of stations with chainages and inter station distances are

indicated in Table 5.2
Table 5.2
LIST OF STATIONS (VERSOVA - GHATKOPER)

SL.NO NAME CHAINAGE INT.-DIST(M)
DEAD END W 3210.00 -
1 VERSOVA W 3139.6 -
2 D N NAGAR W 2139.24 1000.36
3 AZAD NAGAR W 1344 795.24
4 ANDHERI 0 1344
5 WEH E 995.9 995.9
6 CHAKALA E 2279.09 1283.19
7 AIR PORT ROAD E 3014.28 735.19
8 MAROL NAKA E 3660.12 645.84
9 SAKINAKA E 4696.02 1035.9
10 SUBHASH NAGAR E 6046.49 1350.47
11 ASALPHA ROAD E 6788.51 742.02

12 GHATKOPER E 7786.31 997.8

DEAD END E 7860.00 -
AVG.INT.STN DITANCE 910.50
Depot Location
A depot has bee proposed at D N Nagar, which is close to the terminal

station on Western end. The depot connection is provided from Versova.
The depot is proposed on elevated deck to save space in depot area as well
as properties and blocking road in case the depot tracks are to be brought
on surface from Versova station. The depot at this location is useful for
the North - South alignment also as rake interchange can take place.
The elevated depot is also helpful in providing rake interchange line to N - S
corridor which is crossing Andheri - Versova section in double elevation.
In the feasibility study one of the alternative for depot location has been
shown at the Godrej land which is North – East of the Ghatkopar Station by
the side of Andheri – Ghatkopar link road. The alignment for this depot
takes off after Asalpha Road station and goes on the middle of the D P
Road. The alignment crosses the Lal Bahadur Shastri Marg and moves on
Andheri – Ghatkopar link road. Further, it goes on the northern side of the
road over bridge to cross the central railway tracks and moves into the
depot location. It is proposed that the depot at this location to be on the
surface.
In case this route is not to be served for passengers services, a single line
for depot connection is sufficient. However, for emergency it is proposed to
provide double line on this section also. The route length is about 1.625 Km.
No station has been proposed on this section as this alternative is only for
operational requirement. However this alternative will result in perpetually
higher operation cost due to ideal running of all trains from depot to the
main line.
5.2.8 Major Roads along the Route
The alignment from East - West traverses along few major roads as
indicated in Table 5.3. The major roads across the alignment are shown in
Table 5.4.

TABLE 5.3
MAJOR ROADS ALONG THE ALIGNMENT
S. Road Stretch ROW as per DP Reference of

No. DP Sheet
1 Versova Versova to West 27.45M(90’00’’) No.W/38 of
Road/ Jai of Andheri K/west Ward;
Prakash Road Rly.Stn(SV Road) No.W/39 of
Km W3.700 to Km K/East &
W0.225 K/west Ward;
2 M.V.Road East of Andheri 27.45M(90’00’’) No.W/42 of
Rly.Stn to Western K/East &
Express Highway. K/west Ward;
Km W 0.125 to
Km E0.875
3 M.V.Road WEH to Surodiya 36.60M(120’00’’) No.W/42 of
/Andheri- Chowk/Junction K/East &
Kurla Road with Pipe Line K/west Ward;
road.
Km E 0.875 to Km
E2.465.
4. Andheri – Surodiya 45.7M(150’00’’) No.W/43 of
Ghatkopar Chowk/Junction K/East
Road with Pipe Line Ward;E/18 of
road to Junction N&L ward.
with DP Road
Km E2.465 to Km
E6.350.
5. DP Road Subash Nagar to 45.7M(150’00’’) E/18 of N&L
Sarvodaya ward; E/21 of
Hospital N&L ward.
Km E6.350 to Km
E7.200.
7 Golibar Road Up to Junction 18.30M(60’00’’) E/22 of N
with LBS Marg ward.
Km E7.200 to Km
E7.455.
8 Hira Chand Junction with LBS 18.30M(60’00’’) E/22 of N
Desai Marg Marg to Ghatkopar ward.
Rly.stn.
Km E7.455 to Km
E7.761

TABLE 5.4
MAJOR ROADS ACROSS THE ALIGNMENT
S. Name of the Road Chainage Position

No. (km) w.r.t.
alignment
1. Dr. N. R. P. Chowk W 3.550 R
2. To Link Road W 3.000 R
3. Subedar Ramji Chowk W 2.617 C
4. Indian Oil Circle W 2.043 C
5. Veera Desai Road W 1.369 L
6. Dada Bhai Road W 1.230 R
7. Ceaser Road W 1.110 L
8. Road W 0.750 R
9. S. V. Road W 0.230 C
10. Andheri Station W 0.009 R
11. O. N. Dass Road E 0.105 C
12. Jamadar Ramesh Chowk E 0.353 C
13. W. E. Highway E 0.875 C
14. Sriniwas road E 2.322 R
15. Church Road E 3.033 L
16. Airport Road E 3.250 R
17. Arya Colony Road E 3.500 L
18. Andheri Kurla Road E 4.557 C
19. Asalpha village Road E 6.382 L
20. Ghatkopar Road E 6.600 C
21. Kadam Road E 6.835 C
22. LBS Marg E 7.460 C
23. J V Road E 7.677 C
L – Left, C – Cross, R – Right
5.2.9 Vertical Alignment
Due to undulating terrain in stretches, the gradient on roads is steep at few

locations with ups and downs at short intervals. The existing road gradients
and average road levels of Western Segment & Eastern Segment are
indicated in Table 5.5 & Table 5.6.

Table 5.5
Existing Road Profile - Eastern Segment
1. M. V. Road Grade (%) Road levels
W 0.230 – E 0.491
I 1.15 RISE 12.33
II E 0.491 – E 0.566 1.41 FALL 15.82
III E 0.566 – E 0.816 LEVEL 15.33
IV E 0.816 – E 0.1416 1.54 RISE 20.15
Mathura Dass Vasanji Road
2.
I E 1.416 – E 1.641 0.20 RISE 24.98
II E 1.641 – E 2.016 2.30 FALL 20.90
III E 2.016 – E 2.866 0.31 FALL 15.25
Andheri – Kurla Road
3.
I E 2.866 – E 3.841 0.21 FALL 12.92
II E 3.841 – E 4.366 0.51 FALL 10.56
Andheri – Ghatkopar Road
4.
I E 4.366 – E 5.091 0.31 RISE 10.37
II E 5.091 – E 5.741 0.82 RISE 14.17
III E 5.741 – E 6.366 2.36 RISE 24.22
IV E 6.366 – E 6.591 3.12 FALL 25.07
V E 6.591 – E 6.966 4.54 RISE 31.17
VI E 6.966 – E 7.216 6.87 FALL 32.21
Hirachand Desai Road
5.
I E 7.216 – E 7.806 2.45 FALL 13.42
Table 5.6
Existing Road Profile - Western Segment
S. Road Levels
Chainage (Km.) Grade (%)
No. (Avg.)
Jai Prakash Road/Versova Road
1.
I W 3.700 – W 3.659 4.91 FALL 7.34
II W 3.659 – W 3.409 1.0 FALL 4.83
III W 3.409 – W 1.809 LEVEL 3.70
IV W 1.809 – W 1.534 0.17 RISE 4.09
V W 1.534 – W 1.184 LEVEL 4.32
VI W 1.184 – W 0.230 0.41 RISE 6.26

Due to these reasons the gradient along the proposed alignment also varies
and at few locations exceeds 2%. At one location i.e. while crossing
Western Express Highway, a gradient of 3.2% is provided.
As mentioned in earlier, the longitudinal section of DP Road needs to

be reviewed to avoid very tall piers for the metro system on Golibar
road up to Ghatkopar Station. The difference between ground level on
approach of Golibar road and road at Ghatkopar station is 26.15 m in a
length of 486 m. If the metro rail level is provided with 6.62 m vertical
clearance over the D P Road near Sarvodaya Hospital, the pier height
just after the Sarvodaya Hospital is about 24 to 25 m and even with
3.77 % down gradient towards Ghatkopar. The rail level at the
Ghatkopar station shall be 28.78 m i.e. about 22 m above road level.
In view of the above it is proposed that the L-section of the D P Road

is reviewed and lower Asalpha hill area to accommodate the metro
alignment.
To avoid very tall piers, L section between Subhash Nagar and Ghatkopar
has been modified so that the tallest pier is about 12 to 13 m high. In this
proposal the alignment passes below the viaduct at D P Road at Chainage
E 7200 / E 7250 (D P Road level may have to be raised by 1 m). However
this required cutting of hill by about 10.5 m. This will require protection work
for D P Road viaduct.
The Vertical profile (gradient list) of Eastern Segment & Western Segment is
given in Table 5.7 & Table 5.8 respectively.
Table 5.7
Vertical Alignment - Eastern Segment

Proposed Rail Level
FROM CHAINAGE TO CHAINAGE GRADE RISE/FALL
W 78.91 E 146.09 0 LEVEL
E 146.09 E 531.09 1 RISE
E 531.09 E 911.09 3.2 RISE
E 911.09 E 1171.09 0 LEVEL
E 1171.09 E 1451.09 -1.5 FALL
E 1451.09 E 1791.09 0.1 RISE
E 1791.09 E 1951.09 -2.8 FALL
E 1951.09 E 2186.09 -1.02 FALL
E 2186.09 E 2386.09 0 LEVEL
E 2386.09 E 2646.09 -2 FALL

E 2646.09 E 2906.09 1.2 RISE
E 2906.09 E 3126.09 0 LEVEL
E 3126.09 E 3346.09 -2.3 FALL
E 3346.09 E 3566.09 1.4 RISE
E 3566.09 E 3801.09 0 LEVEL
E 3801.09 E 4046.09 -1.5 FALL
E 4046.09 E 4426.09 0.3 RISE
E 4426.09 E 4626.09 1.1 RISE
E 4626.09 E 4846.09 0 LEVEL
E 4846.09 E 5006.09 -1.5 FALL
E 5006.09 E 5406.09 1.2 RISE
E 5406.09 E 5746.09 1.5 RISE
E 5746.09 E 5946.09 2.6 RISE
E 5946.09 E 6156.00 0 LEVEL
E 6156.00 E 6720.00 0.5 RISE
E 6720.00 E 6870.00 0 LEVEL
E 6870.00 E 7130.00 -0.5 FALL
E 7130.00 E 7686.09 -3 FALL
E 7686.09 E 7850.00 0 LEVEL
Alternative over DP Road (Not Recommended)
From Chainage To Chainage Grade Rise/Fall

E 5946.09 E 6156.00 0.00 LEVEL
E 6156.00 E 6720.00 1.50 RISE
E 6720.00 E 6870.00 0.00 LEVEL
E 6870.00 E 7130.00 2.30 RISE
E 7130.00 E 7686.09 -3.77 FALL
E 7686.09 E 7850.00 0.00 LEVEL
Table 5.8
Vertical Alignment - Western Segment
FROM CHAINAGE TO CHAINAGE GRADE RISE/FALL

w 3210.00 w 3058.91 0 LEVEL
w 3058.91 w 2778.91 -0.3 FALL
w 2778.91 w 2628.91 -1.7 FALL
w 2628.91 w 2378.91 0.45 RISE
w 2378.91 w 2253.91 1.25 RISE
w 2253.91 w 2028.91 0 LEVEL

w 2028.91 w 1903.91 -2.4 FALL
w 1903.91 w 1753.91 1 RISE
w 1753.91 w 1472.53 0.75 RISE
w 1472.53 w 1228.91 0 LEVEL
w 1228.91 w 1153.91 -0.8 FALL
w 1153.91 w 603.91 0.82 RISE
w 603.91 w 458.91 -0.2 FALL
w 458.91 w 303.91 -1.2 FALL
w 303.91 W 78.91 2 RISE
W 78.91 E 146.09 0 LEVEL
Comparison of difference in Rail Level in two alternatives
Rail level difference from Ground Level

Chainage Recommended L Section Alternative L Section
(below D P road) (above D P road)
E 6046 12.96 12.96
E 6146 10.95 10.95
E 6246 8.65 9.55
E 6346 5.25 7.17
E 6446 4.41 7.31
E 6546 10.53 14.43
E 6646 13.62 18.54
E 6746 9.46 16.24
E 6846 6.06 11.50
E 6946 -3.39 4.23
E 7046 -9.84 0.63
E 7146 -1.12 11.64
E 7246 13.26 25.28
E 7346 12.19 23.45
E 7446 12.61 23.10
E 7546 12.15 21.87
E 7646 13.12 22.08
E 7746 13.15 21.78

5.2.10 Curvature
There are many sharp turns and curves along the roads. This necessitates
provision of curves for metro alignment also to keep the same at the median
of the roads. The radius of curves is kept as low as 100 m to reduce the
property acquisition. About 42.76% of the length of the alignment is on
curves on eastern segment and about 45.68% of the length of the alignment
is on curves on western segment. The details of curves on Eastern segment
& Western segment are given Table 5.9 & Table 5.10 respectively.
TABLE 5.9
DETAILS of CURVES – EASTERN SEGMENT
CHAINAGE
STRAIGHT
TRANSIT CURVE BETWEEN
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 RADIUS
ION LENGTH TWO
CURVES
W 14.48 E 0.52 E 61.83 E 76.83 2000 15 61.31 107.19
E 184.02 E 199.02 E 228.21 E 243.21 2700 15 29.20 151.13
E 394.34 E 409.34 E 472.77 E 487.77 2000 15 63.43 127.93
E 615.71 E 625.71 E 676.01 E 686.01 4000 10 50.31 382.98
E 1069.00 E 1124.00 E 1266.27 E 1321.27 400 55 142.28 59.09
E 1380.37 E 1420.37 E 1563.68 E 1603.68 500 40 143.31 29.64
E 1633.31 E 1663.31 E 1701.35 E 1731.35 750 30 38.04 137.56
E 1868.91 E 1908.91 E 1989.05 E 2029.05 500 40 80.14 128.36
E 2157.41 E 2167.41 E 2203.03 E 2213.03 3500 10 35.62 59.50
E 2272.53 E 2287.53 E 2354.72 E 2369.72 2500 15 67.19 174.64
E 2544.35 E 2559.35 E 2584.80 E 2599.80 2000 15 25.44 166.04
E 2765.84 E 2795.84 E 2828.45 E 2858.45 800 30 32.61 381.76
E 3240.21 E 3250.21 E 3278.00 E 3288.00 3000 10 27.78 442.58
E 3730.57 E 3785.57 E 3816.65 E 3871.65 270 55 31.07 73.53
E 3945.17 E 4000.17 E 4195.99 E 4251.00 300 55 195.82 78.33
E 4329.33 E 4339.33 E 4371.51 E 4381.51 4000 10 32.18 86.23
E 4467.74 E 4522.74 E 4557.16 E 4612.16 250 55 34.42 62.45
E 4674.61 E 4699.61 E 4798.02 E 4823.02 1000 25 98.41 66.58
E 4889.60 E 4919.60 E 4950.25 E 4980.25 800 30 30.65 74.54
E 5054.79 E 5109.79 E 5148.77 E 5203.77 300 55 38.98 252.78
E 5456.55 E 5511.55 E 5637.27 E 5692.27 400 55 125.73 355.55
E 6047.82 E 6062.82 E 6107.79 E 6122.79 2500 15 44.97 149.78
E 6272.57 E 6327.57 E 6362.10 E 6417.10 252 55 34.53 NIL
E 6417.10 E 6472.13 E 6501.32 E 6556.32 185 55 29.19 NIL
E 6556.32 E 6596.37 E 6622.20 E 6662.20 706 40 25.83 273.20
E 6935.40 E 6990.40 E 7023.66 E 7078.66 225 55 33.26 103.15
E 7181.81 E 7236.81 E 7348.10 E 7403.10 100 55 111.29 78.14

E 7481.24 E 7501.24 E 7545.75 E 7565.75 1500 20 44.51 193.78
E 7759.53 E 7769.53 E 7803.09 E 7813.09 5500 10 33.56 440.24
E 8253.33 EASTERN END
TABLE 5.10
DETAILS of CURVES – WESTERN SEGMENT
CHAINAGE
STRAIGHT
TRANSIT CURVE BETWEEN
TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 RADIUS
ION LENGTH TWO
CURVES
W 3733.66 WESTERN END
W 3584.54 W 3549.54 W 3518.85 W 3483.85 650 35 30.69 38.54
W 3445.32 W 3420.32 W 3385.25 W 3360.25 1168 25 35.07 NIL
W 3360.24 W 3305.24 W 3249.59 W 3194.59 150 55 55.66 68.02
W 3126.56 W 3101.56 W 3045.18 W 3020.18 1100 25 56.39 NIL
W 3020.16 W 2990.16 W 2955.89 W 2925.89 898 30 34.28 1067.60
W 1858.28 W 1848.28 W 1818.43 W 1808.43 7000 10 29.85 115.50
W 1692.92 W 1637.92 W 1595.79 W 1540.79 457 55 42.13 NIL
W 1540.78 W 1485.78 W 1459.26 W 1404.26 425 55 26.53 25.07
W 1379.18 W 1369.18 W 1329.96 W 1319.96 3000 10 39.22 66.36
W 1253.60 W 1238.60 W 1208.62 W 1193.62 2500 15 29.98 83.17
W 1110.45 W 1055.45 W 858.83 W 803.83 275 55 196.63 NIL
W 803.75 W 748.75 W 714.43 W 659.43 121 55 34.33 83.01
W 576.42 W 546.42 W 521.21 W 491.21 930 30 25.21 65.74
W 425.47 W 395.47 W 364.95 W 334.95 900 30 30.52 79.53
W 255.43 W 245.43 W 211.03 W 201.03 5000 10 34.40 186.55
W 14.48 E 0.52 E 61.83 E 76.83 2000 15 61.31 107.19
5.2.11 Junction station
The Proposed corridor Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar and the another

Phase – I corridor Colaba – Bandra – Charkop ( North - South) along the
link road (Kamalakar Pant Valakar Marg) cross each other in elevation at
the junction of JP road & Link road near D.N.Nagar. The North – South
corridor will be crossing the East – West corridor in double elevation. As
construction of a combined multilevel station involves acquisition of large
number of properties, it is proposed to stagger the two stations and
providing common concourse.

5.2.12 Stabling yard layout
Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor does not have any stabling facility
at its east end. A maintenance depot offering facilities for minor repairs,
stabling and rake interchange between the two corridors has been planned
North-West of the proposed D.N.Nagar metro station, which has direct
approach from the J.P.road.

Chapter 5 – Civil Engineering
5.3 STATION PLANNING
5.3.1 GENERAL
Stations on the Line
The proposed Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar MRTS corridor runs eastwards
from Versova to Ghatkopar via D N Nagar, Azad Nagar, Andheri, WEH,
Chakala, Airport Road, Marol Naka, Saki Naka, Subhash Nagar, and Asalpha
covering a distance of approximately 11-kms from centre of Versova station to
Ghatkopar Station.
A total of 12 stations have been planned along the proposed Corridor.

Beginning from Versova, all stations are proposed to be elevated. Average
inter-station distance is one km, though it varies from 0.645-km to 1.35-km due
to landuse and topographic reasons. (Refer Figure 5.3.1).
r Station locations
Station location criteria
Land related issues
• Suitability from point of view of traffic integration is a main criterion for fixing
station locations. Stations have been located in such away as to be near
established traffic interchange nodes so that they fit in the existing transport
network and provide seamless intermodal transfer
• Adequate width of road (in case of station being in the middle of road, elevated
or underground)
• Availability of land for locating entry exit structures Parking and Dispersal
facilities, DG set, Fire tank.
• Stations are located in a way minimize property acquisition
Alignment related issues
• Inter station distance to about 1 km
• Stations are not located on gradients, and are always to be on horizontal
alignment.
• Alignment should be straight to the extent possible. In case the station must be
located on curves due to other pressing demands, the curve should not be
sharper than 1000 m radius.
Structural constraints
• Although stations are preferred to be close to road intersection, the effort is to
locate them not over the intersection so that the station structure does not
hamper the traffic flow.
Construction issues
• Possibility of creating traffic diversions during construction period

Final Report Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar Corridor
Goregaon
Versova
D N Nagar
Versova Azad Nagar

Dead End
Andheri
WEH
Chakala
Airport Road
Marol Naka
Saki Naka
Subhash Nagar
Asalpha
Arabian Sea
Ghatkopar
Santa Cruz
Bandra
Figure 5.3.1 VERSOVA – ANDHERI - GHATKOPAR MRTS CORRIDOR

Other considerations
• Urban Design Impact (including to adjoining properties)
• A distinctive corporate image
• Provision of potential links to parking facilities
• Provision of potential links to adjoining properties and footbridges
• Safeguards to pedestrians and adjoining properties from noise and air
pollution
• Traffic safety on the roads
• No decrease in pedestrian utility at footpath level
Rail Levels and Alignment

Proposed elevated alignment traverses about 11.07-kms in length. The
general rail level is approximately 12-m above road and is governed by a
ground clearance of 5.50-m. This in turn determines the level of the entire
station structure on the elevated section. In order to keep the land acquisition
to minimum, alignment is planned generally in middle of the road and a two-
level elevated station design has been proposed. Entry/exit structures to the
proposed stations have been planned in the space available within the right of
way as proposed by Mumbai Metropolitan Region Development Authority
(MMRDA) in its development plan. Wherever necessary, roads are aligned to
match the alignment of rail tracks of proposed MRTS to place the viaduct on
median of the road.
Platforms
All the elevated stations have been planned along side platforms. Care has
been taken to locate stations on straight alignment only. However, in some
stations, site constraints have become the deciding criteria and a curve of
1000-m radius has been introduced.
The sequence of stations along with their respective chainages, site and
platform characteristics are presented in the Table 5.3.1.
Table 5.3.1 STATION LOCATION CHARACTERISTICS
Name of Chainage Distance Rail Height from Platform Alignment

Station (in km) from Level Adjacent Type and Description
W – West Previous (RL in m) Ground (in Nos
E - East Station (in m)
km)
Versova W3.139 16.44 13.00 Side Straight
Platforms,
2 Nos.
D N Nagar W2.139 1.00 15.60 12.07 Side Straight
Platforms,
2 Nos.
Azad W1.344 0.80 16.11 12.15 Side Partly on
Nagar Platforms, 1000 m
2 Nos. curve

Andheri 0.000 1.34 22.45 12.64 Side Straight

Platforms,
2 Nos.
WEH E0.995 1.00 38.46 21.49 Side Straight
Platforms,
2 Nos.
Chakala E2.279 1.28 27.84 12.77 Side Straight
Platforms,
2 Nos.
Airport E3.014 0.74 25.58 13.63 Side Straight
Road Platforms,
2 Nos.
Marol E3.660 0.65 23.36 11.96 Side Straight
Naka Platforms,
2 Nos.
Saki Naka E4.696 1.04 22.88 11.83 Side Partly on
Platforms, 1000-m
2 Nos. curve
Subhash E6.046 1.35 35.30 12.96 Side Straight
Nagar Platforms,
2 Nos.
Asalpha E6.788 0.74 38.12 8.28 Side Off the
Road Platforms, road,
2 Nos. Straight
Ghatkopar E7.786 1.00 20.14 13.94 Side Straight
Platforms,
2 Nos.
5.3.2 STATION LOCATIONS

5.3.2.1 VERSOVA STATION (Chainage W 3.139)
The station is located in Seven Bungalow area of Versova, near the BEST bus
terminal. Station center is in front of compound wall of Eversweet Apartments
and Balkrishna Cooperative Housing Society building. Existing road and
setbacks in the properties are not wide enough to accommodate the stations
and entry/exit stairs. The alignment has therefore been pushed away from
seaside towards bus terminal to the extent that the station building edge is at
least 15 m away from the buildings in compounds of the affected properties.
Road under the station is proposed to be realigned to match the alignment of
rail tracks. Entry / exit stairs are provided on both side of the road. These are
also integrated with the interchange facility i.e. private vehicles parking on bus
terminal side of station. (Refer fig 5.3.2)
Catchment of station would largely be the dense residential area around the
station and would extend to Sanjeev Enclave, Ratan Nagar, Avinash
Apartments, BOM mazdock Apartments and Mudran Press Colony. The
station may also cater to areas upto Sunder Wadi and Joseph Patel Wadi.
(Refer fig 5.3.3)

Figure 5.3.2: Site Conditions- Versova
Bus terminal in Seven Bungalows View of the catchment Narrow right of way
area available at station
location
Figure 5.3.3: Proposed Versova Station Area Development Plan
Forest
Seven
Avinash Bungalows
Apartments Bus Depot
PAR KIN
G
Mudran
Press Colony
BOM
Mazdock
Apartments
Ratan Nagar
5.3.2.2 D N NAGAR STATION (Chainage W 2.139)
DN Nagar would serve as interchange between the Colaba-Bandra-Charkop

corridor and the Versova -Andheri-Ghatkopar corridor with the former going
over the later. The two corridors cross over at Indian oil Nagar Intersection.
However the interchange between the two has not been planned right at the
intersection due to paucity of space at road intersection and a dense built up
area around the intersection. Instead an L shaped configuration has been
adopted for the interchange station. Common concourse for the two lines has
been planned and is located in the open land available on the north west of the
intersection, opposite Indian Oil Nagar residential area. (Refer fig 5.3.4)

Figure 5.3.4: Site Conditions- DN Nagar
View of the Jay Prakash Road-Andheri Link Road Intersection at Indian Oil Open space on the
Nagar north west of the
intersection
The station would act as interchange station between the two proposed East
West and North South MRTS corridors. Station would cater to DN Nagar,
Indian Oil Nagar, New LIC Colony, Madhuban Colony and MHADA Colony
Phase I. Catchment area of the station may extend to Shanti Nagar and
Bahadurgarh Colony. (Refer fig 5.3.5)
Figure 5.3.5: Proposed D N Nagar Station Area Development Plan
Proposed Interchange
station along North South
corridor
PARKING
AR
NAGV
TO SHI
INDIAN OIL CIRCLE

GURU TEG BAHADUR
SAHEB CHOWK

5.3.2.3 AZAD NAGAR STATION (CHAINAGE W 1.344)

Azad Nagar station is located near Andheri Sports Club, in the middle of the
road with centerline in front of Garden Court Restaurant. Alignment is straight
and platforms are about 13m above road level. Previous DN Nagar station is
at a distance of 811-m from the proposed station.
Adequate right of way is available at the station location for passage of three
traffic lanes under the station structure and locating the station columns by the
roadside. Land acquisition would be required for locating the entry/ exit stairs,
in the compound of Andheri Sports Club on north of alignment and in the
compound of Cheval Class Apartments on the south of the alignment. (Refer
fig 5.3.6)
Commuters from Azad Nagar area, MHADA Colony Phase II & III, DHAKE
Colony, Tepgaon and Dattaguru Nagar would use the station. Catchment of
the station may extend to Munshi Nagar, Amboli, Mahalaxmi Colony and
Andheri Industrial Area. (Refer fig 5.3.7)
Figure 5.3.6: Site Conditions- Azad Nagar
View of Jay Prakash Road Corner of Andheri

Sports Club
Figure 5.3.7: Proposed Azad Nagar Station Area Development Plan
DHAKE
Colony
Andheri
Sports Parking
Club
Parking
Munshi
Nagar

5.3.2.4 ANDHERI STATION (Chainage 0.0)

The station is in Andheri East near the Andheri station of Western Railway. Station
centerline passes through open land on the north of alignment by the side of New
Nagardas Road. This is an elevated station and side platforms are approximately
13.0 m above the ground. The station is 1240 – m from the previous Azad Nagar
station.
Road under the station is proposed to be widened as proposed by MMRDA in its
Development Plan and realigned to match the alignment of the rail tracks and the
station structure. Three lanes on each direction have been planned within the right of
way. Entry / exit stairs are provided on both side of the road beside the station
structure. Northern Entry/Exit structures are linked to existing Foot Over Bridge on
Western Railway main line at concourse level. Southern Entry/Exit Structures have
been provided on New Nagardas Road near Police station above the intersection.
(Refer fig 5.3.8)
Major traffic at this station comprises the interchange passengers arriving at the WR
station by suburban trains and going towards Versova/ Ghatkopar. Park & Ride
facility for passengers has been planned on the open land below the concourse
structure. Catchment of station would largely be the dense residential area around
the station at Andheri East & West Side and would extend to Bima Nagar, Vijay
Nagar, Part of Vile Parle West & Azad Nagar, and Natwar Nagar. The station may
also cater to passengers coming from Swami Vivekanand Road. (Refer fig 5.3.9)
Figure 5.3.8: Site Conditions - Andheri
Suburban station in Andheri View of Existing Foot over bridge at station

location
Figure 5.3.9: Proposed Andheri Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.5 WEH STATION (Chainage E 0.995)

WEH Station is located close to Western Express Highway and Andheri Kurla Road
intersection. The station is doubly elevated due to existing WEH Flyover at the
intersection. Centerline of station is passing through HP Petrol Pump on north of the
alignment. The station is 996-m from the previous Andheri station. Side platforms
are approximately 13.00 – m above the ground.
Entry/Exit Structures on both sides have been planned besides the Andheri Kurla
Road with proposed right of way of 36.60 m in Development Plan by MMRDA.
Provision of 3 lanes for each direction has been made under the station structure.
Northern entry/exit structure of station has been planned on the space between
Landmark Shopping Centre and HP Petrol Pump whereas southern stairs are
located in front of Maharaja Bar & Restaurant. (Refer fig 5.3.10)
The station would cater to residential areas in and around Satyadarshan Colony,
Govind Wadi, part of Bima Nagar, part of Azad Nagar and catchment may extend to
MHADA Colony in Jogeswari East, Air India Colony, and part of Paranjape Nagar.
(Refer fig 5.3.11)
Figure 5.3.10: Site Conditions- WEH
View of existing Flyover on Western Express View of the catchment Space available at
Highway area station location in
front of Petrol Pump
Figure 5.3.11: Proposed WEH Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.6 CHAKALA STATION (Chainage E 2.279)

Elevated Chakala station is located near Guru Nanak Chowk, the intersection of
Andheri Ghatkopar Link Road and Andheri Kurla Road. Centerline of station passes
through RPJ Tower on the southern side of alignment. The station is 1283–m from
the previous WEH station. Side platforms are approximately 13.00 – m above the
ground level.
Entry/exit structures on both sides have been planned on footpaths along the Andheri
Kurla Road with proposed MMRDA right of way of 36.60 m. Provision of 3 lanes for
each direction traffic has been made. Northern access of the station has been
planned in front of Kohinoor Continental whereas southern stairs are located on the
footpaths along the Sriniwas Road. (Refer fig 5.3.12)
Catchment of the station would extend to JB Nagar, part of Sahar and Air India
Colony. The station would also cater to areas upto Paranjape Nagar, Vile Parle East,
Jogeshwari East, SEEPZ and MIDC area. (Refer fig 5.3.13)
Figure 5.3.12: Site Conditions- Chakala
Wide right of way available at station location Station Location View of the
besides the Andheri catchment area
Kurla Road
Figure 5.3.13: Proposed Chakala Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.7 AIRPORT ROAD STATION (Chainage E 3.014)

Airport Road station is an elevated station on the proposed East West corridor and
located on the central verge along Andheri Kurla Road and is closely planned close
to the Airport Road intersection in front of Hotel Leela. Centerline of the station lies
besides Church Road and is passing through Petrol Pump on the south of the
alignment. The station is 735-m from the previous Chakala station. Side platforms are
approximately 13.00 – m above the ground.
Entry/exit structures have been planned on the footpaths on both sides along the AK
Road such that 3 lanes for each direction traffic are available. Northern Entry/Exit
structures of the station have been planned near Leela Business Park whereas
southern structures are located in front of Petrol Pump. (Refer fig 5.3.14)
The station would cater to residential area around the Ashok Nagar, Greater Indira
Nagar, Sai Freepark Colony, part of J B Nagar, Kanti Nagar and commercial areas
along the Andheri Kurla Road. Catchment of the station would extend to P&T Colony,
CPWD Colony, Santacruz, and Sahar. (Refer fig 5.3.15)
Figure 5.3.14: Site Conditions- Airport Road
Intersection of Airport Available space at station location along View of the

Road with AK Road Andheri Kurla Road catchment area
Figure 5.3.15: Proposed Airport Road Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.8 MAROL NAKA STATION (Chainage E 3.660)

Marol Naka Station is located on the central verge of Andheri Kurla Road near Arya
Colony Road intersection. Centerline of the station is passing through Everest
Chamber on north of the alignment. Side platforms are approximately 13.00 – m
above the ground level.The station is 646-m from the previous Airport Road station.
Side entry/exit structures have been planned along the Andheri Kurla Road with
proposed ROW of 45.70- m. Northern Entry/Exit structures of the station have been
planned on the footpath between in front of Everest Chamber whereas southern
structures are located in front of Elecon Arcade. (Refer fig 5.3.16)
The Station would cater to Navpada, Chimatpada, Ganesh Nagar and Yadav Nagar.
Catchment area of station would extend to Chandivali and Arya Colony to the north of
alignment whereas part of Jharimari on the south of the alignment. (Refer fig 5.3.17)
Figure 5.3.16: Site Conditions- Marol Naka
Space available besides the right of way at station location View of the catchment
area
Figure 5.3.17: Proposed Marol Naka Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.9 SAKI NAKA STATION (Chainage E 4.696)

Saki Naka station is located on the central verge of Andheri Kurla Road near D
Samant Chowk (Saki Naka) intersection. Station centerline passes through Udipi
Restaurant on the south of alignment besides the Cross Road to Jaganath Temple.
This is an elevated station and side platforms are approximately 13.0 m above the
ground level. The station is 1036-m from the previous Marol Naka station.
Road under the station is proposed to be widened to 45.70-m ROW. Three lanes on
each direction have been planned within the ROW under the station structure. Entry /
exit stairs are provided on footpaths on both side of the road beside the station
structure. Northern Entry/Exit structures are located in front of Blue Star House
whereas southern entry/exit structures have been provided on open space near
Cross Road to Jaganath Temple. (Refer fig 5.3.18)
Catchment of the station would largely extend to Nairwadi, Sag Baug and part of
Candivali, Saki Vihar. The station may also cater to areas upto Hiranandani Garden
from Powai Lake side on the north of the alignment and part of Jharimari on the south
of the alignment. (Refer fig 5.3.19)
Figure 5.3.18: Site Conditions- Saki Naka
View of busy Saki Naka (Datta Samant Chowk) View of the Wide right of way
catchment area available at station
location
Figure 5.3.19: Proposed Saki Naka Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.10 SUBHASH NAGAR STATION (Chainage E 6.046)

Subhash Nagar Station is an elevated station and located on the central verge along
Andheri Ghatkopar Road. Centerline of the station lies besides Amol Super market
building on the south of the alignment. The station is 1350-m from the previous Saki
Naka station. Side platforms are approximately 13.00 – m above the ground.
Side entry/exit structures have been planned on the footpaths on both sides along the
Andheri Ghatkopar Road such that 3 lanes for each direction traffic would be
available below the station structure. Northern entry/exit structures of the station have
been planned on the footpath near Shree Ganesh Trading Company whereas
southern structures are located in front of Amol Super Market. (Refer fig 5.3.20)
Commuters from Mohili, part of Nairwadi and Jharimari are likely to use this station,
whose catchment may extend to part of Vidya Vihar, Lokmanya Tilak Nagar and
Milind Nagar as well. (Refer fig 5.3.21)
Figure 5.3.20: Site Conditions- Subhash Nagar
View of the available space at station location along Andheri Ghatkopar Road
Figure 5.3.21: Proposed Subhash Nagar Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.11 ASALPHA ROAD STATION (Chainage E 6.788)

Asalpha Road station is an elevated station and located in the existing depression of
the hillock beside the Kadam road. Proposed Andheri Ghatkopar Road passes
through the hillock and station is proposed to be located off the road. Centerline of
station would pass through the Jagruti Nagar settlement.
Andheri Ghatkopar Road under the station is going to be of 45.70-m right of way as
per Development Plan. Three lanes on each direction have been planned under the
station structure. Entry / exit stairs are provided in footpaths on both side of road
besides the station structure. (Refer fig 5.3.22)
Catchment area for this station is Barve Nagar, Jagruti Nagar, Buddha Vihar and
would stretch to Damodar Park, Amrut Nagar. Commuters from part of Jharimari and
Park site Colony are also potential users of this station. (Refer fig 5.3.23)
Figure 5.3.22: Site Conditions- Asalpha
Proposed Link to Station Location near View of the Village settlement

Andheri Ghatkopar the Village Asalpha catchment area existing at station
Road location
Figure 5.3.23: Proposed Asalpha Station Area Development Plan

5.3.2.12 GHATKOPAR STATION (Chainage E 7.786)

Ghatkopar station is last station on the proposed East West Corridor and located
near the Ghatkopar suburban railway station on Hirachand Desai road. This is an
elevated station on the central verge of the road. Centerline of station is passing
through the Ashok Bar & Restaurant on north of the alignment. Side platforms are
approximately 13.00-m above the ground level. The interstation distance is 1007-m
between the previous Asalpha Road and Ghatkopar station.
Road under the station would be of 18.30-m right of way as proposed by MMRDA in
its Development Plan. Two lanes on each direction would be available below the
station structure. Northern Entry/Exit structures are linked to existing Foot Over
Bridge on Central Railway main line at concourse level. Another northern entry/exit is
planned near Hotel Sai on JV Road intersection. Southern Entry/Exit structure has
been provided on the space where land would be acquired from existing Narayan
Building. Park and Ride facility for passengers has been planned on the land besides
the concourse entry structures. (Refer fig 5.3.24)
Major traffic to this station comprises the passengers arriving through suburban trains
on Central Railway main line and going towards Andheri. The station would cater to
the Vidya Vihar, Rajawadi, MG Road Pant Nagar and CGS Colony. Railway Police
Colony, Tilak Nagar, P Sagar Colony, Garodia Nagar and Ramabai Ambedkar Nagar
would also fall within the catchment of this station. (Refer fig 5.3.25)
Figure 5.3.24: Site Conditions- Ghatkopar
View ofHirachand View overlooking the GhatKopar Suburban View of the catchment
Desai Road Railway Station area
Figure 5.3.25: Proposed Ghatkopar Station Area Development Plan

MARKE
.56
SH
SHOP
SAI PA
S.W. DRA
SHOP
30.9
.4
SWE
PLOT
HOUSE
RAJ WATCH
30
TIKETS
BAR
URNA
T.P.
OSHO
OPEN
STORE
HAI LANE
D NO
SHOPS
L.P.
ANNAP
DESHI
NITTANAND
ICIPAL
BABA
LALIT STEEL
HOTEL
OP
YASH WINES
SH
AR MUN
R OA
ASE
RAILWA
STAIRC
Y FOB
NAG
JETHAB
5
.03
31.680
30
SHOPS
PANT
0
.40
31
5
5
.54
.75
ASE
31
30
0
.65
STAIRC
0
.42
L
30
MANDA
31
ASE
WAN
STAIRC
ASE
NAV-JA
MITRA
L.P.
STAIRC
DISPENSAR
I
UP
SHOP
UP
UP
I SADAN
T.P.
EL
(G+2)
DR. DAMAN
AD
T HOT
J.V. RO
U.G. DRAIN
IKAN
LAXM
F.P.
F.H.
L.P.
SHOP
RAIGADH CHOWK
SHOP
29.690
URINAL
TAPE
RS
WATER
TRADE
D.P.
L.P.
LE
SWAMI
MP
TE
STALL
AN
STALL
SHOP
M
NU
HA
5
.69
SHOP
R
31
Y
PARLO
BEAUT
ROSHITA BUITY
PARLOR
SHOP
STALL
SHOP SHOP
SHOP
SHOP SHOP
L.P.
0
0
.67
.84
0
31
.99
30
0
30
.69
SHOP
5
SHOP
.80
5
31
.83
30
30
0
.75
SHOP
31
SHOP
ES
SHOP
DRESS
N MART
DRA
STD BOOTH
SH
RIC
OP
MAHEN
R.K. HAIR
ELECT
SH
NICON
SHOP
FARSA
OP
SH
S
OP
AXMI
OM SPORT
DP
D.P.
SH
SHOP
SHOP
AR
MAHAL
OP
SHOP
BHAND
SHOP
SAI VIDEO
S.B.
MTNL
D
NASTA
STALL
SHOP
T.P.
BOX
BUS STOP
SHOP
SHOPS
OA
SHOPS
31.160
POST
SHOPS
PATEL CHOWK
D.P.
PROPOS
.R
AD
RO
ED 12m
S.B.
EET
TE
31.585
AL
RE
WIDE FOB NC
MEDIC
AMARJ
SHOP
CO
T.P.
J. V
(Railwa
SHOP
L.P.
MILK CTR.
S.B.
ys)
SHOP
D.P.
S.W.DRAIN
E
TEMPL
BUS STOP
SHOPS
M.H.
PLINTH
LIME
FOOD
FAST
F.H.
HSG.
ATTA
DEPT.
TY
S.W. DRAIN
CO. OP.
GURUD
SOCIE
(G+8)
SHOPS
M.H.
BLDG.
(G+2)
31.84 5
L.P.
SG
D.P.
STALL
S.W. DRAIN
BLDG.
(G+3)
G.P.
F.H.
M.H.
32.790
M.H.
LOCK
ALAY
D.P.
5
BLDG.
5
HRI
.91
.36
H SOUCH
L.P.
STALL
31
30
(G+2)
DHANS
N
CHANDRA
S.W.DRAI
(G+3)
HI VILA
5
.78
LANE
IN
31
S.W.DRA
SULAB
M.H.
(G+5)
MALAT
(G+2)
ONAR
M.H.
L.P.
JETHABHAI
LANE
I BLDG.
(G+2)
BUS STOP
0
(G+2)
BLDG.
.71
TRIVED
0
.70
5
.79
30
31
31
D.P.
GAR
(G+3)
KHOKHANI
SHIVSA
HOTEL
L.P.
A
M.H.
MEGH
TEMP.
(G+2)
STR.
BUS STOP
L.P.
BLDG.
(G+1)
APT.
D.P.
S.W. DRAIN
5
RAMBHA
.93
31
KY
CHOW
B.STOP
0
RAILWAY
.73
POLICE
30
FOB

5.3.3 STATION PLANNING

5.3.3.1Planning and Design Criteria for Stations
Salient features of a typical station are as follows:
1. The station can be divided into public and non-public areas (those areas
where access is restricted). The public areas can be further subdivided into
paid and unpaid areas.
2. The platform level has adequate assembly space for passengers for both
normal operating conditions and a recognized emergency scenario e.g.
missed head ways, train delays & accidents.
3. The platform level at elevated stations is determined by a critical clearance
of 5.50-m under the concourse above the road intersection, allowing 3.00-
m for the concourse height, about 1-m for concourse floor and 2.00-m for
structure of tracks above the concourse. Further, the platforms are 1.09-m
above the tracks. This would make the platforms in an elevated situation at
least 12.50-m above ground.
4. The concourse contains automatic fare collection system in a manner that
divides the concourse into distinct areas. The 'unpaid area' is where
passengers gain access to the system, obtain travel information and
purchase tickets. On passing through the ticket gates, the passenger
enters the 'paid area’, which includes access to the platforms.
5. The arrangement of the concourse is assessed on a station-by-station
basis and is determined by site constraints and passenger access
requirements. However, it is planned in such a way that maximum
surveillance can be achieved by the ticket hall supervisor over ticket
machines, automatic fare collection (AFC) gates, stairs and escalators.
Ticket machines and AFC gates are positioned to minimise cross flows of
passengers and provide adequate circulation space.
6. Sufficient space for queuing and passenger flow has been allowed at the
ticketing gates.
7. Station entrances are located with particular reference to passenger
catchment points and physical site constraints within the right-of-way
allocated to the MRTS.
8. Office accommodation, operational areas and plant room space is required
in the non-public areas at each station. The list of such areas are given
below in Table 5.3.2.
Table 5.3.2
STATION ACCOMMODATION
1. Station Control Room 12. Security Room
2. Station Master’s Office 13.First Aid Room
3. Information & Enquiries 14.Miscellaneous Operations Room
4. Ticket Office 15.Platform Supervisor’s Booth
5. Ticket Hall Supervisor & Excess 16.Signaling Room
Fare Collection (Passenger Office)
6. Cash and Ticket Room 17.Communications Room
7. Staff Area 18.Station Substation
8. Staff Toilets 19.Fire Tank and Pump Room
9. Station Store Room 20.Commercial Outlets and Kiosks
10. Refuse Store 21.UPS and Battery Room
11. Cleaner’s Room

10. The DG set, bore well pump houses, ground tank for fire fighting and pump
houses would be located in one area on ground.
11. The system is being designed to inimize its attraction to potential
passengers and the following criteria have been observed:
• Minimum distance of travel to and from the platform and between
platforms for transfer between lines.
• Adequate capacity for passenger movements.
• Convenience, including good signage relating to circulation and
orientation.
• Safety and security, including a high level of protection against
accidents.
12. Following requirements have been taken into account:

• Minimum capital cost is incurred consistent with inimize g passenger
attraction.
• Minimum operating costs are incurred consistent with maintaining
efficiency and the safety of passengers.
• Flexibility of operation including the ability to adapt to different traffic
conditions changes in fare collection methods and provision for the
continuity of operation during any extended maintenance or repair
period, etc.
• Provision of good visibility of platforms, fare collection zones and other
areas, thus aiding the supervision of operations and monitoring of
efficiency and safety.
• Provision of display of passenger information and advertising.
13. The numbers and sizes of staircases/escalators are determined by
checking the capacity against AM and PM peak flow rates for both normal
and emergency conditions.
14. In order to transfer passengers efficiently from street to platforms and vice
versa, station planning has been based on established principles of
pedestrian flow and arranged to inimize unnecessary walking distances
and cross-flows between incoming and outgoing passengers.
15. Passenger handling facilities comprise of stairs/escalators, lifts and ticket
gates required to process the peak traffic from street to platform and vice-
versa (these facilities must also enable evacuation of the station under
emergency conditions, within a set safe time limit).
5.3.3.2 Typical Elevated Station- (Refer Drg. No. 5.3.26) The station is
generally located on the road median. Total length of the station is ~135-m. All
the stations are two-level stations. The concourse is concentrated in a width of
about 90-m in the middle of the station, with staircases leading from either side
of the road. Passenger facilities like ticketing, information, etc as well as
operational areas are provided at the concourse level. Typically, the concourse
is divided into public and non-public zones. The non-public zone or the
restricted zone contains station operational areas such as Station Control
Room, Station Master’s Office, Waiting Room, Meeting Room, UPS & Battery
Room, Signalling Room, Train Crew Room & Supervisor’s Office, Security
Room, Station Store Room, Staff Toilets, etc. The public zone is further
divided into paid and unpaid areas.

Since the station is generally in the middle of the road, minimum vertical
clearance of 5.5-m has been provided under the concourse. Concourse floor
level about 6.5-m above the road. Consequently, platforms are at a level of
about 12.5-m from the road. To reduce physical and visual impact of the
elevated station, stations have been made narrow towards the ends.
With respect to its spatial quality, an elevated MRT structure makes a great
impact on the viewer as compared to an At-grade station. The positive
dimension of this impact has been accentuated to enhance the acceptability of
an elevated station and the above ground section of tracks. Structures that
afford maximum transparency and are light looking have been envisaged. A
slim and ultra-modern concrete form is proposed, as they would look both
compatible and modern high-rise environment as well as the lesser-built, low-
rise developments along some parts of the corridor.
Platform roofs that can invariably make a structure look heavy; have been
proposed to be of steel frame with aluminium cladding to achieve a light look.
Platforms would be protected from the elements by providing an overhang of
the roof. In order to allow unhindered traffic movement below the stations,
portals across the road have been proposed in the concourse part, over which
the station structure would rest. The rest of the station structure is supported
on a single column, which lies unobtrusively on the central verge.
5.3.3.3 Passenger Amenities-Passenger amenities such as ticketing

counters/automatic ticket vending machines, ticketing gate, etc. are provided
in the concourse. Sufficient numbers of these facilities have been provided for
system wide uniformity, although the requirement of the facilities actually
varies from station to station. The same applies to provision of platform widths
and staircase/escalators. Maximum capacity required at any station by the
year 2021 for normal operation has been adopted for all stations. For this
purpose, peak minute traffic is assumed to be 2% of the peak hour traffic.
5.3.3.4 Concourse-Concourse forms the interface between street and

platforms. In elevated stations, this is contained in a length of about 90-m in
the middle of the station. This is where all the passenger amenities are
provided. The concourse contains automatic fare collection system in a
manner that divides the concourse into distinct paid and unpaid areas. The
'unpaid area' is where passengers gain access to the system, obtain travel
information and purchase tickets. On passing through the ticket gates, the
passenger enters the 'paid area’, which includes access to the platforms. The
concourse is planned in such a way that maximum surveillance can be
achieved by the ticket hall supervisor over ticket machines, automatic fare
collection (AFC) gates, stairs and escalators. Ticket machines and AFC gates
are positioned to minimise cross flows of passengers and provide adequate
circulation space. Sufficient space for queuing and passenger flow has been
allowed in front of the ticketing gates.
5.3.3.5 Ticketing Gates-Ticketing gates’ requirement has been calculated

taking the gate capacity as 45 persons per minute per gate. Passenger
forecast for the horizon year 2021 has been used to compute the maximum

design capacity. At least two ticketing gates shall be provided at any station
even if the design requirement is satisfied with only one gate. Uniform space
has been provided in all stations where gates can be installed as and when
required.
5.3.3.6 Ticket Counters and Ticket Issuing Machines (TIMs)-It is proposed

to deploy manual ticket issuing in the beginning of the operation of the line. At
a later stage, automatic TIMS would be used for which space provision has
been made in the concourse. At present, ticket counters would be provided,
which would be replaced with TIMS in future. Capacity of manual ticket
vending counters is taken to be 10 passengers per minute and it is assumed
that only 40% of the commuters would purchase tickets at the stations while
performing the journey. The rest are expected to buy season tickets or prepaid
card, etc. Accordingly, the requirement of ticket counters has been calculated
and the same provided for in the plans.
5.3.3.7 Platforms-A uniform platform width of 4.5-m wide excluding staircases

and escalators in the central section is proposed for the elevated stations.
This platform width has been checked for holding capacity of the platform for
worst case scenario (two missed headways) in the design year.
5.3.3.8 Stairs, Escalators and Lifts for Normal and Emergency Operations-
Provision has been made for escalators in the paid area i.e. from concourse to
platforms. On each platform, one escalator has been proposed. In addition,
two staircases with a combined width of 6-m is provided on each Side platform
connecting to the concourse. These stairs and escalator together provide an
escape capacity adequate to evacuate passengers in emergency from
platforms to concourse in 5.5 minutes. While calculating the waiting
passengers on the platform in emergency, 2 missed headways are assumed
and the train arriving is assumed to be carrying peak section load. Lifts have
been provided one each on either platform, to provide access for elderly and
disabled. Since the rise from road to concourse is about 6.5-m, it is proposed
to provide escalators and lifts in addition to stairs for vertical movement of
passengers from street to concourse.
5.3.3.9 Passenger Information Kiosks and Commercial Kiosks-Passenger

Information Kiosks and Commercial Kiosks are provided in the unpaid and
paid areas of the concourse respectively.
5.3.3.10 Summary of passenger amenities required and proposed at stations based

on projected traffic for the year 2021 is given in the Table 5.3.3.

Table 5.3.3
PASSENGER TRAFFIC AND REQUIREMENT OF AMENITIES IN STATIONS
(Projections for Year 2031)
Station Daily Peak Total Ticketing Ticket Stairs Lifts Escalators
Traffic Minute Peak Gates Counters Width Provided Provided At
Boarding Minute (in m) At Each Each
Traffic on Each Station Station
Including Platform G to C to G to C to P
Alighting C P C
1. Versova 5810 6 12 2 1 6.00 1 2 2 2
2. D N Nagar 58470 52 117 3 3 6.00 1 2 2 2
3. Azad 6.00 1 2 2 2
Nagar 184630 207 369 9 9
4. Andheri 287230 329 574 13 14 8.00 1 2 2 2
5. WEH 59930 55 120 3 3 6.00 1 2 2 2
6. Chakala 78040 72 156 4 3 6.00 1 2 2 2
7. Airport 6.00 1 2 2 2
Road 70 0 0 2 1
8. Marol Naka 70900 66 142 4 3 6.00 1 2 2 2
9. Saki naka 61020 52 122 3 3 6.00 1 2 2 2
10. Subhash 6.00 1 2 2 2
Nagar 70 0 0 2 1
11. Asalpha 6.00 1 2 2 2
Road 9550 13 19 2 1
12. Ghatkopar 381850 339 764 17 14 8.00 2 4 2 4
Note: G- ground/ street level, C- concourse level, P- platform level
5.3.4 TRAFFIC INTEGRATION

5.3.4.1 Concept of Traffic Integration-The objective of an integrated transport
system and traffic movement is to offer maximum advantage to commuters
and society from traffic and planning consideration. Various modes of transport
need to be integrated in a way that each mode supplements the other. A large
proportion of MRTS users will come to and depart from various stations by
public, hired and private modes, for which integration facilities need to be
provided at stations to ensure quick and convenient transfers.
In order to ensure that entire MRTS function as an integrated network and

provides efficient service to the commuter, the following steps have been
identified:
• Suitable linkages are proposed so that various corridors of MRTS are
integrated within themselves, with existing rail services and with road
based modes.
• Parking and circulation area requirements are worked out for each station
and are planned on the basis of prevailing norms.
• Facilities needed at various stations are planned in conformity with the type
of linkages planned there.
Traffic and transport integration facilities are provided for two different types of
linkages:

• Feeder links to provide integration between various MRTS corridors and

road based transport modes i.e. public, hired, and private vehicles.
• Walk links to provide access to the pedestrians.
5.3.4.2 Modewise Parking Requirement at Stations- It is recommended to

provide parking areas at stations for PARK & RIDE facilities and for Taxis etc.
A computer model calculates passenger volumes and modal split at stations.
Parking needs for hired as well as personal modes have been calculated in
addition to space requirement for drop and ride facilities. The model assumes
80% -90% of the feeder passenger trips to be walk trips (or interchange with
local trains at Andheri and Ghatkopar) as the influence area of each station is
highly builtup. Of the vehicular feeder trips, about 30% are assumed to be
made by buses and the residual distributed among autos/rickshaws (50%) and
two-wheelers/ cycles (20%). Table 5.3.4 provides summary of station wise
traffic integration pattern.
Table 5.3.4
MODE WISE PARKING/HALTING REQUIREMENT AT STATIONS
Station Name Number of Parking Bays Area required
Bus Ricksha Two Rickshaw Two Total
w/Auto/ Wheeler /Auto/ Wheeler
Taxi /Cycles Taxi /cycles
1. Varsova 1 1 42 6 80 86
2. D N Nagar 1 8 434 48 825 873
3. Azad nagar 2 23 1,380 138 2,621 2,759
4. Andheri 2 19 - 114 - 114
5. WEH 1 8 430 48 818 866
6. Chakala 1 10 560 60 1,063 1,123
7. Airport Road 1 1 1 6 2 8
8. Marol Naka 1 9 508 54 964 1,018
9. Saki naka 1 8 466 48 885 933
10. Subhash
Nagar 1 1 1 6 2 8
11. Asalpha Road 1 2 88 12 168 180
12. Ghatkopar 2 24 - 144 - 144
It is seen from the above table that interchange with buses and IPT modes is
required at all the stations, Park and Ride facility has also been made at all
stations except Andheri and Ghatkopar, where land is acutely short and about
90% of the metro traffic is expected to be generated through interchange with
western and central railway respectively.
5.3.4.3 Approach Adopted in Planning Traffic Integration Facilities-

Integration facilities at MRTS stations include approach roads to the stations,
circulation facilities, pedestrian ways and adequate parking areas for various
modes likely to come to important stations including feeder bus/mini-buses.
Provisions have been made for peak hour demand. Traffic integration facilities
were identified on the basis of location of station and its proximity to other
existing/proposed activity generating or attracting landuses. These facilities
have been provided directly under the stations/adjacent area in the MRTS

corridor. Further, area planning ensures that dispersal of large volumes of

pedestrians is adequately provided for.
5.3.4.4 Operational Integration-Integration at operational level will be required

to synchronise the timings of the MRTS services and the feeder service. For
an efficient interchange, walking and waiting time at these stations will need to
be minimised. Introduction of common ticketing and their availability at
convenient locations will be necessary to ensure forecast patronage of the
system. Last but not the least will be the need for an integrated passenger
information system covering all the modes through the publication of common
route guides, time tables and information boards at terminals and in the train
coaches for providing updated information for users of the system.

5.4 VIADUCT STRUCTURE
5.4.1 Choice of Superstructure
The choice of superstructure has to be made keeping in view the ease of

constructability and the maximum standardization of the formwork for a
wide span ranges.
5.4.2 The following type of superstructures have been considered.
(i) Pre-cast segmental box girder using external unbonded tendon.

(ii) Pre-cast segmental U-Channel superstructure with internal pre-
stressing.
The segmental construction has been chosen mainly due to the following
advantages.
• Segmental construction is an efficient and economical method for a

large range of span lengths and types of structures. Structures with
sharp curves and variable super elevation can be easily
accommodated.
• Segmental construction permits a reduction of construction time as

segments may be manufactured while substructure work proceeds,
and assembled rapidly thereafter.
• Segmental construction protects the environment as only space

required for foundation and sub-station is required at site. The
superstructure is manufactured at a place away from busy areas and
placement of superstructure is done with the system erected from piers
at heights.
• Segments are easy to stack in the casting yard/sticking yard in more

than one layer, thereby saving in requirement of space.
• It is easier to transport smaller segments by road trailers on city roads.
• It is easy to incorporate last minute changes in span configuration if the

site situation so warrants.
• Interference to the traffic during construction is significantly reduced.
• Segmental construction contributes toward aesthetically pleasing

structures and good finishes.

• The overall labour requirement is less than that for conventional

methods.
• Better quality control is possible in the casting yard.
• During construction, the technique shows an exceptionally high record

of safety.
5.4.3 Comparative advantages/disadvantages of the above two types of

superstructures examined are given below:
5.4.3.1Precast Segmental Box Girder using External Unbonded Tendon.
This essentially consists of precast segmental construction with external

prestressing and dry joints and is by far most preferred technique in fast
track projects. In such construction the prestressing is placed outside the
structural concrete (inside the box section) and protected with high density
polyethylene tubes, which are grouted with special wax or cement. The
match cast joints at the interface of two segments are provided with shear
keys as in traditional segmental construction. However, epoxy is
dispensed with because water tight seal at the segment joints is not
required in association with external tendons. The schematic arrangement
is shown at Fig.5.4.1 (enclosed).
The main advantages of dry-jointed externally prestressed precast

segmental construction can be summarized as follows:-
• Simplification of all post-tensioning operations, especially installation of

tendons.
• Reduction in structural concrete thickness as no space is occupied by
the tendons inside the concrete.
• Good corrosion protection due to tendons in polyethylene ducts; the
grout inspection is easier and leaks, if any, can be identified during the
grouting process.
• Simplified segment casting. There is no concern about alignment of
tendons. Increased speed of construction.
• The elimination of the epoxy from the match-cast joints reduces costs
and increases speed of construction further.
• Replacement of tendons in case of distress is possible and can be
done in a safe and convenient manner.
• Facility for inspection and monitoring of tendons during the entire
service life of the structure.

5.4.3.2 Precast Segmental U-Channel Superstructure with Internal

Prestressing.
The single U type of viaduct structure is also a precast segmental

construction with internal prestressing and requires gluing and temporary
prestressing of segments. The match cast joints at the interface of two
segments are also provided with shear keys. The main advantages for
this type of structural configuration of superstructure are:-
1. Built in sound barrier.

2. Built in cable support and system function.
3. Possibility to lower the longitudinal profile by approximately 1m
compared to conventional design.
4. Built in structural elements capable to maintain the trains on the bridge
in case of derailment (a standard barrier design allow this)
5. Built in maintenance and inspection path on either side of the track.
Although, there may be a saving in the construction time for Option 1 by

almost one day but the option 2 is recommended for Mumbai Metro
Project considering the advantages as highlighted above, particularly,
considering the fact that option 2 has an inbuilt features such as top flange
of ‘U’ Channel acts as an evacuation path on either side of the tracks and
also possibility to lower the longitudinal profile of the elevated viaduct. For
option 2 Fig.5.4.2 (enclosed).
5.4.3.3 Construction Methodology
Pre-Cast Construction
For the elevated sections it is recommended to have pre-cast segmental

construction for super structure for the viaduct. For stations also the
superstructure is generally of pre-cast members. The pre-cast
construction will have following advantages:-
• Reduction in construction period due to concurrent working for
substructure and superstructure.
• For segmental, pre-cast element (of generally 3.0m length),
transportation from construction depot to site is easy and economical.
• Minimum inconvenience is caused to the public utilising the road as the
superstructure launching is carried out through launching girder
requiring narrow width of the road.
• As the pre-cast elements are cast on production line in a construction
depot, very good quality can be ensured.
• The method is environment friendly as no concreting work is carried at
site for the superstructure.

5.4.3.4 Casting of Segments
For viaducts segmental pre-cast construction requires a casting yard. The

construction depot will have facilities for casting beds, curing and stacking
area, batching plant with storage facilities for aggregates and cement, site
testing laboratories, reinforcement steel yard and fabrication yard etc. An
area of about 2.5 Hact. To 3 Hact is required for each construction depot.
For casting of segments both long line and short line method can be
adopted. However the long line method is more suitable for spans curved
in plan while short line method is good for straight spans. A high degree of
accuracy is required for setting out the curves on long line method for
which pre calculation of offsets is necessary. Match casting of segments is
required in either method. The cast segments are cured on the bed as well
as in stacking yard. Ends of the segments are to be made rough through
sand blasting so that gluing of segments can be effective.
The cast segment will be transported on trailers and launched in position
through launching girders.
5.4.3.5 Launching Scheme
Launching girder is specially designed for launching of segments. The

suggested launching scheme is designed in such a way that initially the
launching girder is erected on pier head at one end of the work. The
segments are lifted in sequence and when the lifting is over, they are dry
matched while hanging from the launching girder. After dry matching, the
segments are glued with epoxy and pre-stressed from one end. The girder
is lowered on the temporary / permanent bearings after pre-stressing. The
launching girder then moves over the launched span to next span and the
sequences continue. See Fig. 5.4.3 to 5.4.8 (enclosed).
5.4.4 Structural System of Viaduct

5.4.4.1 Superstructure
The superstructure of a large part of the viaduct comprises of simply

supported spans. However at major crossing/over or along existing
bridge, special steel or continuous unit will be provided.
Normally the U-Channel girder having a soffit width of 9.0 m (approx)
accommodates the two tracks situated at 4.0m c/c. The U-Channel
superstructure for almost all the simply supported standard spans will be
constructed by precast prestressed segmental construction with epoxy
bonded joints.
The max spans c/c of piers of standard simply supported spans

constructed by precast segmental construction technique has been
proposed as 25.0m. The usual segments shall be 3.0m in length except
the Diaphragm segments, which shall be 2.0m each. The other standard

spans (c/c of pier) comprises of 28.0m, 31.0m, 22.0m, 19.0m & 16.0m,
which shall be made by removing/adding usual segments of 3.0m each
from the center of the span. Depth of the superstructure is so chosen that
top of flange of U-Channel will be used as a evacuation walkway in an
emergency.
The dimensions of end diaphragm will be finalized based on simply

supported span of 31.0m and the same will be also kept for all simply
supported standard span. The top level of both the end diaphragms of
adjoining spans on the same piers is kept same so that expansion joint
can be installed at top and continuity of profile of end diaphragm on the
same pier can be maintained. The arrangement has been selected from
aesthetic considerations.
The economical span (i.e. with optimum prestressing ratio) will be

designed for the 25m situation.
Standard span up to 25.0m will be provided throughout the viaduct as far

as possible. At crossings, where spans requires to be increased upto
31.0m, simply supported spans will be provided.
For major crossing having spans greater than 40.0m, special units
normally of 3 –span construction or steel girders have been envisaged.
All these continuous units ( in case provided at obligatory location) will be

constructed by cast-in-situ balanced cantilever construction technique.
The top profile of superstructure of continuous unit (for the full length) will
be retained the same as for standard spans so that evacuation walkway
will be available even in continuous units. The increase in depth of U-
channel will be accomplished by thickening the soffit slab (towards
downside). At the end of continuous unit, the profile and thickness of soffit
slab will be done to the extent that it will match with the profile and depth
of end diaphragm of adjoining simply supported spans. The thickness of
soffit slab will be increased smoothly toward penultimate support. In order
to reduce the dead weight of the girder, voids will be also provided in the
thickened soffit slab at bottom. These will be circular near the end of
continuous unit and oblong near the penultimate support.
5.4.4.2 Substructure
The viaduct superstructure will be supported on single cast-in-place RC

pier.
The shape of the pier follows the flow of forces. For the standard spans,
the pier gradually widens at the top to support the bearing under the box
webs.

At this preliminary design stage, the size of pier is found to be limited to

1.6m diameter of circular shape for most of its height so that it occupies
the minimum space at ground level where the alignment often follows the
central verge of existing roads.
To prevent the direct collision of vehicle to pier, a Jersey Shaped crash

barrier of 1.0m height above existing road level has been provided all
around the pier. A gap of 25mm has been also provided in between the
crash barrier and outer face of pier. The shape of upper part of pier has
been so dimensioned that a required clearance of 5.5m is always
available on road side beyond vertical plane drawn on outer face of crash
barrier. In such a situation, the minimum height of rail above the existing
road is 8.4m.
The longitudinal center to center spacing of elastomeric/pot bearing over a

pier would be about 1.8m. The space between the elastomeric bearings
will be utilized for placing the lifting jack required for the replacement of
elastomeric bearing. An outward slope of 1:200 will be provided at pier
top for the drainage due to spilling of rainwater , if any.
The transverse spacing between bearings would be 3.2m (to be studied in

more details).
The orientation and dimensions of the piers for the continuous units or
steel girder (simply supported span) have to be carefully selected to
ensure minimum occupation at ground level traffic. Since the vertical and
horizontal loads will vary from pier to pier, this will be catered to by
selecting the appropriate structural dimensions.
5.4.5 Foundations Recommendations
From Geo-investigations discussed in subsequent paras it is apparent that

substrata comprises of completely weathered rock followed by highly to
moderately weathered and slightly weathered to fresh brown grey
Breciia/Shale/Lime stone/ Basalt at varying depths of 3.5m to 8m, 4.5m to
9m and 7m to14.8 respectively. Hence, pile foundations with varying pile
depths depending on depth of rock from ground level may have to be
provided on a case by case basis.
5.4.6 Construction Methods
5.4.6.1 Deck – Simple Spans U Girder

Salient features of the precast segmental construction method technique
as envisaged for the project under consideration are indicated below:

The superstructure shall be constructed “span by span” sequentially,

starting at one end of a continuous stretch and finishing at the other end.
Nos. of launching girders may be required so as to work on different
stretches simultaneously to enable completion of the project in time.
The number of “breaks” in the stretch can be identified by nos of

continuous units.
The suggested method of erection will be detailed in drawings to be

prepared, at the time of detailed design. The launching girder (or, more
accurately, the “assembly truss”) is capable of supporting the entire dead
load of one span and transferring it to the temporary brackets attached to
the pier. The governing weight of the segments will be of the order of 55t
(to be finalized). The launching girder envisaged will be slightly greater
than two span lengths. It must be able to negotiate curves in conjunction
with temporary brackets.
Transportation of segments from casting yard to the point of erection will

be effected by appropriately designed low-bedded trailers (tyre-mounted).
The segments can be lifted and erected using erection portal gantry
moving on launching girder.
U-girder segments shall be match cast at the casting yard before being
transported to location and erected in position. Post-tensioned cables
shall be threaded in-situ and tensioned from one end. It is emphasized
that for precast segmental construction only one-end prestressing shall be
used.
The prestressing steel and prestressing system steel accessories shall be

subjected to an acceptance test prior to their actual use on the works.
The tests for the system shall be as per FIP Recommendations as
stipulated in the special specifications. Only multi-strand jacks shall be
used for tensioning of cables. Direct and indirect force measurement
device (e.g. Pressure Gauge) shall be attached in consultation with
system manufacturer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper handling, lifting, storing,
transporting and erection of all segments so that they may be placed in
the structure without damage. Segments shall be maintained in an upright
position at all times and shall be stored, lifted and/or moved in a manner to
prevent torsion and other undue stress. Members shall be lifted, hoisted
or stored with lifting devices approved on the shop drawings.

5.4.6.2 Epoxy Bonded Joints and Shear Keys.
A minimum compressive stress of 3 kg/sqcm shall be provided uniformly

over the cross-section for the closure stress on the epoxied joint until the
epoxy has set. The curing period for application of the compressive
stress, method of mixing and application of epoxy and all related aspects
including surface preparation shall be as per approved manufacturer’s
specifications.
The purpose of the epoxy joint, which is about 1mm on each mating
surface, shall be to serve as lubricant during segment positioning, to
provide waterproofing of the joints for durability in service conditions and
to provide a seal to avoid cross-over of grout during grouting of one cable
into other ducts.
The epoxy shall be special purpose and meet requirements of relevant

provision of FIP (International Federation of Prestressed Concrete)
The temporary compressive stress during the curing period shall be

applied by approved external temporary bar prestressing (such as
Macalloy or Diwidag bar systems or approved equivalent).
5.4.7 Construction of the Stations
5.4.7.1 It is proposed to construct the elevated stations with elevated concourse

over the road at most of the locations to minimise land acquistion. To
keep the rail level low, it is proposed not to take viaduct through the
stations. Thus a separate structural configuration is required (although
this may necessitate the break in the launching operations at each station
locations)
5.4.7.2Sub-structure for the station portion will also be similar to that of viaduct
and will be carried out in the same manner. However, there will be single
viaduct column in the station area, which will be located on the median
and supporting the concourse girders by a cantilever arm so as to
eliminate the columns on right of way.
5.4.7.3Super-structure will consist of 3 precast U Girders for supporting the track

structure and I Girder / Double T Girders for supporting the platform and
concourse areas. A pre-cast or cast in situ prestressed cross girder will be
required over the middle piers for supporting platform structure. Box
shaped in situ prestressed cantilever cross girders are planned for
supporting the concourse girders and escalators at mezzanine level. All
the members will be pre-cast in a construction depot and launched at site
through cranes.

5.4.8 Grade of Concrete
It is proposed to carry out construction work with design mix concrete

through computerised automatic Batching Plants with following grade of
concrete for various members as per design requirement/durability
considerations.
i) Pile cap and open foundation - M -30
ii) Piers - M -40
iii) All precast element for viaduct and station - M -45
iv) Cantilever piers and portals - M -45
- M -60
v) Other miscellaneous structure - M - 30
For all the main structures, permeability test on concrete sample is

recommended to ensure impermeable concrete.
5.4.9 Reinforcement and pretressed Steel
It is proposed to use HYSD 415 or TMT steel as reinforcement bars.

For pre-stressing work, low relaxation high tensile steel strands with the
configuration 12 T 13 and or 19 K 15 is recommended (confirming to
IS:14268).
5.4.10 Road width Required During Construction
As most of the construction is to be carried out on the middle of the road,

central two lanes including median will be required for construction
activities. During piling and open foundation work, a width of about 9 m
will be required for construction and the same will be barricaded. It is
proposed that two lanes are provided for traffic on either sides during
construction by widening of roads, if necessary. In certain cases, one way
traffic may be resorted to.
All these actions will require a minimum period of about 4 to 6 months.

During this period, the implementing agency can go ahead with the
following preliminary works:
i) Preliminary action for diversion of utility and preparation of estimates
there of.
ii) Reservation of land along the corridor, identification and survey for
acquisition.
Once the Corporation is formed, the Corporation has to take action for
appointment of consultant for Project Management and proof checking
including preparation of tender documents. Simultaneously, action is also
to be taken for detailed design for structures for elevated corridors.

5.5 Geotechnical Investigations
5.5.1 General Geology & Related Characteristics:
a) Location- The proposed corridor starts in the east at Ghatkopar Rly. Stn.
on Hira Chand Desai Marg and runs along Golibar Road/V.B.Phadke
Marg DP Road, Andheri-Ghatkopar Road, Andheri- Kurla Road,
Mathurdas Vasanji Road, Jay Prakash Road up to Versova near Seven
bungalows bus depot in the West. The site is accessible by all modes of
surface transport for all seasons, excepting the DP road under
construction through Aslapha village at present.
The consultants have carried out GT investigations in the western

segment of the corridor i.e., from Versova to Andheri Rly. Station. A total
of 8 bore holes have been drilled at an average distance of about 500 m
each.
For the eastern segment, i.e., from Ghatkopar Rly.station to Andheri

Rly.station, the geo-technical investigations already carried out by
MMRDA through their agencies for various projects have been collected
and presented here.
b) Physiography and Climate-The site is about 15m above mean sea

level. The highest temperature in this city is around 35oC and the
minimum temperature is around 15oC. The period between January to
April and December is the dry period in this region. The Southwest
monsoon period, between June and October, is the main rainy season.
The average annual rainfall is about 2000mm.
c) General Geology- Mumbai and Konkan coastal area of Maharashtra

state is underlain by Deccan Trap Basalts. These rocks are believed to
be formed by a series of vast lava flows following volcanic eruptions
towards the close of the Cretaceous period or early Tertiary era. The
total thickness of the Deccan Traps is very variable, reaching an
estimated maximum of 3000 metres along the coast.
A very wide variety of basalts and associated rocks such as volcanic

Breccias, black tachylytic basalts, red tachylytic basalts seen at the
surface as ‘Red Bole’ occur in the area covered by Deccan Trap basalts.
All these volcanic rocks are hydrothermally weathered near the surface.
The residual material resulting from the breakdown of the rock is known
locally as “murrum” the properties of which vary in consistency and
texture according to the degree of weathering and disintegration. On
complete weathering of rock the soil becomes stiff yellow silty clay.

Marine Clays of Mumbai
Marine clays cover extensive areas in Mumbai/Coastal region, which are

found along the shore as well as in creeks, tidal flats and formerly
submerged areas. On the eastern front of Mumbai, island and coastal
region, thick deposits of marine clays are found overlying murrum tuff
and basaltic rock. The marine clay deposits vary in thickness from 2m to
20m. These soils are characterized by their high compressibility, low co-
efficient of consolidation and very low shear strength. Above the
bedrock, the residual ‘murrum’ often occurs along with gravel and
weathered boulders.
5.5.2 Seismicity-Mumbai lies in seismic zone IV. Suitable seismic coefficient may
be adopted in the design of structures to commensurate with the Indian
Standard seismic zoning of the country IS.1893-1984 which is under revision
after the occurrence of Gujarat Earthquake in January’ 2001.
5.5.3 Field Investigations
This proposed corridor of the Mumbai MRTS is from section of Metro rail has
to cover a corridor from Ghatkopar to Versova via Andheri. As stated earlier,
the GT investigations have been carried out afresh for the western segment
i.e., from Andheri to Versova and the GT investigation data already available
with MMRDA has been collected and presented in the following paras. The
details of boreholes along the corridor are shown in Table 5.5.1
Table 5.5.1
DETAILS OF BOREHOLES
BOREHOLE CHAINAGE Ground R.L. GROUND DEPTH OF INVESTIGATION

NUMBER (in m) (m) WATER (in m)
TABLE
In
DEPTH In SOIL TOTAL
ROCK
(in m)
Western Segment(Andheri – Versova)

JP-1 W0.0729 9.760 1.55 3.10 7.50 10.60
JP-2 W0.7259 6.340 3.70 5.50 6.00 11.50
JP-3 W1.1889 4.217 3.55 4.10 7.60 11.70
JP-4 W1.6839 3.977 3.90 7.60 8.15 15.75
JP-5 W2.1839 3.794 4.30 5.80 5.95 11.75
JP-6 W2.6939 3.802 4.75 5.70 11.30 17.00
JP-7 W3.1939 3.589 4.70 10.00 10.70 20.70
JP-8 W3.7039 8.578 9.00 14.45 10.30 24.75
Eastern Segment(Andheri –Ghatkopar)
D1 E0.070 3.15 1.90 6.50 25.00 31.50
D2 E0.435 15.14 1.85 6.50 24.00 30.50
D3 E0.885 16.55 3.00 6.00 23.50 29.50

BOREHOLE CHAINAGE Ground R.L. GROUND DEPTH OF INVESTIGATION

NUMBER (in m) (m) WATER (in m)
TABLE
In
DEPTH In SOIL TOTAL
ROCK
(in m)
S1 E1.355 22.68 2.60 10.75 5.18 15.93
S2 E3.195 11.19 2.50 5.00 10.64 15.64
S3 E7.400 19.96 1.80 2.50 12.70 15.20
S4 E5.890 18.41 2.20 5.00 10.50 15.50
S5 E6.515 19.27 4.00 4.50 10.68 15.18
S6 E7.550 14.64 2.60 4.50 9.95 14.45
S7 E7.700 32.02 2.00 9.00 6.24 15.24
5.5.4 Engineering Design Parameters- Based upon investigation done and the
analysis made thereafter, following design parameters have been finalized as
discussed in the subsequent paras.
5.5.5 Design Parameters for Elevated Corridor-The sub-soil strata at proposed

site comprise of nine types of layers (based on field tests & laboratory test
result data). Description of each layer along with various engineering
parameters is as shown in Table 5.5.2
Table 5.5.2
LAYER TYPE AND DESCRIPTION
Layer Description Classification Relative Observed

as per IS : Density/ in Bore
1498-1970 Consistency Hole Nos.
Western Segment(Andheri - Versova)
I Road material & Backfill - - JP-1 to JP-8
II Silty Sand SM-SC, SP- Medium dense JP-8
SC, SM, SC to dense
III Silty Sand SP-SC, SM Very dense JP-1
IV Sandy Clay - Soft JP-7
V Silty Clay CH Medium stiff to JP-1 and
stiff JP-3
VI Silty Sandy Clay with CH, CI Very stiff to JP-2 to JP-5

gravel hard and JP-8
VII Completely weathered CI, CH, GM - JP-7 and
rock JP-8
Highly to moderately
JP-1 to JP-4
weathered
VIII - - and JP-6 to
SANDSTONE/
JP-8
BRECCIA/ BASALT
IX Slightly weathered to - - JP-1 to JP-8

fresh BRECCIA/
SHALE/ LIMESTONE
ANDHERI TO GHATKOPAR
D1,D2,S1toS
I Road material & Backfill - -
6
SM-SC, SP-SC, Medium dense to
II Silty Sand S5
SM, SC dense
III Silty Sand SP-SC, SM Very dense D3
IV Sandy Clay - Soft D2,S6
Medium stiff to
V Silty Clay CH S1,S4,S7
stiff
Silty Sandy Clay with
VI CH, CI Very stiff to hard S2,S5
gravel
Completely weathered
VII CI, CH, GM -
rock
Highly to moderately
VIII weathered SANDSTONE/ - - D2,D3
BRECCIA/ BASALT
5.5.6 Assessment of Liquefaction-Liquefaction is the sudden loss of shear

strength of the loose fine-grained sands due to earthquake-induced vibration
under saturated conditions. The liquefaction generally takes place in loose
fine-grained sands with N value less than 15 and soil classification under SP.
At this site generally silty clay is observed. Medium dense to very dense sand
is also obtained and the ‘N’ value is generally greater than 15. Hence this site
does not seem susceptible to liquefaction.
5.5.7 Construction Methodology
Type of Foundation- Considering the nature of soil, type of proposed

structures (Elevated Rail Corridor) and expected loads on foundations, the
recommended type of foundations is generally Pile Foundation, except at few
locations where open foundation can be provided, where rock level is up to 6
m below GL.
Depth of Foundation-A foundation must have an adequate depth from

considerations of adverse environmental influences. It must also be
economically feasible in terms of overall structure.
Keeping in view the type of the proposed structure and the subsoil strata, the
length of pile should be 10 to 30m as the piles are to be socketted in rock.
Pile Foundation-For the prevailing soil conditions and type of structures,

bored cast-in-situ piles of 1200 mm or 1500 mm diameter are proposed to be
adopted.

Piles transmit foundation loads through soil strata of low bearing capacity to
deeper soil having a higher bearing capacity value. Piles carry loads as a
combination of side friction and point bearing resistance.
Piles are suitable due to the following specific advantages over spread
footings/raft foundation:
• Completely non-displacement.
• Carry the heavy superstructure loads into or through a soil stratum. Both
vertical and lateral loads may be involved.
• Controls settlements when spread footing/raft foundation is on a marginal
soil.
• Can resist uplift, or overturning.
• Applicable for a wide variety of soil conditions.
Recommended safe vertical load carrying capacity of piles of different lengths

below the ground level are as shown in Table 5.5.3.
Table 5.5.3
SAFE VERTICAL LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF PILES
(Western Segment)
Minimum pile
Bore hole
length required Pile capacity (in T)
No.
BGL (in m)
For Dia 1.0 m For Dia 1.20 m for Dia 1.50 m
JP-1 10 314 452 707
JP-2 12 314 452 707
JP-3 12 314 452 707
JP-4 13 314 452 707
JP-5 12 314 452 707
JP-6 11 236 339 530
JP-7 18 314 452 707
JP-8 20 314 452 707
The minimum diameter of pile should be 1000mm. In borehole locations JP-1

to JP-5 confirmatory boreholes up to at least 20m depth are recommended to
ascertain whether there is any weaker rock below.
In the geo-technical investigation data obtained from MMRDA for the eastern
segment, vertical load carrying capacity of the pile foundations is not available.
Only, bore logs are given. The load carrying capacity can be worked out if the
soil properties & soil test results are available. However the bore log details
indicate that the strata does not vary much and pile foundations can be
designed.

5.6 UTILITY DIVERSIONS
5.6.1 Introduction
Besides the details of various aspects e.g. transport demand analysis, route
alignment, station locations, system design, viaduct structure, geo-technical
investigations etc. as brought out in previous chapters, there are a number of other
engineering items, which are required to be considered in sufficient details before
really deciding on taking up any infrastructure project of such magnitude.
Accordingly, following engineering items have been studied and described in this
chapter:
• Utilities and planning for their diversion during construction.

• Land acquisition necessary for the project both on permanent basis as well as
temporary, including its break up between Government and private ownership.
• Potential of property development and assessment of likely revenues to be
generated with a view to part finance the construction as well as operation costs
of the project.
• Traffic diversion during construction.
5.6.2 Utility and Services
The proposed corridor starts in the east at Ghatkopar Rly. station on Hira Chand
Desai Marg and runs along Golibar Road/V.B.Phadke Marg DP Road ,Andheri-
Ghatkopar Road, Andheri- Kurla Road, Mathurdas Vasanji Road ,Jay Prakash Road
up to Versova near Seven bungalows bus depot in the West.
The consultants have carried collected details of various utilities from concerned
organisations directly for the western segment of the corridor i.e., from Versova to
Andheri Rly. station. For the eastern segment, i.e., from Ghatkopar Rly. station to
Andheri Rly. station, details of utilities collected by MMRDA through their agencies
for various projects have been adopted
Large number of sub-surface, surface and over head utility services viz. sewers,
water mains, storm water drains, telephone cables, O.H electrical transmission lines,
electric poles, traffic signals, etc. are existing along the proposed alignment. These
utility services are essential and have to be maintained in working order during
different stages of construction, by temporary/permanent diversions or by supporting
in position. Since these may affect construction and project implementation time
schedule/costs, for which necessary planning/action needs to be initiated in advance.
5.6.3 Organisations/Departments with concerned utility services in Mumbai are

mentioned in Table 5.6.1.

Table 5.6.1
UTILITY RESPONSIBILITY DEPARTMENTS
Sr. ORGANIZATION/ UTILITY SERVICES

No. DEPARTMENT
1. Municipal Corporation of Roads, surface water drains, nallahs, Sewerage and
Greater Mumbai(MCGM) drainage conduits, sewerage treatment plants, pumping
stations, Water mains and their service lines, including
hydrants, water treatment plants, pumping stations,
Gardens etc.
2. Public Works Deptt. Road construction & maintenance.
(PWD)
3. Irrigation and Flood Nallahs/flood water drains etc.
Department, MCGM
4. BEST (Bombay Electric Power cables and their appurtenances
Supply & Transportation) H.T. and L.T. lines, their pylons, electric light posts, pole
mounted transformers, etc.
5. Mahanagar Telephone Telecommunication cables, junction boxes, telephone
Nigam Ltd. (MTNL) posts, O.H. lines, etc.
6. Mumbai Traffic Police Traffic signal posts, junction boxes and cable
connections, etc.
7. Mahanagar Gas Ltd. Gas lines
8. BSES(Bombay Sub- Power cables and their appurtenances
urban Electric Supply) H.T. and L.T. lines, their pylons, electric light posts, pole
/Reliance Energy mounted transformers, etc
9. TATA Power Power cables and their appurtenances
H.T. and L.T. lines, their pylons, electric light posts, pole
mounted transformers, etc
10. MMRDA & MAHADA Land development & Housing etc.
11. TATA Tele Services Telecommunication cables, junction boxes, telephone
posts, O.H. lines, etc.
12. Reliance Info. Ltd Telecommunication cables, junction boxes, telephone
posts, O.H. lines, etc.
13. Western & Central Railway crossings, signals, railway bridges, etc.
Railway
5.6.4 Assessment of the type and location of underground utilities running along and
across the proposed route alignment between Ghatkopar Station and Versova has
been undertaken with the help of data available with MMRDA and also with
concerned authorities, who generally maintain plans and data of such utility
services. Particulars of main utilities i.e. trunk and main sewers/drainage conduits,
water mains, OH & UG Electric cable, Telecom cable etc. have been marked on
alignment plans.

5.6.5 Diversion of Underground Utilities
While planning for diversion of underground utility services viz. sewer lines, water
pipelines, cables, etc., during construction of MRTS alignment, following guidelines
have been adopted:
• Utility services have to be kept operational during the entire construction period
and after completion of project. All proposals should therefore, ensure their
uninterrupted functioning.
• The elevated viaduct does not pose much of a difficulty in negotiating the
underground utility services, especially those running across the alignment. The
utilities infringing at pier location can be easily diverted away from the pile cap
location.
• In case a major utility is running along/across the alignment which cannot be
diverted or the diversion of which is difficult, time consuming and uneconomical ,
the spanning arrangement of the viaduct and layout of piles in the foundation
may be suitably adjusted to ensure that no foundation needs be constructed at
the location, where utility is crossing the proposed alignment. The utility service
can also be encased within the foundation piles.
5.6.6 At Grade Stretch
As the proposed alignment is completely elevated, there is no at grade stretch in

this corridor.
5.6.7 Elevated Stretch
5.6.7.1 In this corridor, the alignment is almost on the center of the road except near
Versova station due to site constraints. However, the Versova station and
alignment in this stretch are within the ROW. The sewer/drainage lines generally
exist in the service lanes i.e. away from main carriageway. However, in certain
stretches, these have come near the central verge or under main carriageway, as
a result of subsequent road widening.
5.6.7.2The major sewer/drainage lines and water mains running across the alignment and
likely to be affected due to location of column foundations are proposed to be
taken care of by relocating on column supports of viaduct by change in span or by
suitably adjusting the layout of pile foundations. Where, this is not feasible, lines
will be suitably diverted. Provision has been made in the project cost estimate
towards diversion of utility service lines. Details of sewer lines and storm water
drains affected in elevated stretch along with their diversion proposals are
indicated in Table 5.6.2. Similarly, details of affected water pipe lines in this
stretch are indicated in Table 5.6.3.

Table 5.6.2
DETAILS OF AFFECTED SEWER LINES IN
Affected Type & Position

S. Chainage
Length Diameter w.r.t. Location
No.
(in m) (in mm) Alignment
A
1 E-73-E 244 171m 300mm dia. Along
A
3 E 500-E 555 55m 230mm dia Along
A
4 E 1295-E 1365 68m 225mm dia Along
A
5 E 1660-E 1833 173m 225mm dia Along
A
6 E 3730-E 3946 216 300mm dia. Along
A
7 W-73-E 218 145X2 300mm dia. Along
B
8 0.00 8 225mm dia Across
A
9 E 920-E 1065 145 225mm dia Along
A
10 E 2207-E 2352 145 225mm dia Along
B
11 E-2325 28 225mm dia Across
B
12 E-2225 11 225mm dia Across
A
13 E 3634-E 3792 98 300mm dia Along
A
14 E 1330-E 1337 7 225mm dia Along
Note:
“A” Sewer/SWD lines to be diverted away from pier location.
“B” Suitably locate the pier/change the pile layout to avoid
diversion.

Table 5.6.3
DETAILS OF AFFECTED WATER PIPE LINE

Position
S. Chainage Type & Diameter wrt
Affected Length Location
No. (in mm) Alignmen
(in m)
t
E-1368-E A
1 84 48 mm dia. C.I. Along
1452
24 mm dia. C.I. A
2 E 1420-E2205 785 Along
E 1908-E 12 mm dia. C.I. A
3 207 Along
2115
E 1989-E 6 mm dia. C.I. A
4 111 Along
2100
E 2350 –E A
5 200 24 mm dia. C.I Along
2550
E 3543- E A
6 45 Along
3588 18 mm dia. C.I
E 3548-E A
3588
8 A
W-73-E 218 145X3 9 mm dia. C.I. Along
12 mm dia. C.I. A
9 W-73-E 218 145 Along
300 mm dia. C.I. A
10 W-73-E 218 145X2 Along
B
11 W-20 24X2 300 mm dia. C.I Across
12 0.00 22X2 300 mm dia. C.I Across B
A
13 E 920-E 1065 145X2 9 mm dia. C.I. Along
14 12 mm dia. C.I. A
E 920-E 1065 145 Along
A
15 E 920-E 1065 145 6 mm dia. C.I Along
A
16 E 920-E 1065 145 24 mm dia. C.I. Along
E 2207-E A
17 145X2 9 mm dia. C.I. Along
2352
E 2207-E A
2352
E 2207-E 12 mm dia. C.I. A
19 145 Along
2352
E 2207-E A
2352
E 2941-E A
3086
E 2941-E A
3086

Position
(in m)
t
E 2941-E A
3086
E 3588-E A
24E 145 6 mm dia. C.I Along
3733
E 3588-E A
3733
E 3588-E A
3733
E 1280-E A
1287
E 1280-E A
1287
E 1305-E A
1312
E 1305-E A
1312
E 1330-E A
1337
E 1330-E A
1337
E 1456-E A
1463
E 1456-E A
1463
E 1386-E A
1393
E 1386-E A
1393
E 1386-E A
1393
E 1416-E A
1393
E 1416-E A
1393
E 1416-E A
1393
E 4427-E A
4434
E 4452-E A
4459
E 4476-E A
4483
E 4501-E A
7 12 mm dia. C.I. Along
44 4508
B
45 E-906 9 9 mm dia. C.I. Across
B
B
B

Position
(in m)
t
B
Note:
“A” Water Pipe lines to be diverted away from pier location.
“B” Suitably locate the pier/change the pile layout to avoid diversion.
5.6.8 Gas Pipe Lines
There are few gas pipe lines with varying diameters belonging to Mahanagar gas
Limited, Mumbai are running along and across the roads along which the metro
alignment is proposed . Though, the alignment is planned almost along the center
of the road en-route, few pipelines running across & along the alignment are likely
to be affected by the alignment as detailed below in Table 5.6.4. All these pipelines
are placed at a depth of about 1 Met below the ground.
Table 5.6.4
DETAILS OF AFFECTED GAS PIPELINE
Affected
Chainage
S. Length Position wrt Diversion
No. (in m) Alignment proposal
1 E 164 –E 343 181 Along A
2 E 1530-E 2205 725 Along A
3 E 2350-E 2940 590 Along A
4 E 3087-E 3230 143 Along A
5 E 3280-E 3588 388 Along A
6 E 2205-E 2350 145 Along A
7 E 2312-E 2332 20 Along A
8 E 2336-E 2356 20 Along A
9 E 2941-E 3086 145 Along A
10 E-3067 15 Across A

Affected
Chainage
S. Length Position wrt Diversion
No. (in m) Alignment proposal
11 E 3067-E 3092 25 Along A
12 E 3588-E 3730 145 Along A
13 E-3613 22 Across A
14 E 4122-E 4129 7 Along A
15 E 4145-E 4153 7 Along A
16 E 4167-E 4174 7 Along A
17 E-394 9 Across B
18 E-2627 5 Across B
Note:
“A” Gas Pipe lines to be diverted away from pier location.
“B” Suitably locate the pier/change the pile layout to avoid diversion.
The alignment being elevated , to avoid diversion of pipelines running across the
alignment, necessary span adjustments are to be made . The pipelines running
along the proposed alignment needs to be diverted at few stretches. At the time of
project execution, the pipe line authorities should be contacted for necessary
diversions and sufficient care should be taken to ensure their safety .
5.6.9 Aboveground Utilities
5.6.9.1Above ground utilities namely street light poles, traffic signal posts,
telecommunication posts, junction boxes, etc. are also required to be shifted and
relocated suitably during construction, since these will be interfering with the
proposed alignment. Approximate numbers of affected lamp/ telecome/elec. Posts
& boxes are indicated in Table 5.6.5.

Table 5.6.5
AFFECTED ABOVEGROUND SERVICES
Section Lp EP Tsp Tp Jbe JBt Tr Py FL

Elevated 145 - 25 - 40 10 - - -
Lp Light Post EP Electric Post

Tsp Traffic Signal Post
Tp Telephone Post Jbe Electrical Junction Box
Tr Transformer Py Pylon (electric mast)
FL Flood Light Post JBt Telephone Junction Box
5.6.10 HT-Electric cables Along the Corridor (Underground position)
At several places, 11kV/22kV/33kV power cables belonging to TATA Power

Company Ltd. & Reliance Power Company Ltd. are running along & across the
proposed alignment in underground position. The list of such cables along with
their locations is indicated in Table 5.6.6, Table 5.6.7(a) & Table 5.6.7(b). These
lines need to be modified/shifted or cabled well in advance of construction along this
route.
Table 5.6.6
DETAILS OF AFFECTED TATA CABLE IN BELOW GROUND POSITION
Affected Position with

Chainage iption of Cable rsion proposal
S. No. length w.r.t.
(m) alignment
1 W-73-E 218 145 Along Tata Cable A
2 E-100 9 Across Tata Cable B
5 E 923-E 1067 145X2 Along Tata Cable A
6 E1287-E1294 7 Along Tata Cable A
7 E 1305-E 1312 7 Along Tata Cable A

Affected Position with

Chainage iption of Cable rsion proposal
S. No. length w.r.t.
(m) alignment
16 E 2207-E 2352 145X2 Along Tata 22Kv A
18 E 2941-E 3086 145X2 Along Tata Cable A
Table 5.6.7(a)
DETAILS OF AFFECTED CABLES of Reliance Energy Ltd IN BELOW GROUND
POSITION
11KV
S. Chainage Affected Position wrt Diversion
No. Length Alignment proposal
(in m)
1 E 1420 –E 1543 228 Along A
2 E 1500 –E 1563 63 Along A
3 E 1953 –E 2025 73 Along A


(in m)
4 E 2020 –E 2065 45 Along A
5 E 2029-E 2057 28 Along A
6 E 2029 –E 2074 48 Along A
7 E 3990 –E 4250 260 Along A
8 E 4100 –E 4250 150 Along A

9 E 3860-E 3890 30 Along A
10 W-73-E-218 145X2 Along A
11 E 920-E 1065 145X2 Along A
12 E 920-E 1010 90 Along A

13 E -2216 20 Across B
14 E -2221 20 Across B
15 E 2941-E 3086 145X3 Along A
16 E 2870 –E 2940 70X2 Along A
17 E 3087 –E 3210 123 Along A
18 E 3300 –E 3580 280 Along A
19 E 3475 –E 3572 97 Along A
20 E 2350 –E 2572 223 Along A
21 E 2573 –E 2755 182 Along A

22 E 3587 –E 3732 145 X3 Along A
23 E 1416-E 1423 7X2 Along A
24 E 4227-E 4234 7 Along A
25 E -4195 9 Across B
26 E -4288 9 Across B
27 E 1280-E 1287 7 Along A
28 E-80 9 Across B


(in m)
29 E-100 9X2 Across B
30 E-374 9 Across B
31 E -1236 9X3 Across B
33 E -2357 9 Across B
34 E 2455-E 2464 9 Along A

35 E -2572 9 Across B
36 E 2571-E 2580 9 Along A
37 E -3572 9 Across B
38 E -4060 9 Across B
39 E -4101 9 Across B
40 E -4102 9 Across B
41 E 1305-E 1312 7 Along A

42 E -1456-E 1463 7 Along A
22 KV
S. No. Chainage Affected Position wrt Diversion
Length Alignment proposal
(in m)
1 E 1582-E 1651 73 Along A
2 E 2074-E 2167 94 Along A
3 E 2350-E 2572 222 Along A

4 E 2850-E 2940 90 Along A
5 E 3087-E 3150 63 Along A
6 E 3270-E 3588 280 Along A
7 E 3366-E 3490 124 Along A
8 W-73-E 218 145 Along A
9 E-31-E 176 145X2 Along A
10 E 922-E 981 59 Along A
11 E 336-E 343 7 Along A

12 E 983-E 1087 104 Along A
13 E 1305-E 1312 7 Along A
14 E 1330-E 1334 4X2 Along A
15 E-1330 7X2 Across B
16 E 1386-E 1393 7 Along A
17 E 2206-E 2351 145 Along A
18 E 2224-E 2351 127 Along
19 E-2332 17 Across B
22 E 1416-E 1423 7 Along A
23 E 4427-E 4434 7 Along A
24 E 4452-E 4459 7 Along A
25 E 4476-E 4483 7 Along A
26 E 4501-E 4508 7 Along A
TABLE 5.6.7(b)
DETAILS OF AFFECTED RELIANCE CABLE IN BELOW GROUND POSITION
S. Chainage Affected Position w.r.t. to Diversion

No. length alignment proposal
(m)
1 W-73-E 218 145X2 Along A
2 E 923-E 1065 145 Along A

3 E 1305-E 1313 7 Along A
4 E 1330-E 1337 7 Along A
5 E 1355-E 1362 7 Along A
6 E 1387-E 1394 7 Along A
7 E 1416-E 1423 7 Along A
8 E-1702 9 Across B
9 E 2207-E 2352 145 Along A

S. Chainage Affected Position w.r.t. to Diversion

No. length alignment proposal
(m)
10 E 2941-E 3086 145 Along A
12 E 3587-E 3732 145 Along A
13 E 4582-E 4606 24 Along A
5.6.11 At several places, telecom cables of MTNL / TATA Tele Services are also
running along & across the proposed alignment in underground position. The likely
affected such cables are indicated in Table 5.6.8 & Table 5.6.9 respectively.
Table 5.6.8
DETAILS OF AFFECTED TELEPHONE CABLE DUCTS IN BELOW GROUND
POSITION (MTNL)
No. Length Alignment Proposal
(in m)
1 W-73-E 218 145X2 Along A
2 E 920-E 1065 145X2 Along A
3 E 2208-E 2353 145X2 Along A
4 E 2941-E 2954 13 Along A
5 E 2941-E 3086 145 Along A
6 E 1417-E 1424 7X2 Along A
7 E 1655-E 1683 7 Along A
8 E 1676-E 4131 7 Along A
9 E 4124-E 2152 7 Along A
10 E 4145-E 4175 7 Along A
11 E 4168-E 4134 7 Along A
12 E 4427-E 4434 7 Along A
13 E 4452-E 4459 7 Along A
14 E 4477-E 4484 7 Along A


No. Length Alignment Proposal
(in m)
15 E 4500-E 4507 7 Along A
Table 5.6.9
DETAILS OF AFFECTED CABLES TATA Tele Services

(Underground Position)
Position
S. Description of Affected
Chainage w.r.t. Location
No. Cables Length
alignment
Western Segment
1 W2.6007 OFC 25.00 ACROSS
STATION
2 W2.2645 - W2.0539 4-OFC IN DUCT 210.00 ALONG
AREA
STATION
3 W1.4559 - W1.2539 4-OFC IN DUCT 202.00 ALONG
AREA
RIGHT
4 W0.4619 - W0.2419 4-OFC IN DUCT 220 ALONG
SIDE
LEFT
5 W0.3649 - W0.2419 4-OFC IN DUCT 148 ALONG
SIDE
Eastern Segment
RUNNING
1 E 1.055 4-OFC IN DUCT 11 Across
SECTION
RUNNING
2 E 1.560 4-OFC IN DUCT 11 Across
SECTION
3 E 0.223 4-OFC IN DUCT 11M Across B
4 E 0.494 – E 0.760 4-OFC IN DUCT 266m Along A
5 E 1.010 4-OFC IN DUCT 3m Across B
6 E 1.010 – E 1.028 4-OFC IN DUCT 18m Along A
7 E 3.576 4-OFC IN DUCT 2.0m Across B
8 E 3.581 4-OFC IN DUCT 3m Across B
Detailed proposals for tackling these lines needs to be prepared in consultation with
the concerned agencies. However, Tentative provision has been made in cost
estimates.

5.7 LAND
5.7.1 The alignment and profile
i) The proposed corridor form Versova to Ghatkopar is fully elevated and is

11.07Kms. long form dead end to dead end. The alignment traverses along Jai
Prakash Road, Sir Mathura Das Vasanji Road, Andheri Kurla Road, Andheri
Ghatkopar Road, DP Road, Golibar Road and Hirachand Desai Road. Two
maintenance depots are being planned for this corridor one at near DN Nagar
station with stabling & inter-corridor link with North-South corridor and another
depot in Godrej land in the eastern segment.
ii) Development planned prior to MRTS
As discussed in previous paras, under MUIP (Mumbai Urban Infrastructure

Project) the roads lying along this corridor are being widened to their full right
of way. The road widening /construction activity will be taken up prior to Metro
construction and the roads with their full ROW will be available for Metro
construction. As per MUIP, the road widening will be carried out on either side
equally w.r.t the present road center. Accordingly, the system has been
planned and land acquisition requirements have been assessed.
5.7.2 Land Requirement for following major components
• MRTS Structure (including Route Alignment), Station Building, Platforms,

Entry/Exit Structures, Traffic Integration Facilities, Depots, etc.
• Receiving/Traction Sub-stations
• Radio Towers
• Temporary Construction Depots and work sites.
5.7.3 Land required for elevated structures (Other than Stations)
The normal viaduct structure of elevated Metro is about 10 m (edge to edge) wide.
Ideally the required right of way is 10m. However, for reasons of safety a clean
marginal distance / setback of about 5 m is necessary from either edge of the viaduct
(or 10 m on both sides of the center line) wherein no structures are to be located.
This is necessary as the traction system is overhead 25 kV ac system with masts
fixed on the parapets. Also, it ensures road access ands working space all along the
viaduct for working of emergency equipments and fire brigade.
As explained in the earlier chapters the D. P. widths of the roads along which the
Metro alignment is passing are more than 20 m except at the following stretches.
(i) Part of J. P. Road to the west of Andheri Metro Station (west of W. Rly. tracks)
where D. P. width is 18.4 m and

(ii) Part of Golibar Road (from Sarvodaya Hospital up to L. B. S. Marg). In this

critical area we propose two options
a) to set back the building beyond 10 m from the centre as and when the
redevelopment proposals are received.
b) to adopt, suitable measures like, screening/covering to mitigate the effects
of MRTS system on the structures/people where the clearanceis less than
5m from the station building.
c) Similarly, for safety reasons a belt of 5 m on either side of the station
building is required where in no structures are allowed. If the clearance to
any structure is less than 5 m, efforts should be made to acquire that
building or suitable measures like, screening/covering to mitigate the
effects of MRTS system on the structures/people are to be adopted.
The alignment has been planned with a presumption all roads will be widened to D.
P. width under MUIP and as such no land acquisition cost is involved for right of way.
In view of the constraints on space on ground floor it is proposed to provide the
concourse area exactly below the Station Building at mezzanine level. All the
stations including terminal stations are planned with side platforms. Normally, the
ideal width required for station building is 28 m. Since, the width of the road where
most of the Stations are located is more than 28 m, no land acquisition is envisaged
for Stations. The staircase giving access to concourse area from ground will be
located on the footpaths at the edge. Some constraints are observed at the station
buildings at Andheri and Ghatkopar. The situation is very tight particularly at
Ghatkopar where ROW is 18.4 m and building to building space is 22 to 27 m. As a
special case the Station Building width is restricted to 20 m at Ghatkopar & attempt is
made to locate the staircases within the marginal space available.
5.7.4 Land for Traffic integration
It is proposed to provide traffic integration facilities at all the proposed MRTS

Stations. Land for these facilities has been identified and is given in Table 5.7.1. The
requirement has been worked out keeping in view the traffic demand with full phase
network of the Metro.
Table 5.7.1
PROPOSED TRAFFIC INTEGRATION SITES
S.
Station Location Proposed (in sqm)
No
Open area behind the metro
1. Versova 803
station
2. D N Nagar Under elevated station concourse 1,655
3. Azad Nagar Open space in A.H. Wadia School 2,323
4. Andheri Under elevated station concourse 84
5. WEH Open space close to station 1,755
6. Chakala - DO - 452
7. Airport Road - DO - 322
8. Marol Naka - DO - 571

9. Saki Naka - DO - 525

10. Subhash Nagar - DO - 346
11. Asalpha Road - DO - 417
12. Ghatkopar Under elevated station concourse 120
Plots are identified for providing parking requirements. However, it was indicated that
acquisition of land at all the proposed location may not be possible. So it is
suggested that the land may be acquired to the extent possible. Hence, cost of this
land has been indicated separately.
5.7.5 Land for Depot
Two sites for locating the proposed depot were examined. One was at Vikhroli, from
the large vacant plot owned by M/s Godrej and which is reserved for “Exibition
Grounds” in the D. P. Total area of the land is about 20 hectares. Other large open
plot is available near the junction of J. P. Road and Link Road near D. N. Nagar. The
available land area is about 12.25 hectares. It is reserved as “Sewage Disposal
Plant” in the Development Plan. We are of the view that the location near D. N.
Nagar is more appropriate and is recommended. However the land at exhibition
ground is to be acquired for future use.
5.7.6 Land for Traction and Received Sub station and Radio Towers
Two RSSs are proposed to be located for this corridor . One in D. N. Nagar depot
area and another at Marol Naka station. An area of 550 sqm (22X25) has been
earmarked at each location. Similarly, two radio towers are also being proposed to
be located at these locations occupying an area of 100 sqm (10 m X 10 m) for each
radio tower.
5.7.7 Land Requirement for Stations & Running section
The ROW of the roads in eastern segment of the alignment is sufficiently wide
excepting near Ghatkopar station. As the alignment is located on the center of the
road, no land is required for station building etc., excepting few space for station,
traffic integration purposes.
In case of western segment the, the proposed ROW is only 27.45m . Hence at
several places due to curves etc., some land is proposed for acquisition required for
station buildings, running section etc.
The details of land permanently required for eastern & western segments are given in
Table 5.7.2 & 5.7.3 respectively. The areas identified for acquisition are shown in
Figs.5.7.1 to 5.7.12(enclosed).
In the stretch between Km.E7.290 and Km. E7.455, for about a length of 165m, the
alignment is located off the Golibar Road, away from Sarvodaya hospital. To avoid
demolition of important structures a sharp curve of 100m radius is provided. This
stretch is passes through private land adjoining the Golibar Road and involves
acquisition of about 0.33Ha(165mX20m)of private land on permanent basis. Further,
a narrow strip of land lying between the existing Golibar road and the alignment will
become redundant. Hence it is proposed to re-align this stretch of Golibar road along
the metro alignment with increased ROW, if necessary and the present Goilibar road
area can be utilized for rehabilitation of affected people. Hence, permanent land
acquisition is not proposed for this stretch. The cost of road re-alignment &
rehabilitation has been taken care of in the project cost estimate. A detailed road re-
alignment plan will be prepared after, reviewing the DP road alignment at this place.
Table 5.7.2
DETAILS OF LAND PERMANENTLY REQUIRED FOR THE PROJECT- EASTERN
SEGMENT
Land Proposed
S. No. Plot No Location Area in Sqm owner ship Land Use
Station
Vacant facilities &
space/abandoned Traffic
1 STANP1 Andheri Station bldg. 945 Pvt Integration
Vacant Space- RSS &

2 STE4P2 Marol Naka Commercial 650 Pvt. Radio Tower
Vacant space- Station
3 STE6P1 Subash Nagar Commercial 265 Pvt facilities
Vacant space- Station
4 STE7P1 Asalpha Road Commercial 400 Pvt facilities
Station
facilities &
Traffic
5 STE8P1 Ghatkopar Res. Built-up 284 Pvt Integration
6 STE8P2 Ghatkoper Com.Buit-up 266 Pvt -DO-
Vacant - Maintenance
7 Godrej Land Commercial 200000 Pvt Depot
Total 202810
Pvt.Residential = 1229 Sqm.

Pvt. Commercial = 201581 Sqm
Note :
1. ST- Station ; E-Eastern ; W-Western; AN – Andheri; P- Plot; CD – Construction
depot; DP- Maintenance Depot; PD – Property development ;RS-Running Section;
2. STE1P1- Plot NO.1 for 1st eastern station (E1) i.e., WEH Station

Table 5.7.3
DETAILS OF LAND PERMANENTLY REQUIRED FOR THE PROJECT- WESTERN
SEGMENT
Area in Land Proposed Proposed Type of Present land

S. No. Plot No Location Details Sqm owner ship Land Use Acquisition Use
Azad Nagar Station
1 STW1P1 Station Built-up Commercial 94 Pvt Entry/Exit Permanent Commercial
Vacant space in
front of Commercial
2 STW1P2 - DO- shops 79 Pvt - DO- Permanent Commercial
3 STW1P3 - DO- Built-up Residential 16 Pvt - DO- Permanent Residential

Vacant space in
front of Residential
4 STW1P4 - DO- Bldg. 110 Pvt - DO- Permanent Residential
5 STW1P5 - DO- Built-up Commercial 74 Pvt - DO- Permanent commercial

Vacant space in
front of Residential
6 STW1P6 - DO- Bldg. 178 Pvt - DO- Permanent Residential
Vacant space in
front of Sports
7 STW1P7 - DO- Club(Recreational) 312 Govt. Stair case Permanent Other
Vacant space in To maintain
front of Commercial safe
8 STW1P9 - DO- shops 119 Pvt clearance TDR
9 STW1P10 - DO- - DO- 285 Pvt Stair case Permanent commercial
To maintain
safe
10 STW1P11 - DO- - DO- 140 Pvt clearance TDR
11 STW1P12 - DO- Built-up Residential 187 Pvt - DO- TDR
Vacant space in
front of Commercial
12 STW1P13 - DO- shops 216 Pvt - DO- TDR
13 STW1P14 - DO- Built-up Commercial 116 Pvt - DO- TDR
Vacant space in
side of Sports
14 STW1P15 - DO- Club(Recreational) 63 Govt. - DO- TDR
Vacant space in To maintain
D.N.Nagar front of Residential safe
15 STW2P1 Station Bldg. 597 Pvt clearance TDR
Vacant space in
front of Commercial
16 STW2P2 - DO- shops 190 Pvt - DO- TDR
17 STW2P3 - DO- Nursery 271 Pvt - DO- TDR
18 STW2P4 - DO- Built-up Official 74 Govt. - DO- TDR

19 STW2P5 - DO- - DO- 36 Govt. - DO- TDR

20 STW2P6 - DO- - DO- 42 Govt. - DO- TDR
21 DEPOT - DO- Vacant Area 122500 Pvt Permanent
To maintain
safe
22 STW3P2 - DO- Built-up Commercial 166 Pvt clearance TDR
23 Sum(1 to 22) G.Total 125865
Permanent
24 Sum(1,2,5,9) Commercial (Pvt) 532
Permanent
25 Sum(3,4,6,21) Residential(Pvt) 122804
Permanent
26 Sum(7) Other(Govt.) 312
27 Sum(24,25,26) Total Permanent 123648
28 Sum(8 to 20,22) TDR 2217
Note :
1. ST- Station ; E-Eastern ; W-Western; AN – Andheri; P- Plot; CD – Construction

depot; DP- Maintenance Depot; PD – Property development ;RS-Running Section;
2. STW1P1- Plot NO.1 for 1st Western station (w1) i.e., Azad Nagar
5.7.8 Temporary Construction Depot
5.7.8.1During construction period, huge quantities of construction materials like reinforcing

bars, cement, steel sections, shutters, pre-cast segments etc. are to be stored and
sufficient land is required for storage of these materials.
5.7.8.2Since the area of land being acquired permanently at most of the stations is just
sufficiently limited, the land required for construction depots purpose is identified
separately, in the vicinity of the stations on temporary acquisition basis. The areas
proposed for such purpose in eastern & western segments are indicated in Table
5.7.4 & 5.7.5 respectively. These sites will be obtained on lease temporarily for the
construction period. After completion of construction, these will be handed over
back to the land owning agency.
5.7.8.3Approximately, 1.33 Hectares. of private land is proposed for construction depot

purpose in eastern segment. In case of western segment, the construction depots
are located in those plots, which are proposed for permanent acquisition. Presently
the proposed sites are vacant. The areas are identified based on availability as
vacant on date. At the time of construction, depending up on the need %
requirements the location and size can be reassessed and temporary land
acquisitions can be made accordingly.

Table 5.7.4
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION DEPOT SITES – EASTERN SEGMENT
Land Utilization
Area in Land
S. No. Plot No Location During Remarks
Sq.m Owner ship
Construction
Construction depot
1 CDAN Open space of W.Rly 2100 Govt. Temp.Acquisition
for Andheri station
Open space close to WEH Construction depot
2 CDE1 1755 Pvt. Comm -Do-
station for WEH station
Construction depot @ Chakala Construction depot
3 CDE2 1435 Pvt. Comm -Do-
station for Chakala station
Construction depot
Open space close to Airport
4 CDE3 1670 for Airport Road Pvt. Comm -Do-
Road station
station
Segment casting
5 CDE3A Open space near Sahar airport 50000 Govt. -Do-
yard
Construction depot
Open space close to Marol
6 CDE4 2130 for Marol Naka Pvt. Comm -Do-
Naka station
station
Construction depot
Open space close to Saki
7 CDE5 2400 for Saki Naka Pvt. Comm -Do-
Naka station
station
Construction depot Not available. To
Open space close to Subash
8 CDE6 0 for Subash Nagar Pvt. Comm be identified the
Nagar station
station time of execution
Construction depot
Open space close to Asalpha
9 CDE7 1837 for Asalpha Road Pvt. Comm
Road station
station
Construction depot Not available. To
Open space close to
10 CDE8 0 for Ghatkopar Metro Pvt. Comm be identified the
Ghatkopar Metro station
station time of execution
Total 63327
Govt. 52100
Pvt.Comm 11227
Table 5.7.5
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION DEPOT SITES – WESTERN SEGMENT
Land Utilization
Area in Land
S. No. Plot No Location During Remarks
Sq.m owner ship
Construction
Proposed for
Permanent
Construction depot
acquisition for
1 CD1W1 Open space in School 2530 @ Azad Nagar Govt.
traffic
station
Integration(STW1
P1&3)
2 CD1W1 Open space in Sports club 744 -Do- Govt. -Do-

Proposed for
Construction depot Permanent
Land Identified for Maintenance
3 CDW2 3000 @ D.N.Nagar Govt. acquisition for
depot
Station maintenance
Depot(DPP3)
Proposed for
Permanent
Open area behind Seven Construction depot acquisition for
4 CDW3 4000 Govt.
Bungalows Bus depot @ Versova Station Property
Development
(W3PD)
Total 10274
Note: Since the construction depots are proposed in the plots proposed for permanent acquisition, separate
land acquisition is not required.
5.7.9 Segment Casting Yard
Large numbers of pre-cast segments are required for construction of elevated

structures for which a large open area is required for setting up of casting yard. As
far as possible, this area should be close to the site, easily accessible and away
from habitation. Considering the various factors, it is proposed to setup the
segment-casting yard at the land identified for Maintenance Depot at D.N.Nagar
station.
In fact, for a corridor of this length, one yard is sufficient but due to the physical
obstruction i.e., W. Rly. tracks it is suggested to provide separate casting yards
for Western segment & Eastern Segment.
For Western segment, it can be located in the land identified for maintenance
depot at D. N. Nagar. For Eastern segment, the vacant land available near Sahar
Airport can be taken as lease/ temporary acquisition basis during construction
stage.
5.7.10 Summary of Land Requirements
Abstract of land requirements for different components of this corridor is given in

Table 5.7.6 and are summarized below:
Table 5.7.6
SUMMARY OF LAND REQUIREMENT
PERMANENT TEMPORARY TDR(Tra

REMARKS
ACQUISITION(Sqm)
ACQUISITION(Sqm) nsfer of
S.NO Develop
Pvt. Pvt. Pvt.
Pvt. Res Govt. Govt. ment
Comm Res Comm
Rights)
Stn.entry/ exit,Traffic
Integration, RSS, Radio
1 1229 201581 NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL
Tower etc. in EASTERN
Segment

Stn.entry/ exit,Traffic
Integration, Maintenance
2 122804 532 312 NIL NIL NIL 2217
depot, RSS, Radio Tower etc.
in WESTERN Segment
Construction Depots , Casting
3 NIL NIL NIL NIL 11227 52100 NIL yard etc. in EASTERN
SEGMENT
Since, located in the locations
4 NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL proposed for permanent
acquisition.
Total 124033 202113 312 0 11227 52100 2217
Grand Total 326458(32.64Ha) 63327(6.33Ha) 2217
5.7.11RELOCATION / RESETTLEMENT
The project involves relocation of few shops, commercial cum residential buildings
and hutments along the alignment as discussed in Chapter 10.0. Compensation for
relocation of these affected structures shall be paid and it has been considered in the
project cost estimate. The alignment has been so chosen, that it remains mostly
within the government land. However, between Andheri & Azad Nagar station and
between Versova Station & dead end of the alignment. Some private land would be
required for acquisition due to limited right of way.
5.7.12 PROPERTY DEVELOPMENT

5.7.12.1General
Like most rail-based mass urban transport systems, this line also, though financially
unviable, is economically attractive and needs financial structuring to make it
financially viable, as well. Development and commercial utilisation of land and air
space along/close to this transport system and its facilities are therefore, considered
essential to supplement financial resources for construction and operation of the
system.
Economic reforms, globalisation and privatisation have brought enormous changes in

financial, economic and employment sectors in the country. Economic growth is
targeted at around 6% per annum. Information technology has led to the drastic
changes in the urban life style. Cities, particularly the metros, contribute substantially
towards economic growth. Urban population has been doubling almost every 20
years, during the last five decades in India. Markets are growing in numbers and size.
Cities are expanding horizontally and vertically. The demand for real estate is
accordingly increasing. It is, therefore, considered that real estate, if developed along
this corridor, will be popular and will fetch good returns, particularly in view of the fact
that practically this entire corridor alignment lies in well developed built up areas.
5.7.12.2Identification of Sites for Property Development

To ensure fast implementation of the proposals and optimization of earnings, the

following criteria have been kept in view:
• Land plots to be close to the proposed MRTS corridor,
• Land plots should be vacant and owned preferably by a Government agency.
• Proposed usage to be in conformity with provisions of MPD-2001.
• Availability of adequate infrastructural support and optimum potential for
commercial utilization and early high returns.
To supplement financial resources for construction and operation of the system, it is

proposed to develop the following sites, near to the station locations for commercial
exploitation. In Eastern segment, no suitable land could be identified for property
development. In case of western segment, two locations have been identified for
property development as below:
1. Versova metro station- The Property development will be done in the air space of
the area proposed for acquisition towards traffic integration at Versova station. The
area will be about 2000Sqm.
2. D.N.Nagar Maintenance Depot - The Property development will be done in the

vacant space left over after providing all the depot facilities at D.N.Nagar and air
space above the depot. The area will be about 3000Sqm.
5.7.12.3Methodology of Property Development
Process of property development requires land, labour, capital, entrepreneurship and

management as major inputs. Following steps are involved in the process:
• To obtain land free from all encumbrances with a clear title.

• To obtain clearances of the concerned government and local authorities for
proposed usage, ground coverage, FAR, height and other basic controls and
availability of essential services like water supply, sewers, electric supply,
approach roads, etc.
• To assess demand and optimum usage and expected returns.
• To prepare architectural plans/models and obtain sanctions of concerned
authorities.
• To prepare construction plans, structural designs, etc. for implementation.
• To appoint executing agency and create supervising organisation.
• To sell the developed property and realise the proceeds thereof.
• To allow the property on long term lease.
Property development and its transfer can be under taken by MMRDA either by
themselves or in collaboration with a builder/developer. Since it involves not only
heavy financial investment but also real estate expertise and risk, it is considered
better to undertake this activity in collaboration with some established
builder/developer of repute on pre-agreed terms regarding individual responsibilities
and various related financial aspects.

5.7.12.4Appointment of Builder/Developer
After selection of property development sites, taking over the land and obtaining
preliminary clearances including usage, FAR, ground coverage, height and other
basic controls, MMRDA may short list a number of property developers/builders
(Indians and Foreigners).
MMRDA may award the right to develop/build and sell the property on its land to a
collaborator through a process of short listing followed by open competitive bidding.
The bidder who offers highest up-front premium and most attractive terms and time
frame may be awarded the work. The builder may book/sell the proposed property to
purchasers as the building activity proceeds. The builder/developer will pay MMRDA
specific amount of sums on pre-agreed time frame and back his promise by bank
guarantees.
5.7.12.5 Requirements of Electric Power
For the purpose of assessing power demand for the proposed commercial
development along the corridor, it has been considered that specific power demand
will be about 200-W/m2 of built-up area. This power shall be availed from the
respective nearby distribution sub-stations.
5.7.12.6 Property Development in D.N.Nagar Depot Area
The land identified for depot at DN Nagar is limited and the approach ramp for
ascending /descending the alignment from elevated position to ground and then to
elevated position is not available. If, such a ramp is located on JP road, it would block
the cross roads and occupies more space on ground and becomes a physical barrier
on JP Road for the developments on either side. Hence, the depot is proposed in
elevated position.
In the depot, the track and it’s related facilities are planned in elevation position.
Other facilities such as material store, staff office, water tanks etc. are planned at
grade. Due to the supporting structural arrangement of the elevated depot, the
feasibility of utilizing the ground portion can be ascertained only after detailed design
of the depot. The inter corridor link between East-West & North- South corridors
would occupy some space above the depot. The rail level in the depot will be about
12m above the ground level and the inter-corridor link line will be at a height of about
20m form the existing ground level. Hence, space above 25m from the ground level
will be available for commercial exploitation, subjected to prevailing building bye-laws
in terms of FAR/FSI etc.

Ch. 6 – Stabling-Cum-Inspection Depots
Chapter 6
STABLING-CUM-INSPECTION DEPOTS
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Details of “Versova-Andheri-Ghatkoper”, the East West corridor of Mumbai MRTS are

as below:
S. No. Parameter EW Corridor

1 Gauge (Nominal) 1435 mm
2 Route length 11.07 Km
This report covers following aspects of D N Nagar depot based on the details at
Annexure-I: -
• Conceptual design and layout of Stabling Shed, Inspection shed, minor repairs
and cleaning of Rolling Stock.
• Operational and functional safety requirements
• Ancillary buildings for other maintenance facilities
• Electrical & Mechanical Services, Power supply and Distribution system.
• Water Supplies, Drainage & Sewerage.
• This report provides conceptual design and will only work as a guide for detailed
design later.
6.2 MAINTENANACE PHILOSOPHY
The main outlines of the philosophy followed are:
¾ Monitoring of the performance of equipment by condition monitoring of key

parameters. The concept is to evolve the need based maintenance regime, which
can be suitably configured in the form of schedules like weekly/15 days check,
“45 days check”, annual check, “IOH” and “POH”.
¾ Labour intensive procedures will be kept to the minimum. More automation with
state of the art machinery to ensure quality with reliability.
¾ Multi skilling of the Maintenance staff to ensure quality and productivity in their
performance.
¾ Energy conservation shall be given due attention

6.3 LOCATION OF THE DEPOT & ITS VARIOUS AUXILLARY BUILDINGS
The D N Nagar Depot is planned at an elevated level as space for providing ramp is
not available to construct the depot at ground level. A two level depot is providing in
Bangkok also. The Stabling Shed, Inspection Shed, Blow Down Plant, Interior
Cleaning Plant, Automatic Washing Plant, Emergency Building, Tower Wagon Shed,
ETU Workshop are planned on the deck. Some auxiliary buildings are proposed at
ground level under the Deck. These buildings will be DCOS Store, Time &Security
Offices, Light Vehicle parking area, Depot Substation, Canteen, Workshop Manager
Office & P. Way Office. Material Transfer Lift is planned for transfer of materials from
ground to deck & vice versa. Balance space can be used for housing of staff &
property development. The depot layout is indicated in Fig. 6.1.
6.4 APPROACH OF MAINTENANCE FOR ROLLING STOCK IN D N NAGAR DEPOT

OF MUMBAI MRTS
D N Nagar Depot will be used for stabling of Rolling Stocks , their cleaning
,inspections and minor repairs. These Rakes will be operational on Versova-Andheri-
Ghatkopar section of Mumbai MRTS.
For major repairs, IOH, POH and wheel reprofiling works, the mothershed workshop
located at the end of NS Corridor at MITHCHOWKI is to be used by transferring rakes
through Rake Transfer Line.
Rolling Stocks will approach from Versova Station to the Depot.
6.5 ROLLING STOCK MAINTENANCE NEEDS:
The following maintenance schedule has been envisaged for conceptual design of
depot assuming 350 km of running per train per day.
Type of Interval Work content Locations

Schedule
Daily Daily Check on the train condition and Stabling Bays
function at every daily service
completion. Internal cleaning / mopping
of floor and walls with vacuum cleaner.
Weekly 7 Days Check on the safety and reliability of Inspection
check critical equipment, General visual Bays
inspection, testing of systems
“A” Service 5,000 Km Detailed inspection of “weekly Check” Inspection
Check (15 days) tasks plus testing of systems, Bays
replacement of oils & lubricants and
consumables
“B” Service 15,000 Detailed inspection of ‘A’ type tasks Inspection
Check Km plus items at multiples of 15,000 Km Bays
(45 days) (‘B’ type tasks)

Intermediate 300,000 Check and testing of all sub- Workshop

Overhaul Km assemblies (Electrical + Mechanical).
(IOH) ( 3 Years) Replacement of parts and rectification,
trial run
Periodical 600,000 Dismantling of all sub-assemblies, Workshop
Overhaul Km bogies, suspension system, traction
(POH) ( 6 Years) motor, gear, control equipment, air-
conditioning units etc. Checking repair
and replacement as necessary.
Inspection and trial
6.5.1 Washing Needs of Roling Stock
The Metro trains are maintained to a high degree of cleanliness and therefore needs
the following schedules
S. Kind of Inspection Maint. Time Maintenance Place

No. Cycle Reqd. for
Checking
1. Outside Cleaning (wet 3 Days 10 mins Single Pass through
washing on automatic Automatic washing
washing plant) plant of Depot
2. Outside heavy Cleaning (wet 30 days 3 Hrs (Automatic washing
washing on automatic Plant & washing line)
washing plant and Front
Face, Vestibule/Buffer area,
Floor, walls inside/outside
and roof. Manually)
6.5.2 Operational Features
The rake induction and withdrawal to open line will be primarily from the stabling shed.
Movement from depot to the open line is so planned that the headway of open line is
not affected. Simultaneous receipt and dispatch of trains from depot to open line is not
feasible in the present site constraint. Either of the two activities will be done
effectively without effecting the train operation on the main line. The stabling as well
as the Inspection lines would be interlocked with the open line thereby induction of
train from the stabling and Inspection lines would be safe and without loss of time.
There would be transfer track on the incoming line to facilitate the placement of rake
in the depot by Operation Control Centre (OCC) even though the further path inside
the depot is not clear.
An emergency line will be provided from which an emergency rescue vehicle may be
dispatched to open line in the event of emergency if necessary.

As per Annexure –I, taking into consideration the rake requirement (which is 20
rakes) on this corridor for the horizon year 2031, 11 rakes shall be stabled in the
stabling shed, 2 rakes will be under inspection in Inspection shed, 1 in the Interior
Cleaning Plant for maintenance and 4 rakes shall be stabled at the termination
stations. 2 rakes will be engaged in its heavy repair and maintenance in the
Workshop. So, a minimum of 11 stabling lines will suffice the requirements.
The scheduled inspections shall be carried out during the day off peak and night. One
& half inspection lines are used for weekly/15 days schedule per day for 3 rakes. So in
7 days 21 rakes are checked on 1 & ½ lines. ’B’ & ‘C’ check requires half the day, so
½ inspection line is for “B”&”C” check. ½ Inspection line will be used for 20 rakes “B” &
“C” check. And this ½ line is vacant for 25 days. So, a minimum of 2 inspection lines
are planned.
6.6 INFRASTRUCTURE FACILITIES PLANNED AT D N Nagar Depot:
6.6.1 Design of Inspection Shed Capacity at D N Nagar Depot
Following facilities shall be provided to include the ability to carry out the inspection, of
the following equipments of rolling stock fleet:
• Electrical components;
• Electronics; PA/ PIS
• Mechanical components;
• Batteries;
• Rolling stock air conditioning;
• Brake modules;
• Bogie; traction motor
• Vehicle doors, windows and internal fittings.
Each of Inspection shed lines will be able to cater one rake during the day’s off peak
and one at night time when all the rakes return to the depot. Following are the design
calculations of for the Inspection shed line requirements.
S. Schedule Designed No. of lines for

No. capacity Designed capacity
(4 car length)
1 Daily safety check on 11 rakes 11
stabling lines
2 Weekly/15 days 21 rakes 1line during day &
Schedule night+1 line only during
night (with sunken floor)
3 45 days Schedule 45 rakes 1 line during day (with
sunken floor)

4 Unscheduled Line Unscheduled 1 line (interior cleaning

Maintenance line can be used in day
time or the sunken floor
line in the Unscheduled
workshop.)
An Inspection shed consisting of two lines & one bay in between the lines of 160m x
15m is planned for the depot. The Inspection shed bay will have two inspection lines
with sunken floor. The floor will be sunken by 1100mm. The centerline of both the
tracks will be 8000mm apart. The centerline of tracks would be at a distance of
3500mm from the columns of shed. Roof Inspection platforms supported on the
columns shall be provided. There would be lighting below the rail level to facilitate the
under frame inspection. 415V 3 phase 50 Hz, 230V 1 phase 50 Hz AC supply and
pneumatic supply shall also be made available on each inspection shed columns.
6.6.2 Stabling Lines in Depot
In the yard 11 number 6-car length-stabling lines are planned at D N Nagar Depot.
Two (2) rakes would be housed in the inspection shed. The length of 6 cars Rolling
Stock is approx 133.88m. Stabling lines are designed for 160m lengths or more to
cater for provision of the friction buffer stops and the signaling interlocking needs,
assuming the speed of the Rolling Stock in the depot to be 25 kmph. It is
recommended to cover the stabling lines.
The space between stabling lines shall be sufficient to include pathway to be

constructed between each track to provide access for internal train cleaning.
6.6.3 Automatic Coach Washing Plant
Provision is made for Rolling Stock exterior surfaces to be washed using a fully
automated Train Washing System, with a throughput capacity of approximately six
trains per hour. This shall be accommodated in the 30m x 10m area. As per the site
constraints, direct entry of train from Train Wash Plant to the stabling shed is not
possible. This movement would be through Z Shunting.
6.6.4 Washing Apron
Monthly heavy Cleaning of interior walls, floors, seats, windows glasses etc, outside
heavy Cleaning, Front/ rear Face, Vestibule/ Buffer area, outside walls and roof shall
be done manually in the interior cleaning plant. Outside Heavy Cleaning Rolling Stock
is in 30 days maintenance schedule, requiring 3hrs for 1 rake.
6.6.5 Power Supplies
Power supply arrangement for depot is to be made separately to take care of

operational as well as yard lighting load. An auxiliary substation has been planned for
catering to the power supply requirement of the whole depot and workshop. Details of
connected load feeder shall be worked out. Taking diversity factor of 0.5 the maximum
demands shall be computed.

6.6.6 Standby Power Supply
The standby power supply is proposed through DG set with AMF panel. The capacity
of DG set will be adequate to supply all essential loads without over loading. This will
also be housed in the Substation.
6.6.7 Water Supply, Sewerage and Drainage Works
In house facilities such as tube wells shall be developed or sufficient supply from BMC
to be ensured for the water supply of the entire depot cum workshop. Sewerage,
storm water drainage shall be given due care while designing the depot for efficient
system functioning. Past records of Municipal Corporation shall be used to design the
drainage system. Rainwater harvesting would be given due emphasis to charge the
under ground reserves.
6.6.8 Unscheduled Workshop
This workshop will have two lines - one will be at floor level and the other will have a
sunken floor same as the Inspection line in the Inspection shed. The latter line will be
used for unscheduled attention of Rolling Stock.
Vehicles like diesel locomotive, electric tractor, tower wagons etc shall be housed and
given required inspection attention on the former floor level line. This Unscheduled
workshop will be built adjacent to the Inspection shed. However for the heavy lifting
needs, these vehicles may be taken to main workshop.
6.6.9 Watch Towers
There shall be provision of 2 no. of watch towers for the vigilance of depot activities.
6.6.10 Shed and Buildings
The shed and buildings normally provided in the depot with their sizes and brief
functions are indicated in Annexure-II. Some of these buildings are not depicted on
the layout drawing. At the detailed design stage depending upon the land availability,
the decision to have these buildings can be taken. These can then be architecturally
and functionally grouped.
6.6.11 Plant And Machinery
Requirement of major plants and machinery, which are vital for operational needs, is
given in Annexure-III. Total cost incurred in Machines & Plants will be approximately
Rs. 40 Cr.

ANNEXURE-I
Brief details guiding the design of Stabling-cum-Inspection depot of MUMBAI MRTS

(Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar)
1.1 SALIENT FEATURES OF ROLLING STOCK:
S. No. Parameter (East - West) LINE - 1

1 Vehicle dimensions
Length (including coupler) DT-M-T-M-M-DT : 133880 mm
Width 3200mm
Height 4118mm
2 Coach construction Lightweight stainless steel body
3 Tare Weight DT (42.0T), T (42.0T), M (42.0T)

4 Axle load 17T per axle
5 Propulsion system 3 phase drive system with VVVF control
6 Type of traction supply 25KV AC Overhead collection
1.3 REQUIREMENT OF COACHES for Versova- Ghatkopar Corridor

(Line-1 Route Length: 11.07 km)
Year Head Cars Rake requirement No Train Composition
way of
Cars
Bare Traffic R&M Total
Reserve Rakes
2011 5 4 11 1 2 14 56 DT-M-M-DT
2021 4 4 13 1 2 16 64 DT-M-M-DT
2031 3 4 17 1 2 20 80 DT-M-M-DT

ANNEXURE-II
LIST OF BUILDINGS FOR D N Nagar Depot
S. No. Name of Size Brief Function

Building
1 Inspection Shed 160 x 15m Designed for the servicing of 126cars for
7day schedule & 270 cars for 45 day
schedule inspections.
Associated 60 x 8 m Rooms d/ storey for carrying out the

sections inspection activity
Sun shade roof 160 x 57m For stabling 11 rakes of 6 cars each.
2. DCOS Stores & 42.5 x 42.5m (i) Stocking of spares for regular &
Offices emergency requirement including
consumable items.
(ii) This store caters for the
requirement of depot for rolling
including stock & other disciplines.
(iii) To be provided with computerized
inventory control.
Goods Platform Loading/ Unloading of material received
with Ramp by road.
3. Elect. Substation 25x22 m To cater for normal and emergency
power supply for depot, workshop,
service and all other ancillary buildings,
Essential power supply for essential
loads and security light.
4. ETU Shed 80 x 30 m Stabling and routine maintenance of
cum (partly shunting engine, tower wagon etc. &
Traction repair double Traction maintenance depot
depot & storey) For maintenance of lifts / escalators and
E&M repair other General service works.
shop
5. Cycle & Scooter 25 x 6 m To park cycles and Scooter
Stand
6 Auto Coach 30 x10 m For automatic washing of coaches
washing plant washing apron is for collection of
7 Washing Apron 140x 6.5m Dripping water and its proper drainage.
8 Blow down plant 31 x 14m
10. P. Way Office, 80 x 20m For Track maintenance
11. Security office & 15 x 8m For security personnel.
Time Office For time Punching
Garages (4 Nos) Approx 6 x For parking vehicle jeep, truck etc.
8m

S. No. Name of Size Brief Function

Building
12. Check post 5x3 For security check of incoming / outgoing
(2 Numbers) staff material and coaches.
13. Watch tower 3.5x2.5 For security of the depot especially
(2 Nos.) during nighttime.
14. O.H raw water 1,00,000 Ltrs Storage of water, capacity 1,00,000 litres
Tank Capacity each.
15. Pump house 7.3x5.4 Submersible type pump planned with
Bore well 200 mm 200-mm diameter bore well.
16. Work shop 30x20m Office of Depot in charge
Manager Office
17 ATP& ATO 4x5 m To keep equipments of ATP/ATO.
Room
18 Waste Water 12x6m For treating the discharge waters of the
Treatment Plant depot and remove the oil, acids etc.
before discharging, with U/G tank.
19 Canteen 400 sqm To cater staff of depot and workshop.
Obligatory as per statutory requirements.
20. Compressor 12 x 6m To supply pneumatic air to servicing
room 1 no shed
Note
1 Some of these buildings are not depicted on the layout map. Depending on the
administrative decision, this shall be suitably done at the detailed design stage
incorporating the site topography, architectural nitty gritty and minor adjustment
in sizes looking to the available land.
2 Some of the buildings like stabling shed; security office etc shall be pre-
engineered structure. The decision in this regard may be taken at the detailed
design stage.

ANNEXURE-III
M&P required for Depot for VARSOVA – ANDHERI – GHATKOPER

SECTION
S No. Equipment
Under floor Pit wheel lathe withChip crusher and conveyor for lathe on pit.
1
&Winch capstan for under floor wheel lathe
Synchronized pit jacks for two car lifting consisting of 8 jack system with Mobile
2
lifting jacks-12& 15T
3 Turntable for bogies
4 Automatic Washing plant for Metro cars.
5 Diesel Shunting Engine
6 Electric bogie tractor for pulling cars and bogies inside workshop
Re-railing equipment consisting of rail cum road vehicle and associated jack
7
system etc
Cherry picker/ Snorkel. High lift platform type vehicle to rach viaduct and OHE
8
from road
9 Turn table for one car
10 Accommodation bogie 2 car sets for Metro Cars
11 Jib Crane
12 Mobile portal type A,B & Jib Crane,Mobilejib crane (overhang type)
13 Car body stands
14 Underframe & Bogie blowing plant
15 Vertical carousel storage system
16 Bogie cleaning plant
17 Rail fed Bogie wash plant
18 Ultrasonic cleaning tank
19 Ultrasonic machine for cleaning electronic equipment
20 Welding equipments (Mobilewelding, oxyacetelene, fixed arc welding)
Set of machine tools(one radial drilling machine, one universal milling machine,
21 two slide lathes, one panel sawing machine, one guillotine shears, one cutting
machine.
22 Mobile safety steps
23 Mobile lifting table
24 Work lift platform
25 Fork lift tractor
26 Pallet trucks
27 Minor equipment and collective tools
28 Electric and pneumatic tools
29 Measuring and testing equipment
30 Axle shaft inspection station
31 Tool kits
32 Floor cleaning machine
33 EMU battery charger

34 Battery Charger (for road vehicles)

35 Water de-mineralizing plant (Distillation plant)
36 Bearing puller & press
37 Road vehicles (pickup van/ truck)
38 Industrial furniture
39 Storage racks
40 High-pressure washing pump for front and rear end cleaning of cars.
Simulator with 3 degrees of freedon on motion for the modern rolling stock, to
41
train the drivers.
42 Cleaning booth for TM
43 Transformer oil purification plant
44 Painting booth for separate parts
45 Induction heater
46 Vertical boring machine
47 Press for wheel fitting and removal
48 Surface wheel lathe
49 Axle journal turning and burnishing lathe
50 Special jigs and fixtures and test benches for Rolling stock

Ch. 7 – Train Operation
CHAPTER 7
TRAIN OPERATION
7.1 Operation Philosophy
The underlying operation philosophy is to make the MRT System more

attractive and economical, the main features being:
- Selecting the most optimum frequency of Train services to meet
sectional capacity requirement during peak hours on most of the
sections
- Economical & optimum train service frequency not only during
peak period (3 minutes Headway), but also during off-peak period
( 15 minutes headway),
- A short train consist (4 coaches) with high frequency service to be
suitably increased to 6 coaches and 8 coaches as the transport
demand picks up. Basic suit selected is one motor coach and one
Trailer coach.
- multi-tasking of train operation and maintenance staff.
7.2 Stations
Mumbai Metro Rail System consists of three lines. Line 1 – Varsova -

Andheri-Ghatkopar Section is of the length of 12 kms with 12 stations.
List of stations for Line-I is given in Table 7.1.
TABLE 7.1
List of Stations Line-I
Varsova ' to Ghatkopar
Sr. NAME OF STATION Remarks

No.
1. Varsova ELE
2. Lokhandwala ELE
3. DN Nagar ELE
4. Andheri Metro ELE
5 Weh ELE
6. Chakala ELE
7. JB nagar ELE
8. Marol Naka ELE
9. Saki Naka ELE
10. Santosh Nagar ELE
11. Alalapha ELE
12. Ghatkopar ELE

7.3 TRAIN OPERATION PLAN
The salient features of the proposed train operation plan are:
- Running of services for 19 hours of the day (5 AM to Midnight)

with a station dwell time of 30 seconds,
- Make up time of 5-10% with 8-12% coasting.
- Scheduled speed of 32 kmph.
7.3.1 Traffic Demand
Peak hour peak direction traffic demands (PHPDT) for different years
for the purpose of planning are indicated in the Table 7.2.
TABLE 7.2
Peak hour peak direction traffic (PHPDT) Demand
LINE – 1 YEAR
2011 2021 2031
Varsova – Andheri - Ghatkopar Corridor 31126 39316 50912
Considering 60% traffic demand for stand 15563 23590 30547
alone section
The above demand precludes use of Light Rail Vehicle. Considering

the future expected population increase in a city like Mumbai, the use
of Mass Rapid Transit Rail Vehicle of medium capacity has been
considered.
7.3.2 Train formation
To meet the above projected traffic demand, the possibility of running

trains with composition of 4 car, 6 car, and 8 car with different headway
of 2 minutes to 15 minutes has been examined .
The basic unit of 4 car train comprising of DTC-MC-MC-DTC similar to

Delhi Metro configuration has been selected because of following
considerations: -
(I) Availability of Standard design with proven performance.

(II) Matching of varying hourly traffic demand with Passenger
Carrying Capacity of Trains having 4 car or 6 car composition for
different headways.
7.3.2.1Composition
Car composition adopted for year 2011, 2021 & 2031 is given in Fig
7.1 & 7.2

4 Car Train Composition DTC + MC + MC + DTC

6 Car Train Composition DTC + MC + TC + MC + MC + DTC
8 Car Train Composition DTC + MC + TC + MC +TC+ MC + MC +
DTC
DTC : Driving Trailer Car
MC : Motor Car
TC : Trailer Car
7.3.2.2Capacity
DTC : 282 passenger ( Sitting-43, Crush Standing –239)

TC /MC : 307 passenger (Sitting-50, Crush Standing –257)
4 Car Train ; 1178 passenger (Sitting-186,Crush Standing –992)
6 Car Train : 1792 passenger (Sitting-286, Crush Standing –1506)
8 Car Train : 2408 passenger (Sitting-386, Crush Standing –2020)
The above capacities are @ 6 standees per square meter.
7.3.3 Train Operation Plan
Based on the above consideration, the Train operation plan (headway

and train composition) for the year 2011, 2021 and 2031 are given as
under-
• Year 2011

planned with 4-car trains at 5 minutes headway the first year of
operation i.e. 2011 with Peak Hour Peak Direction Capacity of
14136 (Graph-1). The capacity planned is less than the peak
demand. This optimum capacity decided might slightly cause over
crowding on few inter station section, but will avoid excessive under
loading on most of the sections.
• Year 2021

planned with 4-car trains at 4 minutes headway for the year of
operation i.e. 2021 to meet the Peak Hour Peak Direction demand
of 23590 (Graph-2). The capacity planned is less than the peak
crowding on three inter station sections, but will avoid excessive
under loading on most of the sections.
• Year 2031

planned with 4 - car trains at 3 minutes headway for the year of
operation i.e. 2031 to meet the Peak Hour Peak Direction Demand

of 30547 (Graph-3). The capacity planned is less than the peak

crowding on some inter station sections, but will avoid excessive
under loading on most of the balance sections.
In case of any mismatch in the capacity provided and the actual

traffic, the capacity can be moderated suitably by either varying the
rake composition or adjusting the Headway .The PHPDT capacity
provided on both the corridors in different years is given in Table
7.3
TABLE 7.3
CAPACITY PROVIDED
Varsova – Andheri – Ghatkopar Corridor
Year 2011 2021 2031

Cars/trains 4 4 4
Head way (Minutes) 5 4 3
PHPDT Demand 15563 23590 30547
PHPDT Capacity 14136 17670 23560
Available

Line - 1
Varsova to Ghatkopar Corridor
4 car train, Headway 4 min
PHPDT FOR YEAR 2011
S.N FROM TO Traffic Train

Demand carrying
in PHPDT capacity
1 Varsova D N Nagar 183 14136

2 DN Nagar Azad Nagar 1675 14136
3 Azad Nagar Andheri 7416 14136
4 Andheri Weh 15563 14136
5 Weh Chakala 15242 14136
6 Chakala Airport Road 14610 14136
7 Airport Road Marol Naka 14613 14136
8 Marol Naka Saki Naka 12905 14136
9 Saki Naka Subhash Nagar 12389 14136
10 Subhash Nagar Alalapha Road 12389 14136
11 Alalapha Road Ghatkopar 12223 14136
TOTAL
* Considering 50% traffic demand for stand alone section

Graph-1

Line - 1
PHPDT FOR YEAR 2021

Demand carrying
in PHPDT capacity
1 Varsova DN Nagar 365 17670
TOTAL

Graph-2

Line - 1
PHPDT FOR YEAR 2031

Demand carrying
in PHPDT capacity
1 Varsova DN Nagar 430 23560
TOTAL

Graph-3

7.3.4 Train frequency
a) The train operation plan provides for 5-minute headway during peak
hours and 15 minutes headway during lean hours to keep the
services attractive in the year 2011.
b) In the year 2021, train headway is planned at 4 minutes during peak

hours and 12 minutes during lean hours.
c) Peak time train headway is proposed to be reduced to 3 minutes in

the year 2031 while lean time headway is kept at 10 minutes.
d) No, services are proposed between 00.00 hrs. to 5.00 hrs. which
are reserved for maintenance of infrastructure and rolling stock.
7.3.5 Hourly Train Operation plan
The hourly distribution of daily transport capacity and the directional

split is presented in Table 7.4, 7.5 and 7.6 for years 2011, 2021 and
2031 respectively.
The number of trains proposed to be operated daily during different

hours in each direction for the year 2011 (first year of operation) for
each section of the network is presented in Table 7.7
The number of trains proposed to be operated daily for each section for
the year 2021 and 2031 is presented in Table 7.8 & 7.9 respectively.
7.3.6 Hourly capacity
Based on daily train operation plan, figures of Peak Hour Peak

direction capacity have been worked out for every hour of the day for
operation in year 2011, 2021 and 2031. Peak Hour Peak direction
capacity have been indicated for every hour of day for line 1 in Table
7.10, 7.11 & 7.12.

TABLE 7.4
Hourly Distribution of Transport Capacity and Directional Split
( YEAR - 2011)
4 Car, 5 Minutes Headway
Time of Day % of Daily Traffic Directional Split

Capacity To Ghatkoper To Versova
5 to 6 3.09% 55% 45%
6 to 7 3.70% 55% 45%
7 to 8 6.17% 55% 45%
8 to 9 7.41% 55% 45%
9 to 10 7.41% 55% 45%
10 to 11 7.41% 55% 45%
11 to12 6.17% 55% 45%
12 to 13 3.70% 55% 45%
13 to 14 3.70% 55% 45%
14 to 15 3.70% 55% 45%
15 to 16 3.70% 55% 45%
16 to 17 6.17% 55% 45%
17 to 18 7.41% 55% 45%
18 to 19 7.41% 55% 45%
19 to 20 7.41% 55% 45%
20 to 21 6.17% 55% 45%
21 to 22 3.70% 55% 45%
22 to 23 3.09% 55% 45%
23 to 24 2.47% 55% 45%

TABLE 7.5
( YEAR - 2021)

Capacity
To Ghatkoper To Versova
5 to 6 2.58% 53% 47%
6 to 7 3.09% 53% 47%
7 to 8 6.19% 53% 47%
8 to 9 7.73% 53% 47%
9 to 10 7.73% 53% 47%
10 to 11 7.73% 53% 47%
11 to12 6.19% 53% 47%
12 to 13 3.09% 53% 47%
13 to 14 3.09% 53% 47%
14 to 15 3.09% 53% 47%
15 to 16 3.09% 53% 47%
16 to 17 6.19% 53% 47%
17 to 18 7.73% 53% 47%
18 to 19 7.73% 53% 47%
19 to 20 7.73% 53% 47%
20 to 21 6.19% 53% 47%
21 to 22 5.15% 53% 47%
22 to 23 3.09% 53% 47%
23 to 24 2.58% 53% 47%

TABLE 7.6
( YEAR - 2031)

Capacity To Ghatkoper To Versova
5 to 6 2.65% 52% 48%
6 to 7 4.42% 52% 48%
7 to 8 5.31% 52% 48%
8 to 9 6.64% 52% 48%
9 to 10 8.85% 52% 48%
10 to 11 6.64% 52% 48%
11 to12 5.31% 52% 48%
12 to 13 4.42% 52% 48%
13 to 14 4.42% 52% 48%
14 to 15 4.42% 52% 48%
15 to 16 4.42% 52% 48%
16 to 17 5.31% 52% 48%
17 to 18 6.64% 52% 48%
18 to 19 8.85% 52% 48%
19 to 20 6.64% 52% 48%
20 to 21 5.31% 52% 48%
21 to 22 4.42% 52% 48%
22 to 23 2.65% 52% 48%
23 to 24 2.65% 52% 48%

TABLE 7.7
Hourly Train operation plan
( YEAR - 2011)
Time of Day Headway in Minutes No. of Trains per day

UP DN
5 to 6 12 5 5
6 to 7 10 6 6
7 to 8 6 10 10
8 to 9 5 12 12
9 to 10 5 12 12
10 to 11 5 12 12
11 to12 6 10 10
12 to 13 10 6 6
13 to 14 10 6 6
14 to 15 10 6 6
15 to 16 10 6 6
16 to 17 6 10 10
17 to 18 5 12 12
18 to 19 5 12 12
19 to 20 5 12 12
20 to 21 6 10 10
21 to 22 10 6 6
22 to 23 12 5 5
23 to 24 15 4 4
Total No. of trains per

direction per day 162 162
Rake formation : 4 cars

TABLE 7.8
( YEAR - 2021)
UP DN
5 to 6 12 5 5
6 to 7 10 6 6
7 to 8 5 12 12
8 to 9 4 15 15
9 to 10 4 15 15
10 to 11 4 15 15
11 to12 5 12 12
12 to 13 10 6 6
13 to 14 10 6 6
14 to 15 10 6 6
15 to 16 10 6 6
16 to 17 5 12 12
17 to 18 4 15 15
18 to 19 4 15 15
19 to 20 4 15 15
20 to 21 5 12 12
21 to 22 6 10 10
22 to 23 10 6 6
23 to 24 12 5 5


TABLE 7.9
( YEAR - 2031)

UP DN
5 to 6 10 6 6
6 to 7 6 10 10
7 to 8 5 12 12
8 to 9 4 15 15
9 to 10 3 20 20
10 to 11 4 15 15
11 to12 5 12 12
12 to 13 6 10 10
13 to 14 6 10 10
14 to 15 6 10 10
15 to 16 6 10 10
16 to 17 5 12 12
17 to 18 4 15 15
18 to 19 3 20 20
19 to 20 4 15 15
20 to 21 5 12 12
21 to 22 6 10 10
22 to 23 10 6 6
23 to 24 10 6 6


TABLE 7.10
Hourly Capacity Provided
( YEAR - 2011)
Time of Day No of Trains per Hour PHPDT capacity
Available
5 to 6 5 5890
6 to 7 6 7068
7 to 8 10 11780
8 to 9 12 14136
9 to 10 12 14136
10 to 11 12 14136
11 to12 10 11780
12 to 13 6 7068
13 to 14 6 7068
14 to 15 6 7068
15 to 16 6 7068
16 to 17 10 11780
17 to 18 12 14136
18 to 19 12 14136
19 to 20 12 14136
20 to 21 10 11780
21 to 22 6 7068
22 to 23 5 5890
23 to 24 4 4712

TABLE 7.11
( YEAR - 2021)
Available
5 to 6 5 5890
6 to 7 6 7068
7 to 8 12 14136
8 to 9 15 17670
9 to 10 15 17670
10 to 11 15 17670
11 to12 12 14136
12 to 13 6 7068
13 to 14 6 7068
14 to 15 6 7068
15 to 16 6 7068
16 to 17 12 14136
17 to 18 15 17670
18 to 19 15 17670
19 to 20 15 17670
20 to 21 12 14136
21 to 22 10 11780
22 to 23 6 7068
23 to 24 5 5890

TABLE 7.12
( YEAR - 2031)
Available
5 to 6 6 7068
6 to 7 10 11780
7 to 8 12 14136
8 to 9 15 17670
9 to 10 20 23560
10 to 11 15 17670
11 to12 12 14136
12 to 13 10 11780
13 to 14 10 11780
14 to 15 10 11780
15 to 16 10 11780
16 to 17 12 14136
17 to 18 15 17670
18 to 19 20 23560
19 to 20 15 17670
20 to 21 12 14136
21 to 22 10 11780
22 to 23 6 7068
23 to 24 6 7068

7.3.7 Vehicle Kilometer
Based on above planning, after considering maintenance period and

assuming 340 days in service in a year, Vehicle Kilometers for year
2011, 2021 and 2031 are given in Table 7.13
TABLE 7.13
Vehicle Kilometer
(I) Line 1-Varsova to Ghatkopar Corridor
Year 2011 2021 2031
Section Length 12 12 12
No of cars per Train 4 4 4
No of working Days in a year 340 340 340
Number of Trains per day each162 194 226

Way
Daily Train -KM 3888 4656 5424
Annual Train - KM (105) 13.22 15.83 18.44
5
Annual Vehicle - KM (10 ) 52.88 63.32 73.77
7.4 Year wise rake Requirement
Based on Train formation and headway as decided above to meet

Peak Hour Peak Direction Traffic Demand in different years, Rake
requirement has been tabulated in Table 7.14
Requirements of coaches for Line 1 – Varsova - Andheri-Ghatkopar

Section is calculated based on following assumptions-
Assumptions -
1. Train Composition planned as under

4Car Train Composition DTC + MC + MC + DTC
6 Car Train Composition DTC + MC + TC + MC + MC + DTC
2. Train Capacity DTC = 282 (Passengers)
MC/ TC = 307 (passengers)
4 Car Train = 1178 passengers
6 Car Train = 1792 passengers
3. Coach requirement has been calculated based on headway during
Peak hours.

Mumbai Metro
Table –7.14
Rake Requirement
LINE - 1 (Varsova-Andheri-Ghatkopar Corridor)
Train Capacity 4 Car 1506 1178

6 Car 2290 1792
8 Car 3074
Assumed Schedule Speed 32 kmph
Year 2011
Section DISTANCE PHPDT HEADWAY RAKE REQUIREMENT TOTAL RAKE NO OF
KMS Projected Train Maximum MIN BARE TRAFFIC R&M No of CONSIST CARS
Max. Capacity PHPDT RESERVE Rakes
PHPDT capacity
demand available
Varsova-Andheri-Ghatcopar 12 18675.6 1178 14136 5 11 1 2 14 4 Car 56
Year 2021
PHPDT capacity
demand available
Year 2031
PHPDT capacity
demand available

Year 2011 2021 2031

Headway 5 4 3
Cars Reqd 56 64 80
Rakes Reqd 14 16 20
Assumption: Schedule speed is taken as 32 kmph because of sharp curves and steep gradients and being !M+1T combination
Turn round time is taken as 6 min per trip

4. Traffic reserve is taken as one train per section to cater to failure of

train on line and to make up for operational time lost.
5. Repair and maintenance has been estimated as 8 % of total
requirement (Bare +Traffic Reserve) based on IOH & POH interval
of 3 and 6 years.
6. The calculated number of rakes in fraction is rounded off to next
higher number.
7. Schedule speed is taken as 32 Kmph because of presence of
Sharp curves and steep gradients
8. Turn round time is taken as 3 min at terminal stations.
7.5 Cost Estimate
For estimation of cost per coach, cost of DMRC EMU has been taken
as reference because the coach planned for Mumbai Metro is of the
same size. For DMRC, 60 coaches have been imported and 180
coaches are planned for assembling / manufacturing in BEML,
Bangalore. Accordingly various venders for Electrical Systems, PA/PIS,
Air conditioner etc are being developed .It is expected that with little
investment BEML may become a Centre for assimilation of
technology for design & manufacture of modern metro rolling stock and
will be able to manufacture and supply coaches for future metros.
Accordingly cost for coaches of Mumbai metro has been worked out
assuming that certain sub-system and assemblies will be manufactured
indigenously in India and partial components will be imported. In case
coaches are to be imported the cost may vary. The cost estimate is
given in chapter 10.



M&P recommended list for Depot for VARSOVA – ANDHERI –

GHATKOPER SECTION
Sr No. Equipment
Under floor Pit wheel lathe withChip crusher and conveyor for lathe on pit. &Winch capstan
1 for under floor wheel lathe
Synchronized pit jacks for two car lifting consisting of 8 jack system with Mobile lifting
2 jacks-12& 15T
3 Turntable for bogies
4 Automatic Washing plant for Metro cars.
5 Diesel Shunting Engine
6 Electric bogie tractor for pulling cars and bogies inside workshop
7 Re-railing equipment consisting of rail cum road vehicle and associated jack system etc
8 Cherry picker/ Snorkel. High lift platform type vehicle to rach viaduct and OHE from road
9 Turn table for one car
10 Accommodation bogie 2 car sets for Metro Cars
11 Jib Crane
12 Mobile portal type A,B & Jib Crane,Mobilejib crane (overhang type)
13 Car body stands
14 Underframe & Bogie blowing plant
15 Vertical carousel storage system
16 Bogie cleaning plant
17 Rail fed Bogie wash plant
18 Ultrasonic cleaning tank
19 Ultrasonic machine for cleaning electronic equipment
20 Welding equipments (Mobilewelding, oxyacetelene, fixed arc welding)
Set of machine tools(one radial drilling machine, one universal milling machine, two slide
21 lathes, one panel sawing machine, one guillotine shears, one cutting machine.
22 Mobile safety steps
23 Mobile lifting table
24 Work lift platform
25 Fork lift tractor
26 Pallet trucks
27 Minor equipment and collective tools
28 Electric and pneumatic tools
29 Measuring and testing equipment
30 Axle shaft inspection station
31 Tool kits
32 Floor cleaning machine
33 EMU battery charger
34 Battery Charger (for road vehicles)
35 Water de-mineralizing plant (Distillation plant)
36 Bearing puller & press
37 Road vehicles (pickup van/ truck)
38 Industrial furniture
39 Storage racks
40 High-pressure washing pump for front and rear end cleaning of cars.
Simulator with 3 degrees of freedon on motion for the modern rolling stock, to train the
41 drivers.
42 Cleaning booth for TM
43 Transformer oil purification plant

44 Painting booth for separate parts

45 Induction heater
46 Vertical boring machine
47 Press for wheel fitting and removal
48 Wheel lathe
49 Axle journal turning and burnishing lathe
50 Special jigs and fixtures and test benches for Rolling stock

Chapter 8 – Power Supply Arrangements
CHAPTER 8
POWER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS
8.1 POWER REQUIREMENTS

Power supply is the lifeline of Metro System
Electricity is required for operation of Metro system for running of trains,

station services (e.g. lighting, lifts, escalators, signalling & telecom, fire
fighting etc), workshops & depots and other maintenance infrastructure
within premises of metro system. The power requirements of a metro
system are determined by peak-hour demands of power for traction and
auxiliary applications. Broad estimation of auxiliary and traction power
demand is made based on the following requirements: -
(i) Specific energy consumption of rolling stock – 70KWh/1000 GTKM
(ii) Regeneration by rolling stock – 30%
(iii) Elevated/at –grade station load – initially 250KW, which will
increase to 350 KW in the year 2031
(iv) Depot auxiliary load - initially 2000KW, which will increase to 2500
KW in the year 2031.
Keeping in view the train operation plan the demand of auxiliary and
traction power, power requirements projected for the year 2011, 2021 and
2031 are summarized in Table 8.1 below: -
Table 8.1
Power Demand Estimation (MVA)
Corridor Year
2011 2021 2031
Traction 7 9 12
Versova – Ghatkopar Auxiliary 6 8 9
section Total 13 17 21
The detailed calculations of power demand estimation are attached at

Annexure 8.1.
8.2 NEED FOR HIGH RELIABILITY OF POWER SUPPLY
The proposed Mumbai metro system is being designed to handle about

60,000 passengers per direction during peak hours when trains are
expected to run at 3 minutes intervals. Incidences of any power
interruption, apart from affecting train running, will cause congestion at
stations. Interruption of power at night is likely to cause alarm and
increased risk to traveling public. Lack of illumination at stations, non-
visibility of appropriate signage, disruption of operation of lifts and

escalators is likely to cause confusion, anxiety and ire in commuters,

whose tolerance level are low on account of stress. Effect on signal and
communication may affect train operation and passenger safety as well.
Therefore, uninterrupted power supply is mandatory for efficient metro
operations.
To ensure reliability of power supply, it is essential that both the sources of

Supply and connected transmission & distribution networks are reliable
and have adequate redundancies built in. Therefore, it is desirable to
obtain power supply at high grid voltage of 132 or 66kV or 33kV from
stable grid sub-stations and further transmission & distribution is done by
the Metro Authority itself.
8.3 SOURCES OF POWER SUPPLY
The high voltage power supply network of Mumbai city was studied in
brief. The city has 220kV, 33/22kV and 11kV network to cater to various
types of demand in vicinity of the proposed corridor. Series of meetings
were held with M/s Reliance Energy Limited (Licensee of the area) to
finalise the Input Power Supply sources & Supply Voltage.
M/s Reliance indicated during discussions that their 33kV network is also
highly reliable and MRVC is also taking power at 33/22 kV for setting up
25kV Traction Sub-stations. Taking power at 220kV voltage level will not
be economical, when 33kV supply meets reliability requirements. Keeping
in view the reliability requirements, two 33/25kV Receiving Sub-stations
(one as stand by) are proposed to be set up (one at depot and other at
Marol Naka). This is an economical solution without compromising
reliability. Based on the discussions with Reliance Energy Ltd., it is
proposed to avail power supply for traction as well as auxiliary services
from the following grid sub-stations at 33kV voltage through cable feeders
as indicated in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2
Sources of Power Supply
S. Corridor Grid sub-station of Location of Approx.
No Reliance Energy RSS of length of
Ltd. Metro 33kV cables
(Input voltage) Authority
1. Versova Receiving Depot 1km.
Versova - sub-station (Double
Ghatkopar (220/33kV) circuit)
2. section Arrey Receiving sub- Marol Naka 3km.
station (220/33kV) (Double
circuit)
The summary of expected power demand at various sources is given in

Table 8.3. M/s Reliance Energy Ltd have confirmed availability of requisite
power and 2x 33kV bays at their above sub-stations vide letter no.
Mktg/SCZ/3350/2004 dated 13.09.2004 (Annexure 8.2)
Table 8.3
Power Demand projections for various sources
Corridor Input Source Peak demand – Peak demand* –

Normal (MVA) Emergency (MVA)
Initial Year Initial Year
Year (2031) Year (2031)
(2011) (2011)
Versova RSS
Versova Traction 4 7 7 12
Ghatkopar
Auxiliary 3 5 6 9
section
Sub-total (A) 7 12 13 21
Arrey RSS
Traction 3 5 7 12
Auxiliary 3 4 6 9
Sub-total (B ) 6 9 13 21
TOTAL (A+B) 13 21 13 21
* Incase of failure of other source of power
The 33kV power supply will be stepped down to 25kV single phase for
traction purpose at the two RSSs of metro authority and the 25kV traction
supply will be fed to the OHE at viaduct through cable feeders. The 33kV
power supply received directly from Reliance Energy RSS will be
distributed along the alignment through 33kV Ring main cable network for
feeding auxiliary loads (Refer power supply schematic drawings no.
BM/PS/GA/001/R0). These cables will be laid in dedicated ducts along the
viaduct. If one RSS trips on fault or input supply failure, train services can
be maintained from other RSS. A 25kV power supply link is proposed
between the Metro and Western Railway at Andheri SSP as shown in the
drawing. This link will be used to pull trains to various stations when both
the RSSs fail. However, in case of total grid failure, all trains may come to
a halt but station lighting & other essential services can be catered to by
stand-by DG sets. Therefore, while the proposed scheme is expected to
ensure adequate reliability, it would cater to emergency situations as well.

Typical High Voltage Receiving Sub-station
The 33kV cables will be laid through public pathways from Reliance
Energy Sub-stations to RSSs of Metro Authority. Each RSS shall be
provided with 2 nos. (one as standby) 33/25kV, 21.6 MVA single phase
traction transformers for feeding to traction loads, being the standard
design. This arrangement would also ensure that the system caters to
additional power supply requirements in case of likely extensions of the
corridors at either end. Depot RSS can also be used for feeding 25kV
traction supply to Charkop - Colaba corridor.
Indoor type 33kV switchgear and outdoor type 25kV switchgear is
proposed for each RSS to be located in approx. 50m x 50m (2500 sq. m)
land plot. Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS), though requires less space
(approximately half) & reduced maintenance, is not proposed because of
high capital cost.
8.4 AUXILIARY SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS FOR STATIONS & DEPOT

Auxiliary sub-stations (ASS) are to be provided at each station. A separate
ASS is required at depot. The ASS will be located at mezzanine or
platform level inside a room. The auxiliary load requirements have been
assessed at 350 kW for elevated stations. Accordingly, two dry type cast
resin transformers (33/0.415kV) of 400 kVA capacity are proposed to be
installed at the stations (one transformer as standby). Depot ASS will also
be provided with 2x2000 kVA auxiliary transformers.

Typical Indoor Auxiliary Sub-station
8.5 ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) AND ELECTROMAGNETIC

COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
25kV ac traction currents produce alternating magnetic fields that cause

voltages to be induced in any conductor running along the track. Booster
Transformer and Return Conductor (BT/RC) System is proposed for EMI
mitigation. Concrete structures of elevated viaducts are not good electrical
earths and therefore, Earthing and Bonding of the traction system shall be in
accordance with the latest standards EN50122-1, IEEE80 and other relevant
standards. Two earth conductors – Overhead Protection Cable (OPC) and
Buried Earth Conductor (BEC), are proposed to be laid along with elevated
via duct and all the metallic structures, structural reinforcement, running rails
etc will be connected to these conductors to form an equiv-potential surface
& a least resistance path to the fault currents. The overhead protection
cable will also provide protection against lightning to the 25kV OHE and the
elevated viaduct. Similar arrangements have been adopted on Delhi Metro
as well.
Detailed specifications of equipments e.g. power cables, transformer,

switchgear, E&M equipment etc shall be framed to reduce conducted or
radiated emissions as per appropriate international standards. The Metro
system as a whole (trains, signaling & telecomm, traction power supply,
E&M system etc) shall comply with the EMC requirements of international
standards viz. EN50121, EN50123, IEC61000 series etc. A detailed
EMI/EMC plan will be required to be developed during project
implementation stage.

8.6 RATING OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT
25kV ac Overhead Equipment (OHE) shall comprise 150sqmm HD-copper

contact wire and 65 sq. mm Cd-copper catenary wire. Return conductor
(RC) shall be All Aluminum Conductor (AAC) of 233sqmm cross section.
From safety considerations, Hydraulic type Anti-Tensioning Device (ATDs)
are proposed on mainlines which does not require use of balance weight
for tensioning of OHE conductors.
Based on emergency demand expected at each RSS as shown in Table

8.3, 2 nos. 33/25kV traction transformers of 21.6 MVA capacity shall be
provided at each RSS, being standard design (one to be in service and
second one to serve as standby). The 33kV incoming cable shall be 3-
phase single core XLPE insulated with 500mm2 Copper conductor to meet
the normal & emergency loading requirements and fault level of the 33kV
supply.
33kV and 25kV switchgear shall be rated for 1250 A, being standard
design. 33kV cable ring network shall be adequately rated to transfer
requisite auxiliary power during normal as well as emergency situations
and accordingly 3 core x 200 mm2 copper conductor XLPE insulated 33kV
cable is proposed for ring main network.
Adequate number of cables are required for transfer of traction power from
Metro’s RSS to 25kV OHE. Single-phase XLPE insulated cables with
240mm2 copper conductor are proposed for traction power. Based on
current requirements, 2 cables are required for each of the four circuits to
feed power to OHE.
The above capacities of transformers, switchgear, cables etc. have been

worked out based on the conceptual design. Therefore, these may be
reviewed for better accuracy during design stage of project
implementation.
8.7 STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR (DG) SETS
In the unlikely event of simultaneous tripping of all the input power sources
or grid failure, the power supply to stations as well as to trains will be
interrupted. It is, therefore, proposed to provide a standby DG set of 100
KVA capacity at the stations to cater to the following essential services:
(i) Essential lighting

(ii) Signaling & telecommunications
(iii) Fire fighting system
(iv) Lift operation
(v) Fare collection system
Silent type DG sets with low noise levels are proposed, which do not
require a separate room for installation.

8.8 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)

SYSTEM
The entire system of power supply (receiving, traction & auxiliary supply)
shall be monitored and controlled from a centralized Operation Control
Centre (OCC) through SCADA system. Modern SCADA system with
intelligent remote terminal units (RTUs) shall be provided. Optical fibre
provided for telecommunications will be used as communication carrier for
SCADA system.
Digital Protection Control System (DPCS) is proposed for providing data

acquisition, data processing, overall protection control, interlocking, inter-
tripping and monitoring of the entire power supply system consisting of
33kV ac switchgear, transformers, 25kV ac switchgear and associated
electrical equipment. DPCS will utilize microprocessor-based fast-acting
numerical relays & Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) with suitable
interface with SCADA system.
8.9 ENERGY SAVING MEASURES
Energy charges of any metro system constitute a substantial portion of its

operation & maintenance (O & M) costs. Therefore, it is imperative to
incorporate energy saving measures in the system design itself. The
auxiliary power consumption of metros is generally more than the traction
energy consumed by train movement during initial years of operation.
Subsequently, traction power consumption increases with increase in train
frequency/composition in order to cater more traffic. The proposed system
of Mumbai Metro includes the following energy saving features:
(i) Modern rolling stock with 3-phase VVVF drive and lightweight
stainless steel coaches has been proposed, which has the benefits
of low specific energy consumption and almost unity power factor.
(ii) Rolling stock has regeneration features and it is expected that 30%
of total traction energy will be regenerated and fed back to 25kV ac
OHE to be consumed by nearby trains.
(iii) Effective utilization of natural light is proposed. In addition, the
lighting system of the stations will be provided with different circuits
(33%, 66% & 100% of load) and the relevant circuits can be
switched on based on the requirements (day or night, operation or
maintenance hours etc).
(iv) Machine-room less type lifts with gearless drive have been
proposed with 3-phase VVVF drive. These lifts are highly energy
efficient.
(v) The proposed heavy-duty public services escalators will be
provided with 3-phase VVVF drive, which is energy efficient &
improves the power factor. Further, the escalators will be provided
with infrared sensors to automatically reduce the speed (to idling
speed) when not being used by passengers.

(vi) The latest state of art and energy efficient electrical equipment (e.g.
transformers, motors, light fittings etc) have been incorporated in
the system design.
(vii) Efficient energy management is possible with proposed modern
SCADA system by way of maximum demand (MD) and power factor
control.
8.10 ELECTRIC POWER TARIFF
The cost of electricity is a significant part of Operation & Maintenance

(O&M) charges of the Metro System, which constitutes about 25-35% of
total annual working cost. Therefore, it is the key element for the financial
viability of the Project. The annual energy consumption is assessed to be
about 30 million units in initial years (2011), which will double by horizon
year 2031. In addition to ensuring optimum energy consumption, it is also
necessary that the electric power tariff be kept at a minimum in order to
contain the O& M costs. Therefore, the power tariff for Mumbai Metro
should be at effective rate of purchase price (at 33kV voltage level) plus
nominal administrative charges i.e. on a no profit no loss basis. This is
expected to be in the range of Rs. 2.50-2.75 per unit. It is proposed that
Government of Maharashtra takes necessary steps to fix power tariff for
Mumbai Metro at “No Profit No Loss” basis. Financial analysis has been
carried out based on this tariff (Rs. 2.75 per unit) for the purpose of
finalizing the DPR. Similar approach has been adopted for Delhi Metro.

Annexxure 8.1
POWER REQUIREMENTS VERSOVA - GHATKOPAR SECTION
Year 2011 Year 2021 Year 2031
Traction power requirements

Motor coach-tare weight 42T 42T 42T
Motor coach-passenger carrying
capacity 392 392 392
Trailer coach-tare weight 42T 42T 42T
Trailer coach-passenger carrying
capacity 361 361 361
No of cars 4(2M+2T) 4(2M+2T) 4(2M+2T)
Passenger weight 97.9T 97.9T 97.9T
Total Train weight 263.9T 263.9T 263.9T
Section length 11.07KM 11.07KM 11.07KM

Headway 5.0mts 4.0mts 3.0mts
70 KWhr/1000 70 KWhr/1000 70 KWhr/1000
Specific Energy consumption GTKM GTKM GTKM
No. of trains/hr in both directions 24 30 40
Peak traction power requirement 6.7MW 8.3MW 11.1MW
Less Regeneration @30% 2.0MW 2.5MW 3.3MW
Depot power requirements 2.0MW 2.5MW 3.5MW
Total traction power requirement 6.7MW 8.3MW 11.3MW
Total traction power requirement
(MVA) assuming 5% energy losses
and .95 pf 7MVA 9MVA 12MVA
Station aux power requirements

Elevated/at-grade station--power
consumption 0.25MW 0.30MW 0.35MW
No. of elevated/at-grade stations 12 12 12
Total Station Aux Power requirement 3.0MW 3.6MW 4.2MW
Depot Aux power requirement 2.0MW 2.50MW 3.0MW
Total Aux Power requirement 5.0MW 6.10MW 7.2MW
Total aux power requirement (MVA)
assuming 5% energy losses and .85
pf 6MVA 8MVA 9MVA
Total traction & aux power

requirement (MVA) 13MVA 17MVA 21MVA


Chapter 9: Environmental Impact Assessment
Chapter – 9
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL BASELINE DATA
The main aim of the study is to ascertain the existing baseline conditions and
assess the impacts of all the factors as a result of the proposed corridor
during its operation and construction in phases. The changes likely to occur in
different components of the environment viz. Natural Physical Resources,
Natural Ecological (or Biological) Resources, Human/Economic Development
Resources (Human use values), Quality of life values (socio-economics),
would be studied and assessed to a high degree of accuracy. The area of
study include Hydrology, Surface Water Quality, Air Quality, Soils, Noise,
Geology, Socio- economics, archaeological /historical monuments etc.
The information presented in this section stems from various sources such as
reports, field surveys and monitoring. Majority of data on water quality,
vegetation, and air and noise quality was collected during field studies in
June 2004 & September 2004. This data has been further utilized to assess
the incremental impact if any due to the project. The development /
compilation of environmental baseline data is essential to assess the impact
on environment due to the project. The study area is the metro corridor from
Versova to Ghatkopar.
9.1.1 General Environment
Mumbai (Bombay) is located (Latitude 18'54"N, Longitude 72'49"E) in

Maharashtra State and is the principal Indian port on the Arabian Sea. The
original city is confined by its island location. Mumbai's central business
district, comprising most of the commercial and business centres and
government offices, is located in the extreme southern part of the city.
Mumbai harbour is to the east of the city. The commercial Fort area lies to the
south of the island while the commercial, residential and industrial areas are
located north of the Fort area. The mean elevation of Mumbai is 11 m above
mean sea level. The metropolis covers an area of 603 km2 of which Greater
Mumbai covers 438 km2.
Mumbai has a tropical savanna climate; mean humidity ranges between 57-
87 per cent. The annual mean temperature is 25.3oC rising to a monthly
maximum of 34.5oC in June and with a minimum of 14.3oC in January. Total
annual mean precipitation is 2,078 mm with 34 per cent (709 mm) falling in
the month of July. Due to the summer monsoons, maximum sunshine occurs
in winter (291 hours in January). In the winter the predominant wind direction
is northerly (NW-NE). However, in the monsoon season westerly and
southerly winds predominate. There is virtually always a sea breeze during
the day with mean wind speeds between 5-8 km/hour.

9.1.2 Water and Soil

The water and soil samples have been tested for chemical analysis. The
results so obtained are summarised in Tables 9.1 and Table 9.2. Most of the
parameters are within the permissible limits. It could be concluded that the
seawater is having high BOD, COD contents and it also contains the heavy
metals. The texture of soil is mainly sandy. The higher concentration of
phosphate and organic matter is an indication of good fertility value. As metro
will be above ground, it will not be in contact with soil and water. Hence soil
and underground water are unlikely to undergo any deteriorating effect due to
proposed MRTS structures and foundation.
Table 9.1
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF WATER SAMPLES
S.
Parameter Sample Locations
No.
Near
Near Sea water Near
Seven
Andheri sample at Sarvodaya
bungalow
station Varsova Hospital
s area
1 Total Suspended 5.6 3.8 421.2 3.9
Solids (mg/l)
2 BOD (mg/l) ND ND 21 <2
3 pH 8.14 7.68 7.85 8.1
4 Chloride, Cl (mg/l) 144 35.96 16000 167.83
5 Total dissolved 449 288.94 27009 692.4
solids (mg/l)
6 Sulphate, SO4 38 14.93 2000 65.67
(mg/l)
7 Fluorides (as F) 0.61 0.29 2.12 0.67
(mg/l)
8 Nitrates as NO3 0.41 18.78 1.47 ND
mg/l
9 Alkalinity, mg/L 191.81 215.78 100 275.72
10 Total Hardness, 287.71 267.73 5320 335.66
mg/L
11 Turbidity 3 2 40 1
12 COD, mg/L ND ND 72 4
13 DO, mg/L 7.5 6 4.5 5.3
14 Chromium, mg/L ND ND ND ND
15 Cadmium, mg/L ND ND 0.1 ND
16 Copper, mg/L ND ND 0.14 ND
17 Zinc, mg/L 0.18 ND 2.34 0.09
18 Arsenic, mg/L ND ND ND ND
ND - Not Detectable

Table 9.2
PHYSIO-CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SOILS
S.No Sample Sampling locations

. /Parameter
Near Andheri Near seven Near Starplus
station bungalows office
area/
Varsova
1 pH 7.45 8.15 7.85
2 Texture
Sand (%) 97.474 93.66 73.59
Silt (%) 0.16 0.22 14.37
Clay (%) 2.37 6.12 12.04
3 Nitrogen 3134.84 1900 623
(kg/hectare)
4 Phosphorus 70.15 70.22 30.83
(kg/ha)
5 K (meq/100gm) 0.8 1.38 1.09
6 Ca (meq/100gm) 15.23 46.3 9.16
7 Mg (meq/100gm) 5.9 4.04 1
8 Na (meq/100gm) 1.31 2.47 2.77
9 Organic matter 5.13 5.64 1.81
(%)
Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB) is monitoring the sea water quality at
various locations once in a month including a location at Versova. The
characteristics of the sea water quality during 1998-99 (Latest as provided by MPCB)
is presented in Table 9.3 as below:
TABLE 9.3
Characteristics of Sea water quality near Versova monitored by MPCB
S. Parameter Min. Max. Average
No
1 BOD (mg/l) 5 19 9.95
2 COD, mg/L 128 348 235
3 TSS (mg/l) 44 52 47
4 pH Value 7.3 8.1 7.78
5 DO, mg/L 3.6 5 4.35
Source : MPCB annual report 1998-99
Based on the above table it can be concluded that the parameters monitored for
seawater sample near Varsova station is having their usual characteristics with high
TDS, Chlorides. Also the seawater contains the heavy metals and BOD, which
indicates the pollution of seawater due to various discharges.

9.1.3 Forestry
Tree survey was carried out along the proposed alignment. No forest area
exists along the project alignment or its corridor. Most of the trees were
planted along the roads on both the sides in the path. No plantation of trees at
the centre have been observed through out the project alignment along the
road. The main species observed are babool, Pipal, , Ashok,, Bakaan, Neem
and other types of tress etc. No rare or endangered species of trees have
been noticed during field studies.. Most of the trees contain the girth size of
about 30cm and more. No cutting of trees due to Metro project is anticipated
in Eastern segment, as MMRDA is widening the road from Andheri (east) to
Ghatkopar station. The average numbers of trees are 11.2per km. An
inventory of trees, likely to be lost on the western segment is presented in
Table 9.4
Table 9.4: LOSS OF FLORA

WESTERN SEGMENT
S
From – To Location of tress
No
Left Right Total
1 Ch 0.00 -Ch 232.183 7 6 13
2 Ch 232.183 -Ch 482 8 8 16
3 Ch 482 -Ch 722 3 5 8
4 Ch 722 - Ch 1032 3 4 7
5 Ch 1032 - Ch 1313 2 2 4
6 Ch 1313 - Ch 1530 (bus stop) 1 3 4
Ch 1530 (bus stop) - ch 1830 (Indian oil
7 Nagar) 7 5 12
Ch 1830 (Indian oil Nagar) - Akhand Jyoti
8 Appts. (Ch. 2080) 0 9 9
Anand Jyoti Appts.- (Ch. 2080) - Ch 2332
8 (Ambedkar Nagar) 4 5 9
Ch 2332 (Ambedkar Nagar) - Ch
9 2632(Elershine Bunglows) 6 4 10
Ch 2632(Elershine Bunglows) - Ch 2832
10 (Depot line) 4 2 6
Ch 2832 (Depot line) - Ch 3170(Thaker
11 sweets) 7 3 10
Ch 3170 (Thaker sweets) – Ch 3.629km (
12 pink Appts.) 7 2 9
TOTAL 59 58 123
• -Near railway station crossing from East to West of Andheri in the middle .
• All the changes mentioned above carries negative sign considering Ch. 0.00
is the centreline of the Andheri station. towards Versova .

9.1.4 Air Quality
The atmospheric concentrations of air pollutants show a rising trend. As a part of

this study ambient air quality monitoring (AAQM) has been carried out by setting up
ambient air quality monitoring stations through mobile van at four locations as shown
in Table 9.5 for the parameters SPM, CO, SO2, HC, and NOx. The results so
obtained are reported below. The ambient air quality data indicates much higher
values of suspended particulate matter (SPM) at these locations except at Versova
station, than the prescribed limits established by CPCB. The lesser values at
Versova station is observed due to less traffic with in that area and also near the sea
shore side. The SPM values at Chruch location in Andheri east is due to severe
traffic congestion and load. However, in case of the values of SO2, NOx and CO, the
observed values are within the permissible limits. In overall it can be concluded that
the project alignment is moderately polluted, may be due to more traffic etc.,
Table 9.5
AIR QUALITY AT PROJECT SITE (µg/ m3)
S.No. Location SPM HC NOx SO2 CO

µg/m3 mg/m3 µg/m3 µg/m3 mg/m3
1 Near Andheri 412-475 Traces- 24-28 37-47 Traces -
Sports club 1.78 2.8
Average (24 444 0.96 42 26.4 1.53
hour)
% Variation from 23% --- --- -- ---
standard
2 Near Seven 308-358 Traces- 26-34 15-19 Traces-
bunglows area 1.8 1.8
Average (24 334 0.86 29 15.5 1.48
hour)
% Variation from ---- --- --- --- --
standard
3. Near Proposed 111-152 Traces - 11-23 14-16 Traces -
varsova station 1.23 1.72
Average (24 131 0.8 16.5 13 1.4
hour)
% Variation from --- --- --- --- ---
standard
4. Near Church on 420-450 Traces – 25-44 8-16 Traces
Andheri (East) 1.5 –2.2
Average (24 435 0.75 37.9 11.5 1.1
hour)
% Variation from 21% --- --- --- ---
standard
5.. On J. V. Road 350-370 Traces- 20-35 7.5-9.0 Traces
(Meghdoot hotel) 0.86 – 1.5
near Ghatkopatr
post office.

Average (24 360 0.43 28.7 8.0 0.75

hour)
% Variation from --- --- --- --- ---
standard
Prescribed limit 360µg/m3 --- 80µg/m3 80µg/ 4mg/m3
m3
Average value of 340µg/m3 0.8mg/ 30.8µg/m3 14.88µ 1.25mg/
parameter of above m3 g/m3 m3
locations
Note: * SPM values are high due to dusty atmosphere
Maharashtra Pollution Control Board (MPCB) along with Mumbai Municipal

Corporation is monitoring the air quality status at various locations and one of the
location is in Andheri. The monitoring results during 2002-03 (Latest as provided by
MPCB) are presented in the Table 9.6as given below:
Table 9.6 : Monitoring results made by MPCB during 2002-03
Monitoring Apr- May- Jun- Jul- Aug- Sep- Oct- Nov- Dec- Jan- Feb Mar
parameter 02 Average
02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 03 03 03
SO2 15 6 10 6 9 15 33 44 41 45 31 34 24.65
NOx 31 14 32 19 26 31 56 90 89 87 81 79 52.9
SPM 237 136 108 209 203 131 237 250 312 279 305 352 229.9
Source : MPCB report 2002-03
Hence it can be concluded that the parameters monitored for air quality values at
above locations monitored by RITES along the project alignment are comparable to
the monitoring results carried by MPCB for the month of June, that the increase in
monitored parameters may be due to increase in traffic in two years.
9.1.5 Seismicity
The project area falls in Zone-IV of Seismic Zoning Map of India. The India
Meteorological Department (IMD) has considered suitable seismic factor of adequate
for design purpose for Civil Engineering structures. This factor needs to be
appropriately incorporated while finalising civil designs.
9.1.6 Noise
Noise levels were measured at different places along the alignment at 2.0-m away
from source as per standard practice. The noise levels measured at different
locations are summarised in Table 9.7. It is observed that the noise levels recorded
at various places are higher than prescribed permissible levels of 55-dBA (day) and
45dBA (night) for residential area.

Table 9.7
NOISE LEVELS ALONG THE ALIGNMENT DB(A)
Location Leq Lmax L10 L50 L90 Lmin Lday Lnight LDN
Near Andhri Sports
club
68.6 74 75.3 74.3 70.18 58 70.9 64 74.4
Near Seven
bunglows area
69 74 74.6 73.5 69.8 56 71 63 73.4
Near Proposed
Versova station 62.6 68 69.3 64.5 61.1 52 66.9 55 65.6
Near Church on 74.5
Andheri (East) 75.5 78 72.5 78.4 72.14 62.5 6 69 78
On J. V. Road near
Ghatkopatr post
office 68 72 73.5 72.4 67.8 58 59 61 71
Note: L10, L50 and L90 are the sound level, which is exceeded 10%, 50% & 90% of the
total time
9.2 SOCIO ECONOMIC PROFILE
A detailed socio-economic study has been carried out for Versova to Ghatkopar
corridor. The study is conducted through socio – economic survey by field visit and
analysis.
9.2.1 Dislocation Due to the Proposed Corridor: In order to keep acquisition of

private land to the barest minimum, the alignment has been so chosen, that it
remains mostly within the government land. However, at some of the station
locations private land is required for entry, exit and other facilities of station and
running section. The details of land permanently required for the project are given in
Table 9.8
Table 9.8
LAND REQUIREMENT
Agency Purpose Land Area

Required in ha
Government At stations & other locations 12.610
Private At stations & other locations 0.032
Total 12.641
Detailed survey all along the proposed corridor was carried out. During the survey, it
was observed that 3 Nos. of squatters at Lokhand bazaar near Andheri (east) and
Ghatkopar area, PAFs along the alignment from Andheri east to DN nagar and near
Varsova proposed station, Ghatkopar area as mentioned in Table 9.9 need
relocation. These squatters are used in Table 9.9

Table 9.9
VARSOVA TO GHATKOPAR
DETAILS OF PAFS ALONG THE PROJECT ALIGMENT
Sl. No. Location Type of family Total no.s(Approx.)

Near Andheri (east) to DN PAFs 30
Nagar
1 Near Lokhand bazaar (shops) Squatters 20
Near Jagruti Nagar & budh
Vihar along the alignment in
2 Ghtakopar area Squatters 400
Along the alignment at
3 various locations PAFs 20
TOTAL NO. OF PAFs 470
9.2.2 Survey Design

In order to collect the primary data a structured interview schedule has been used in
the field. The sample survey has been carried out for about 12% of the total affected
families by using random sampling method evenly along the alignment. Only at two
locations squatters have been identified i.e. near lokhand bazaar (hard ware shops)
in Andheri (east) and in Ghatkopar area covering Jagruti nagar, Budh Vihar etc.
Almost all the commercial shops along the alignment are pucca shops. These have
been covered for the purpose of this study.
9.2.3 Socio - economic Profile of the PAF’s
9.2.3.1 Socio-economic Conditions
Table 9.10 shows the details of socio-economic condition of project-affected people.
Majority of family members (59.0%) in Project Affected Families (PAFs) are male and
remaining 41%are female. It is evident from the table that majority (45.0%) of family
members of project affected areas falling in the age range of 16-40 years, 31.2 %
belonged to the age of up to 15 years and only 18.7 % family members fall in the
range of 40-60 years. Majority of respondents (67.0 %) are Hindus. Remaining 20.0
% are Bodh, 9.0 % are Muslim. Christian and Jain constitute only 4.0 % of total
PAFs. About 33.3 %of the total respondents belong to scheduled castes, 29.6 %
from other back ward classes, 22.2 %from general and remaining 14.8 per cent
belong to scheduled tribe category. Main occupation of the people in project areas is
business (48.2%) followed by labour (35.2%) and service (12.9%). Remaining 3.7 %
people are unemployed. It is observed from the table that majority of them have
studied up to primary level. Remaining 27.0 and 5.0 % had their education up to
secondary and graduate level respectively. It is also important to be noted that 21.0
%out of total project affected people are illiterate. Around 40.74 %of the families
have an income of Rs.5, 0001-10,000/- per annum. Majority of them (53.69%) have
an income of less than Rs.50,000/- per annum. Only 5.55 % of them have an income
of Rs. 10,000- 15,000/- per annum. However, average income of the people is Rs.
53,898.15/- per annum.

Table 9.10: Socio-economic Profile of Project Affected People
Socio-economic Frequency Percentage (%)

Sl. No. condition
1. SEX (N=267)
Male 158 59.0
Female 109 41.0
2. AGE COMPOSITION (N=267)
0-5yrs 16 5.9
6-15 yrs 68 25.3
16-25yrs 61 22.7
26-40yrs 60 22.3
40-60 50 18.7
>60 12 4.5
X=26.6
3. RELIGION (N=54)
Hindu 36 67.0
Muslim 05 9.0
Christian 01 2.0
Jain 01 2.0
Bodh 11 20.0
4. SOCIAL GROUP (N=54)
SC 18 33.3
ST 08 14.8
OBC/BC 16 29.6
General 12 22.2
5. OCCUPATION (N=54)
Labour 19 35.2
Business 26 48.2
Service 07 12.9
Unemployed 02 3.7
6. EDUCATION (N=54)
Illiterate 55 21.0
Primary 125 47.0
Secondary 73 27.0
Graduate 14 5.0
7. FAMILY INCOME(Annual Rs.) (N=54)
0- 25000 08 14.81
25001-50000 21 38.88
50001-100000 22 40.74
100001- 03 5.55
150000 0 0.0
150001- 0 0.0
200000 X=Rs.53,898.15
> 200000

9.2.3.2 Family Particulars of PAPs
Table 9.11 interprets the family particulars of PAPs. Out of total Project Affected
Families majority (78.0%) are nuclear and only 22.0 % are joint. Family size has
been classified into four categories i.e., individual, small (2-4), medium (5-7) and
large (7 & above). Majority of the families (48.15%) are Medium, 40.74%are small
and remaining 9.26 % and 1.85 %of families are large and of one person
respectively. Average family size is 5. So far as marital status of family members are
concerned it is observed that out of 267 members, majority of them (64.0%) are
unmarried and only 36.0 %are married.
Table 9.11: Family Particulars
Sl. No. Family Particulars Frequency Percentage (%)

TYPE OF FAMILY (N=54)
Joint 12 22.0
1.
Nuclear 42 78.0
2. SIZE OF FAMILY (N=54)
Individual 01 1.85
Small (2-4) 22 40.74
Medium (5-7) 26 48.15
Large (7 & 05 9.26
above) X=5
3. MARITAL STATUS (N=267)
Married 95 36.0
Unmarried 172 64.0
9.2.3.3 Details of Structure
The details of structures to be acquired of project-affected families are given in Table

9.12. About 67.0 %are houses, 28.0 %are shops and remaining 6.0 %are both
house and shop. It is evident from the data that majority of houses are to be lost due
to the development of project. 46.0 and 43.0 %construction of houses are pucca
and semi-pucca respectively. Remaining 11.0 %are kutcha houses. It is also to be
noted that about 74.0 per cent people are the squatters on the government land and
only 26.0 %are having structure in their own land.
Table 9.12: Details of Structure
Sl. No. Details of Structure Frequency Percentage (%)
Type of Structure (N=54)

House 36 67.0
1.
House + Shop 03 6.0
Shop 15 28.0

2. Construction of Structure (N=54)

Kucha 06 11.0
Semi-pucca 23 43.0
Pucca 25 46.0
Open Land 00 0.0
3. Land Utilization (N=54)

Owned 14 26.0
Leased 0 0.0
Squatters 40 74.0
The socio-economic survey for the PAFs likely to be affected due to the proposed
development was carried out and during the survey, resistance was shown by the
occupants of the houses especially in the seven bunglows area, near buddh vihar in
Ghatkopar area and near Andheri station area.
POSITIVE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
9.3.1 Based on project particulars and existing environmental conditions (Section

9.1), potential impacts have been identified that are likely to result from the
proposed MRTS project and where possible these have been quantified. The
positive environmental impacts are listed below:
• Traffic congestion reduction,
• Quick service and safety,
• Less fuel consumption,
• Reduction in Air Pollution,
• Better roads, and
• Employment opportunities,
9.4 NEGATIVE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS
9.4.1 Based on project particulars and existing environmental conditions (Section

9.1), potential negative impacts likely to result from the proposed development
have been quantified. Negative impacts have been listed under the following
headings:
• Impacts due to project location,
• Impacts due to construction works, and
• Impacts due to project operation.
9.4.2 Impacts Due to Project Location

a) Change of Land use: The alignment is totally elevated such that both
the land requirement and change of land use is minimum. The change
in land use is estimated to be 12.641ha (includes both government
and private land).

b) Loss of Trees: The details of 123 trees likely to be lost are given in
Table 9.5. The total value of these trees lost is Rs. 1.2 lakhs as
mentioned in Table 9.13.
Table 9.13
LOSS OF FOREST PRODUCTS
Total loss of Trees (Nos.) 123

Average cost of one tree (Rs.) 1000*
Total loss (Rs. lakhs) 1.2 lakhs
* - Based on market survey
There will be no encroachment into nature reserves, as the project area is in

the urban centre.
c) Loss of Historical and Cultural Monuments: No historical/cultural

monuments will be affected as a result of the proposed development.
However, at two different locations, i.e. Saibaba temple adjacent to Shiv
sena office at Jagruti nagar in Ghatkoar area and a Masjid in adjacent to
the Andheri east Station located on the alignment of this project, which
needs due consideration for relocation.
9.4.3 Impacts Due to Project Construction
a) Soil Erosion and Health Risk at Construction Site: Runoff from

unprotected excavated areas can result in excessive soil erosion,
especially when erodibility of soil is high. Mitigation measures include
careful planning, timing of cut-and-fill operations and re-vegetation.
Problems could arise from dumping of construction spoils (concrete,
bricks), waste materials (from contractor’s camp) etc. causing surface and
ground water pollution. Under the management plan the excavated pillars
sites are required to be restored and reclaimed in a satisfactory manner on
completion of construction. Though the impact on productive soil is
unavoidable, adequate measures need to be worked out for minimising the
loss of soil, as by storing of topsoil to be laid back after the construction
period etc. Emphasis should be laid on maximum use of the stripped
topsoil in for redevelopment of areas and additional landscaping works in
the project. The project shall take enforcement measures to
prevent/minimise the use of topsoil from other locations. Health risks
during construction activity include disease hazards to workers due to lack
of sanitary facilities like safe disposal of human waste and garbage
clearance and disposal facility. In order to avoid such a situation, proper
mitigation measures should be incorporated, which should include proper
water supply, sanitation, drainage, healthcare and human waste disposal
facilities in labour camps. In addition reduced contaminated water spillage
and adoption of disease control measures should be adopted to reduce
the health risks.

b) Muck disposal during construction: Construction activity involves

earthwork and construction material. The metro route is elevated. Hence
piers/pillars will be constructed. The muck will be from excavated soil and
construction material. The quantity of muck and disposal sites will be
finalised during detail engineering.
c) Traffic Diversions and Risk to Existing Buildings: During

construction, traffic diversions on roads will be essentially required. As
most of the construction activities will be confined to centre of the road
and most of the roads are double lane, it will be appropriate that the side
lanes may also be utilised for traffic and also for smooth progress of
construction activities. Advance information on communication systems
will be an advantage to users of any particular road. As most of the
proposed sections are elevated and located in the middle of the road with
deck width being much less than the existing road width, hence risk to the
existing buildings all along the route will be practically negligible.
d) Impact on Water Quality: Construction activities may have impact on

water bodies due to disposal of waste. The waste could be due to: the
spillage of construction materials, dumping of used water from the stone
crusher, oils and greases, and labour camp. But the quantities of such
spills are very negligible. Care, however, needs to be taken to provide
adequate sanitary facilities and drainage in the temporary colonies of the
construction workers. Provision of adequate washing and toilet facilities
with septic tanks and appropriate refuse collection and disposal system
should be made obligatory. Contamination of ground water can take
place, if the dump containing above substances gets leached and
percolate into the ground water table. This is not the case with the present
project, as the activity does not involve usage of any harmful ingredients.
Moreover activities are of short duration. Hence, no impact on either
ground or surface water quality is anticipated in the present project.

9.4.4 Impacts due to Project Operation
a) Oil Pollution: Oil spillage during change of lubricants, cleaning and

repair processes, in the maintenance Depot cum workshop for
maintenance of rolling stock, is very common. The spilled oil should be
trapped in grit chamber for settling of suspended matter. The collected
oil should either be auctioned or incinerated, so as to avoid any
underground water contamination.
b) Noise: Noise and Vibration is of similar phenomenon. Noise is a

random vibration. It can be broken down into a set of unrelated,
elementary components. Vibration can cause the emission of audible
noise. Noise is usually either airborne or propagated through the
structure. The main sources of noise from the operation of trains
include: engine noise, cooling fan noise, wheel-rail interaction, electric
generator and miscellaneous noise like passenger’s chatting. An
attempt has been made to predict the rise in ambient noise at different
distances. A hemi spherical sound wave propagation model through a
homogeneous free medium is used. The mathematical representation
of the model is as follows:
L(P) = Lps –20 log (d) –8
where Lp = Sound pressure level at distance d,
d = distance in meters
Lps =Point noise source
The cumulative impact of different sources in a partcupat place is
calculated by the logarithmic additional model as
L(P) total = 10 Log (10 Lpq1/10 +10 Lpq2/10 +10 Lpq3/10 +------)
Roughnesses of the contact surfaces of rail and wheel and train speed are the
factors, which influence the magnitude of rail - wheel noise. The vibration of
concrete structures also radiates noise. The maximum noise level is
estimated as 64DB(A). However, due to reduction of vehicular traffic, the road
traffic noise as compared with existing levels may come down by about 7 to
9%.
c) Accidental Hazards: In view of the hazards potential involved due to

failure of system and accident the on-site and off- site emergency
measures have been formulated and will be implemented.
d) Water Supply: CPHEEO has recommended 45-litres/day, water

supply to persons working at railway stations. All the stations are in
urban area. Water requirement at stations has various components,
viz. Personal use of Staff, Fire demand, Make up water for air
conditioning and ventilation, and Wastage. The water demand at each
station would be about 100m3 per day. Adequate provision of drinking
water has to be made for passengers at the railway stations. Platform
washing requirement has been worked out at the rate of 2-lit per sqm.

Fire fighting water requirement has been taken as per Calcutta Metro
norms.
e) Railway Station Refuse: The refuse from railway station includes;

Garbage, Rubbish, and Floor Sweepings. The total refuse generated at
all the stations of the present section under consideration is estimated
to be about 3-4 tonnes/day with the assumption that only about 25% of
the passengers visiting various stations will be producing refuse. For
the maintenance of adequate sanitary facilities, containers/collection
bins not exceeding 120-litres and equipped with side handles will be
appropriately designed and installed at stations and platforms.
f) Visual Impacts: The construction of Versova to Ghatkopar corridor will

bring about a change in visual look of the streets through which it will
operate. An architecturally well-designed structure, which could be
aesthetically pleasing and able to reduce impact due to visual
disfiguration have been incorporated in present corridor. Since a low
profile would cause least intrusion, the basic elevated section should
be optimised at the design stage itself.
9.5 CHECKLIST OF IMPACTS

9.5.1 A typical checklist identifying anticipated environmental impacts is shown in
Table 9.14.
Table 9.14
CHECKLIST OF IMPACTS
Parameter Negative Positive No

Impact Impact Impact
A) Impacts Due To Project Location
i) Change of Land Use and 9
ii) Ecology Nil
Impact on Historical/Cultural
Monument
B) Impact Due To Project Construction
i) Soil Erosion, Pollution and 9
Health Risk at Construction
ii) Site 9
Nil
Traffic Diversions and Risk
iii) to Existing Buildings 9
Impact on Water Quality
C) Impact Due To Project Operation
i) Oil Pollution 9
ii) Noise and Vibration 9
iii) Accidental Hazards 9
iv) Water Supply 9
v) Railway Station Refuse 9
vi) Visual Impacts 9
D) Positive Impacts

Parameter Negative Positive No

Impact Impact Impact
i) Traffic Congestion 9
ii) Reduction, 9
iii) Quick Service and Safety, 9
iv) Less Fuel Consumption, 9
v) Reduction in Air Pollution, 9
vi) Better Roads, and 9
Employment Opportunities
9.6 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Based on environmental baseline conditions, planned project activities and its

impacts assessed, the set of measures to be taken during implementation and
operation to avoid or offset adverse environmental impacts or to reduce them
to acceptable levels, together with the action which needs to be taken to
implement them are enumerated in this section.
9.6.1 Mitigation Measures: Based on project description, Environmental Baseline

Data and Environmental Impacts, it is proposed to prepare the Environmental
Management Plan for the following:
a) Compensation for Loss of Land,
b) Compensation for Loss of Trees,
c) Compensatory Afforestation and Fencing,
d) Compensation for Relocation/Resettlement,
e) Water Supply & Sanitation,
f) Oil Pollution Control
g) Noise Control
h) Vibration Control
a) Compensation for Loss of Land: The land likely to come under

project is 14.26ha. The cost of land for compensation is taken under
the project cost.
b) Compensation for Loss of Trees: There are 123 trees on the
proposed alignment, which are required to be uprooted. The
Compensation for Loss of Trees works out to Rs. 1.2 lakhs.
c) Compensatory Afforestation and Fencing: According to the survey,
about 123 trees are likely to be lost due to the project. 10 times the
number of trees are to be planted as per the general norms of Department
of Forests, administration stipulations. Hence, about 1230 plants are
required to be planted. The total area required for afforestation of these
tress comes to about 0.975ha. It is presumed that government land will be
provided for afforestation, hence no land cost will be involved.
Compensatory afforestation cost (excluding fencing) for 0.975ha will be
about Rs. 1,46,250/- @about Rs.1, 50,000 per ha. Fencing shall be
provided in order to save the saplings from the animals. The cost towards
fencing is estimated to be about Rs. 1,20,000/- Thus, the total cost works
out to Rs. 2.66 lakhs. The recommended plant species for afforestation

include: Papdi, Ghulmor, babool, Pipal, Ashok, Badaam, Dhdkher,

Kodumar, Neem etc.,
d) Compensation for Relocation/Resettlement: The project involves

relocation of shops, commercial cum residential buildings and hutments
along the alignment. As per Resettlement & Rehablatation policy for
Mumbai Urban Transport Project (MUTP) March 1997 and as amended in
December 2000, the principles of resettlement are as follows:
(i) Project affected structures shall be categorized by referring to
ownership, land use and type of construction:
Ownership:
Land and building owned by the same person,
Land owned by one person and building owned by the lessee,
Land and building both leased to lessee,
Land and building occupied by statutory tenants with owner occupant
or where owner is a absentee,
(ii) Land occupied by squatters without any legal title. Category of

squatters includes-non-resident structure owners, resident structure
(iii) Selection of Resettlement Site : The site for resettlement shall be

selected out of the feasible options in consultation with the affected
community as a part of the RAP preparation. The principal criteria for site
selection shall include access to employment opportunities, infrastructure
and social services. Environmental assessment of the resettlement site
shall be carried out as part of the preparation of EMP.
Since, the Maharashtra R&R policy doest not specify the compensation
cost, market survey data have been taken wherever found appropriate.
Following are the details of structures to be relocated due to this project.
About Rs. 671.85lakhs will be paid as compensation for relocation of
shops, commercial cum residential buildings likely to be affected due to
the project along the alignment. The details of replacement cost of
resettlement are presented in Table 9.15. The R&R cost is presented n
Table 9.16.
Table 9.15
REPLACEMENT COST
Cost for Description Average

Land of the area construct
Area
Descri ion Cost
S. No. Plot No Location in
ption @ Rs
Sqm
5,000 per
sq mtrs
Eastern alignment
1. STE8P1 Ghatkopar 284 Pvt Considere Res. Built – 1420000
d in up
project
cost

2. STE8P2 Ghatkopar 266 Pvt Considere Com. Built - 1330000

d in up
project
cost
Western alignment
3 STW1P DO 395 Pvt Considere Commercial 1975000
6 d in
project
cost
4 STW2P DO 2495 Govt. Considere Partly Built – 12475000
3 d in up
project
cost
5 RSW3P Between 600 Pvt Considere Commercial 3000000
1 Versova d in
Station project
Area cost
6 RSW3P DO 52 Pvt Considere Commercial 260000
2 d in
project
cost
7 DPP2 DO 1335 Pvt Considere Open space 46725000
d in in Res. Area
project & two Bldgs
cost (G+7)
TOTAL 67185000
• Based on the market value of land (Rs. 20 to 30 Lakh per acre) in Mumbai city on both
western and eastern side of the alignments, as enquired during the field visits
Table 9.16
R&R #COST
A Compensation for Land Acquisition`

Land Acquisition
1. (A) Land acquisition along eastern side of the 12.641ha.
alignment Considered in project cost.
(B) Land acquisition on Western side of the
alignment
B Compensation for Residential structures
2. Acquisition of residential structures As per Table 9.15 Rs. 671.85
in PAPs in the built up area.
C Acquisition of squatters
structure
3. Acquisition of squatters structure 420 24000/unit* Rs. 125. 1Lakhs
near Lokhand bazar and near
Ghatkopar area.
D Assistance to Vulnerable People
4. BPL/ SC/ ST/ Old Age people 210^ 5000 Rs. 10.08 Lakhs

E Shifting allowance
PAFs =5427 x 0.5 1000 Rs. 27.13 Lakhs
=2713sq.m^^
GRAND TOTAL (A+B+C+D) Rs. 834.16Lakhs.
Say Rs. 834 Lakhs
# The budget is an indicative cost and the detailed R& R cst shall be carried out during
the detailed study and survey which is likely to change the land requirement and the
budget accordingly
* Average size of an encroachment (structure) is about 12sq.m and considering its cost
@ Rs.2000/sq.m
^ Assuming that 50% of affected population falls in this category, based on the sample
analysis.
^^ considering 50% is the floor area can be considered for shifting charges.
e) Water Supply & Sanitation: The public health facilities, such as water
supply, sanitation and toilets are much needed at project location.
Water should be treated before use upto WHO drinking water
standards. In addition, water will be required for contractor’s camps
during construction, for which additional arrangements have to be
made in consultation with the Mumbai Municipal Corporation & Mumbai
Development Authority. The collection and safe disposal of human
wastes are among the most important problems of environmental
health. The water carried sewerage solves the excreta disposal
problems. The sewerage disposal systems should be adopted for
sewage disposal. The total of app. 120 bins of 50-120 litres capacity
will be required which can be accommodated at different stations and
platforms. The total cost for bins works out to be Rs. 2.40 lakhs.
f) Oil Pollution Control: Oil tends to form scum in sedimentation

chambers, clog fine screens, interfere with filtration and reduce the
efficiency of treatment plants. Hence oil and grease removal tank has
to be installed at source. Such tanks usually employ compressed air to
coagulate oil and grease and cause it to rise promptly to surface.
Compressed air may be applied through porous plates located at the
bottom of the tank. The tank may be designed for a detention period of
5 to 15 minutes. Adding Chlorine in an amount of 2.0-mg/l will increase
the efficiency of removal.
g) Noise: There will be an increase in noise level in ambient air due to

construction and operation of this corridor. However, noise levels in the
core city will go down. The increase in levels is marginal; hence local
population will not be adversely affected. However the exposure of
workers to high noise levels especially, near the engine, vent shaft etc.
need to be minimized. This can be achieved by job rotation,
automation, protective devices, noise barriers, and soundproof
compartments, control rooms etc.
The workers employed in high noise level area could be employed in

low noise level areas and vice-versa from time to time. Automation of

equipment and machineries, wherever possible, should be done to

avoid continuous exposure of workers to noise. At work places, where
automation of machineries is not possible or feasible, the workers
exposed to noise should be provided with protective devices. Special
acoustic enclosures should be provided for individual noise generating
equipments, wherever possible.
Pile driving operation can produce noise levels upto 100 dB (A) at a
distance of 25-m from site. This can reduce the noise levels to 70 dB
(A) at a distance of 15m from the piles. Safety precautions as
stipulated in IS: 5121 (1969) ‘Safety Code for Piling and other Deep
Foundation’ need to be adopted.
Noise level from loading and unloading of construction materials can

be reduced by usage of various types of cranes and placing materials
on sand or sandy bag beds. Sound barriers are usually effective along
route having fast traffic. The reduction in noise level increases with
height of barrier. Ballast-less track is supported on two layers of rubber
pads to reduce track noise and ground vibrations.
h) Vibration Control: Vibrations emanates from rail - wheel interaction

and the same can be reduced by minimizing surface irregularities of
wheel and rail, improving track geometry, providing elastic fastenings,
and separation of rail seat assembly from the concrete plinth with
insertion of resilient and shock absorbing pad.
While designing track structure for Mass Rapid Transit System, all the
above points have been taken into consideration in the following ways:
• To prevent development of surface irregularities on the rail, a fairly
heavy rail section of 60-kg/m, 90 UTS, supported at every 60-cm.
has been proposed. Further, rail grinding at regular intervals by Rail
grinding machine have been contemplated.
• Rail will be continuously welded and also will be laid to fine
tolerances, so that any noise/vibration on account of irregular track
geometry could be reduced.
• The vibration generated from rail-wheel interaction will be greatly
absorbed by the elastic fastening system proposed to be used.
9.7 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PLAN

9.7.1 Environmental Monitoring: The environmental monitoring will be required
for the construction and operational phases. The parameters need to be
monitored are: Water Quality, Air quality and Noise levels.
a) Water Quality: Water quality parameters shall be monitored one year

before the construction, during the construction phase and also for at
least three years after the completion of the project (total 10years).
Monitoring shall be carried out at least four times a year to cover
seasonal variations. The parameters for monitoring would be: pH,
Dissolved Oxygen, Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD), Chemical
Oxygen Demand (COD), Total Dissolved Solids, Chlorides, Nitrates,

Sulphates, Total Nitrogen, Total Phosphates, oils and greases etc. The
main monitoring stations could be at near S. V. Road, Andheri (west),
near bus depot, near Varsova station, starplus office, and near
Ghatkopar station the cost for water quality analysis works out to be
Rs. 10.8 lakhs.
b) Air Quality and Noise Levels: Ambient air quality and Noise levels
should be monitored one year before the construction, during the
construction phase (6 years) and for at least three years after the
completion of the project (total 10 years). The proposed monitoring
programme for field monitoring and laboratory analysis of air and noise
is given in Table 9.16. The cost for ambient air quality and Noise levels
monitoring works out to be Rs. 20.2 lakhs.
Table 9.16
PROPOSED MONITORING PROGRAMME FOR AIR AND NOISE QUALITY
Monitori Monitorin Proposed Site Samplin Frequ Cost

ng g g ency (Rs. lakhs)
Paramete Duratio
rs n
Ambient SPM, 1. Varsova Twice Once 2x4x5x10x50
Air SO2, NOx Station week, 4 in a 00=20.00
Quality and CO 2. Near SV Road, weeks seaso
and HC 3. Near Star Plus in a n
4. Near season
G
ha
tk
op
ar
Station
Noise dB (A) -Do- Once a Once 1x4x10x500=
Levels week in a 0.2
year
TOTAL COST 20.20
9.8 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
9.8.1 The Environmental Management System constitutes provision of an

Environmental Division, which should be staffed by an Environmental
Engineer/Officer, an Environmental Assistant and two other assistants
(miscellaneous works). The task assigned should include supervision and co-
ordination of studies, monitoring and implementation of environmental
mitigation measures. An Environmental Advisor shall review progress of the
division every year. Cost of such an establishment has been estimated as Rs.
30.60 lakhs. However, it may be mentioned that this division will be for the
entire MRTS. Therefore, the cots are attributable to another system.

9.9 COST ESTIMATES

9.9.1 All costs involved in Environmental mitigation and management and
monitoring to be put on the account of the proposed project are summarised
in Table 9.17.
Table 9.17
ENVIRONMENTAL COSTS
S. No. ITEM Rs. (Lakhs)

1 Compensation for loss of trees 1.23
2 Compensatory Afforestation & fencing 2.66
3 Compensation for Resettlement 834
4 Monitoring of Water 10.8
5 Monitoring of air/noise during construction 20.2
& operation
6 Establishment of Environment Division 30.6
7 Provision of bins for Railway Station 2.4
Refuse
Total 901.89
8 Miscellaneous items @10% 90.19
GRAND TOTAL 992.08
Say Rs. 9.92 Crores
9.9.2 The Environment Management Plan should be implemented in phases, so

that optimum benefit could be achieved and it should be synchronised with
the construction schedules.

Chapter 10 - Cost Estimates
Chapter 10
COST ESTIMATES
10.1 INTRODUCTION
10.1.1 Detailed cost estimates for Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar corridor have been

prepared covering civil, electrical, signalling and telecommunications works,
rolling stock, environmental protection, rehabilitation, etc. considering 25kv
AC Traction at June, 2004 price level.
10.1.2 While preparing the capital cost estimates, various items have generally been
grouped under three major heads on the basis of (i) route km length of
alignment, (ii) number of units of that item and (iii) item being an independent
entity. All items related with alignment, whether in elevated or at-grade
construction, permanent way, OHE, Signalling & telecommunication, whether
in main lines or in maintenance depot, have been estimated at rate per route
km/km basis. Cost of station structures, other electrical services at these
stations and automatic fare collection (AFC) installations at all stations have
been assessed in terms of each station as a unit. Similarly, for items like
Rolling stock, Receiving Sub-station (RSS)/Traction Sub-station
(TSS)/Auxiliary Sub-station (ASS), service connections, etc. costs have been
estimated in terms of number of units required for each item. In remaining
items, viz. land, utility diversions, rehabilitation, etc. the costs have been
assessed on the basis of each item, taken as an independent entity.
10.1.3 In order to arrive at realistic cost of various items, costs have been assessed
on the basis of accepted rates in various contracts recently awarded by
DMRC for their ongoing works of Line No. 3 (East-West Corridor) & other
works of Line No. 1. A suitable escalation factor has been applied to bring
these costs to June, 2004 price level. For some of the items, tenders have
been finalised recently and most of these tenders are with fixed price rates
(i.e. no escalation is payable during contract period). Such rates have been
adopted, as they are. In some of these tenders, there is an element of
Customs Duty (CD) on the equipment/components to be imported for the
work, Works Tax (WT), etc. built in the quoted rates. The element of customs
duty and works tax has been excluded for working out the project cost.
However the details of taxes and duties are worked out separately.
10.1.4 The capital cost has been worked out for base case, Versova – Andheri -
Ghatkopar alignment with Depot at D N Nagar. Separate costing is done for
the Airport Link (though not recommended) and for a depot at Godrej land
with suitable connection.
10.1.5 The overall capital cost for Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar Corridor, at June,

2004 price level, works out to Rs. 1488 crores, excluding taxes and duties, but
including general charges @ 3% on all items except land and 3%
contingencies on all items. The abstract capital cost estimates are shown at
Table 10.1.

TABLE 10.1 : CAPITAL COST ESTIMATE (BASE CASE)

Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar Corridor
Total Length 11.07

km
Western Segment 3.21 km
Eastern Segment 7.86 km
Elevated Stations 12
DEPOT at D N Nagar
June 2004 price level
S. Description Unit Rate Qty.
No. Amount
1 Land
1.1 Eastern Segment
Private Land
a Andheri Vacant Hact. 31.320 0.095 2.96
b Marol Naka Vacant Hact. 13.560 0.065 0.88
c Subhash Nagar Vacant Hact. 9.500 0.027 0.25
d Asalpha Road Hact. 10.590 0.040 0.42
e Ghatkopar Residential Hact. 46.400 0.028 1.32
f Ghatkoper RS Hact. 94.980 0.027 2.53
Total (Eastern Segment) 0.281 8.36
1.2 Western Segment
1.2.1 Govt. Land Hact. 18.000 0.031 0.56
1.2.2 Private Land
a Azad Nagar Commercial Hact. 87.730 0.017 1.47
b Azad Nagar Vacant Hact. 38.720 0.065 2.52
c Azad Nagar Residential Hact. 64.530 0.002 0.10
d D N Nagar Depot (Vacant) Hact. 21.750 12.250 266.44
Total (Western Segment) 12.365 271.10
1.3 Temporary land required for construction Hact. 3.600 6.330 22.79
Depot
1.4 Misc. Boundary wall etc. for both Km. 0.500 4.800 2.40
Eastern and Western Segment
Total of item 1 304.65
2 Alignment & formation
2.1 Elevated section R. Km. 22 11.07 243.54
Total 243.54
3 Station Buildings (Elevated)
3.1 Type A (Normal Stations) Each 10 8 80.00
3.2 Type B (Junction Station) Each 11 1 11.00
3.3 Type C (major stations) Each 12 3 36.00
Total 127.00
4 P. Way
4.1 Ballastless track for Elevated section R. Km. 4.95 11.07 54.80
Total 54.80
5 Traction & Power, Lifts & Escalators
5.1 Traction & Power incl. OHE, ASS etc. R. Km. As per Table 68.58
5.2 Lifts Each 0.2 39 7.80
5.3 Escalators Each 0.8 50 40.00
Total 116.38

6 Signalling, Telecom & AFC

6.1 Sig. & Tellecom Stn. 11.5 11.07 127.31
6.2 Automatic fare collection Stn. 2.5 12 30.00
Total 157.31
7 Depot
Elevated structures, Equipment, Track, 130.00
Boundary etc.
8 Rolling Stock Each 4.25 56 238.00
9 Resettelment and Rehabilitation LS 7.00
10 Misc. Utilities, road works misc. other R. Km. 3 11.07 33.21
civil works such as median, stn.
signages, Environmental protection
etc.
10 Total of all items except land 1107.23
11 General charges 3 % on all items except
land 33.22
12 Total of all items 1 to 11 1445.10
13 Contingencies 3% on all items. 43.35
Gross Total 1488.45
Say Rs. 1488.00 Crores
10.2 CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
10.2.1 Land
i) Land requirements have been kept to the barest minimum & worked
out on area basis. For elevated alignment, no land is proposed to be
acquired permanently, except small areas for locating entry/exit
structures, traffic integration, etc. at stations.
ii) Cost of land for the depot (12.25 hact.) has been taken @ 21.75 crores
per hact. These are based on prevailing rates of land in this area as
per Ready Reckaner & these have been increased to provide for 30 %
solatium & 12 % interest.
iii) 0.36-hac private land is proposed to be acquired. Rates for private

land both commercial & residential have been based on rates in Ready
Reckoner published by Architects publishing Corp. of India, Mumbai
(2004 edition). Over & above these rates, provision for 30 % solatium
& 12 % interest has been made.
iv) Cost of the land to be acquired permanently, has been considered in

the project construction cost.
v) In addition to the lands required permanently, 6.33 hact. of private land

is temporarily required for construction depots. Ground rent charges for
3 years @6% per year of the cost of land (i.e. @ 3.60 Crore/Hact.)
have been provided for, in the project cost estimates.

vi) Cost of boundary wall required at stations has been added to the cost
of land.
10.2.2 Formation & Alignment
i) Elevated Section-Rates are based on accepted rates of Barakhamba

Road-Dwarka section, duly updated to June 2004 price level.
10.2.3 Station Buildings
i) Elevated Stations-Estimated rate is based on accepted rates for stations

on Dwarka - Barakhamba Road Corridor and modified for 6 coach length
platforms. The cost includes the general services at the stations but
excludes the cost of viaduct, lifts & escalators, which have been
considered separately under, respective items.
10.2.4 Permanent Way-For elevated sections, ballastless track and for at-grade
alignment and in depot area ballasted track has been planned. Rates adopted
are based on accepted rates for Shahdara-Rithala Section, which covers both
ballastless & ballasted tracks.
10.3 DEPOT
10.3.1 For this section of about 11.07 km., depot at D N Nagar has been proposed.
The depot is planned at an elevated level due to land constraints. Costs have
been worked out for various items of building, elevated structures, tracks,
boundary wall & plants machinery etc. This depot can also be used for the
North - South line of the Metro Network.
10.3.2 A depot at Godrej land is also proposed which can be constructed at ground
level. For this purpose 20 Ha land is proposed to be acquired. The cost for
this depot is not included in the main estimate but indicated seperately. The
cost also includes the cost of approach track for this depot.
10.4 UTILITY DIVERSIONS

10.4.1 Costs per running meter of various utilities like trunk and main sewers, water
mains, storm water drains etc. requiring diversion have been worked out. The
costs of utility diversions involved in elevated stretches have been considered
under head utility diversions. In addition to sewer/drainage/water pipelines
other important utilities works considered are road diversions, road restoration
etc.
10.5 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
10.5.1 Provision for environmental impacts of this MRTS corridor has been made to
cover various protection works, additional compensatory measures,
compensation for loss of trees, compensatory afforestation and fencing,
monitoring of water quality, air/noise pollution during construction,
establishment of Environmental Division.

10.6 REHABILITATION & RESETTLEMENT
10.6.1 Private Structures-Provision towards compensation/rehabilitation of these on

private land, likely to be affected has been assessed after site inspection. The
provision is kept in the estimate though it is stated that the most of the
rehabilitation shall be done under road widening and D P Road construction
schemes.
10.7 TRACTION & POWER SUPPLY
10.7.1 Provisions have been made to cover following subheads:

• OHE (Flexible).
• Receiving-cum-Traction Sub-stations including cables.
• ASS for elevated and at-grade stations.
• Service connection charges for Receiving Sub-stations.
• Scada augmentation.
• Catenary maintenance vehicle.
• Miscellaneous items e.g. illumination, lifting T&P, etc.
10.7.2 The rates adopted for various items are based on the accepted contract rates
for similar works for NS & rail corridors. These rates include escalation during
contract period but exclude CD & WT & are provided in consultation with
DMRC. The details of the cost for traction and power supply is given in Table
10.2.
Table 10.2
Figures in Rs. Crores
S. item Qty, Unit Unit Total Taxes & duties
No. rate cost Custom Excise Salex Wor Total of
(W/o duty duty@ Tax@4% ks Taxes &
taxes & @44.7% 16% cont duties
duties) ract
tax
@4
%
Service connection
1 charges ( 33kV bays)
Versova RSS
2 No. 0.25 0.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Arrey RSS 2 No. 0.25 0.50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
33kV cables (3
2 phase single circuit)
From Versova RSS to
Depot RSS 2 Km. 0.60 1.20 0.00 0.12 0.04 0.05 0.21

From Arrey RSS to

Marol Naka RSS 6 Km. 0.60 3.60 0.00 0.37 0.11 0.14 0.62
3 Depot RSS 1 No. 6.06 6.06 0.00 0.52 0.15 0.24 0.91
4 Maro Naka RSS 1 No. 5.60 5.60 0.00 0.47 0.14 0.22 0.83
ASS for elevated
5 stations 12 No. 1.32 15.90 0.34 1.50 0.43 0.64 2.91
33kV cables (Ring
main, feeder &
interconnection
6 cables 35 Km. 0.25 8.75 0.00 0.89 0.26 0.35 1.50
7 25kV OHE 22 TKM 0.60 13.20 0.00 1.35 1.35 1.35 4.04
SSP, SP & motorised

8 isolators 1 LS 2.50 2.50 0.00 0.26 0.07 0.10 0.43
9 SCADA System 1 LS 3.52 3.52 0.50 0.18 0.05 0.14 0.87

Catenary Maint
10 Vehicle 1 LS 2.50 2.50 0.36 0.05 0.01 0.00 0.42
DOT charges for
11 clearance 1 LS 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Necessary spares,
tools , fault
diagnosis equip,
Earthing, Bonding
12 etc. 15 Rkm 0.25 3.75 0.53 0.19 0.06 0.15 0.93
Grand Total 68.58 1.73 5.89 2.66 3.38 13.66
10.8 ELECTRICAL SERVICES AT STATIONS
10.8.1 These are included in estimated costs of stations on elevated alignment

section. Cost of escalators, lifts for all stations have not been included in
station costs, are therefore provided under electrical estimates & shown
separately.
10.9 SIGNALLING & TELECOMMUNICATION WORKS
10.9.1 The rates adopted are based on accepted rates of N. S. & rail corridors of line
no.3. These rates include escalation during manufacture & supply of
equipment and their installation at site, but exclude CD and WT. The same
rates have been adopted.
10.10 AUTOMATIC FARE COLLECTION
10.10.1Adopted rates are based on accepted contract rates of Rail and N-S
Corridors of line no.3. These rates exclude CD & WT, but include escalation
during the period of equipment manufacture and their supply, including
installation.

10.11 ROLLING STOCK
10.11.1Adopted rates are in consultation with DMRC & do not include CD and WT.
These cover escalation during period of supply.
10.12 GENERAL CHARGES & CONTINGENCIES
10.12.1 Provision @ 3% has been made towards general charges on all items
except cost of land, based on assessment by DMRC. Design charges of 2%
are not included in the cost estimates as the project is being planned on BOT
as design and construct basis. Provision for contingencies has been made @
3% on all items including general charges.
10.13 TAXES AND DUTIES
Estimate for taxes and duties is given in Table10.3. It is estimated that the
taxes and duties will amount to Rs. 182 crore and the total cost inclusive of
taxes and duties is Rs. 1670 crores
TABLE 10.3
Details of Taxes and Duties
East-West (Elevated)
Taxes and duties

Total cost without custom works excise sale Total cost with
Taxes & duties duty tax duty tax total tax & Duties
1 Land 304.65 304.65
Civil Engg.
2 Works
Elevated
section 243.54 0.00 9.74 0.00 0.00 9.74 253.28
Station bldg
ele. 127.00 0.00 5.08 0.00 0.00 5.08 132.08
Misc.like
Utilities etc. 40.21 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 40.21
Permanent
way 54.80 22.73 2.27 0.00 0.00 25.00 79.80
Electrical
3 works
Traction and
power supply 68.58 1.73 5.89 2.66 3.38 13.66 82.24
Lifts &
Esclators 47.80 5.57 0.11 5.02 0.44 11.14 58.94
S and T
4 Works
S&T 127.31 28.64 5.09 1.02 0.25 35.01 162.32
AFC 30.00 6.75 1.20 0.24 0.06 8.24 38.24

5 Depot** 130.00 14.78 2.35 1.77 1.95 20.85 150.85
6 Rolling stock 238.00 0.00 - 38.08 14.85 52.93 290.93
General
charges &
7 Contigencies 76.57 76.57
Total 1488.46 80.20 31.74 48.78 20.93 181.66 1670.12
SAY 1670 Crores
10.14 Cost with Alternative Proposals
Two alternatives have been proposed along with the main corridor. These are:
(i) Link to International Airport
(ii) Link to Godrej Depot
The estimated project cost for these links are shown in annexure 10.1 and
10.2 respectively.
(a) Project Cost with Airport Link
Estimated cost of the airport link Rs. 90 Crores
Total cost including Airport Link Rs. 1578 Crores.
(b) Project cost with Godrej Depot (excluding D N Nagar Depot)
Estimated cost of Godrej Depot

including Link Line Rs. 469 Crores
Total cost with two Depots Rs. 1957 Crores
Cost with Goderej Depot only Rs. 1545 Crores
It is observed that the cost for depot at D N Nagar (Rs. 412 crores) is less
than the cost for Godrej depot due to 1.625 km link line.
The taxes and duties for the two alternatives is given in Annexure 10.3 a and
10.3 b respectively. The taxes and duties on Air port link amunts to Rs. 12.84
crores while on the Godrej Depot (inclusive of link line) is Rs. 26 crores.

Annexure 10.1
Project Cost-Estimates of Airport Link

Length = 1.3 Km. (Elevated)
Station 1 Elevated
S. Item Unit Qty. Rate Amount
No. without (In
Taxes Crores)
(In Crores)
1.1 Land L.S. 4.00
Sub Total (1) 4.00
2.0 Alignment and Formation
2.1 Elevated Section R. Km. 1.3 22.00 28.60
Sub Total (2) 28.60
3.0 Station Buildings elevated Each 1 12.00 12.00
4.0 Depot Augmentation LS 0.00
5.0 P Way
Ballstless track for elevated
5.1 section R.Km. 1.3 4.95 6.44
6.0
6.1 Traction & power supply R. Km. 1.3 5.00 6.50
6.2 Lifts & Escalators Each 1 4.00 4.00
Sub total (6) 10.50
7.0 Signalling and Telecom.
7.1 Sig. & Telecom. R. Km. 1.3 11.50 14.95
7.2 Automatic fare collection Stn. 1 2.50 2.50
Sub Total (7) 17.45
Utilities (0.2+1.5+2.00+0.5
8.0 Elect) R. Km. 1.3 3.00 3.90
9.0 R&R LS 1.00
10.0 Rolling Stock Each Nil 4.25 0.00
Total of all items except
10.0 Land 79.89
General Charges @ 3 %
11.0 on all items except land 2.40
Total of all items including
12.0 G. Charges@ 3% 86.28
15.0 Continegencies @ 3 % 2.59
16.0 Gross Total 88.87
Say 90 Cr.

Annexure 10.2
Project Cost-Estimates of Godrej Depot Link

Length = 1.625 Km. (Double Line)
Elevated incl. Ramp =1.125 Km. At-grade = 500 mtr.
S. Item Unit Qty. Rate Amount
No. without (In Crores)
Taxes
(In Crores)
1.1 Land for alignment L.S. 3.00
Land for Depot Hact 20.00 14.57 291.40
Sub Total (1) 294.40
2.0 Alignment and Formation
2.1 Elevated Section R. Km. 22.00 1.125 24.75
2.2 At-grade Section R. Km. 6.05 0.5 3.03
Sub Total (2) 27.78
3.0 Station Buildings elevated Each Nil 1
4.0 P Way
Ballstless/Ballassted track for
4.1 elevated section R.Km. 1.625 4.95 8.04
Sub Total (4) 8.04
5.0
5.1 Traction & power supply R. Km. 1.625 5.00 8.13
5.2 Lifts & Escalators Each Nil
Sub total (5) 8.13
6.0 Signalling and Telecom.
6.1 Sig. & Telecom. R. Km. 1.625 5.00 8.13
6.2 Automatic fare collection Stn. Nil
Sub Total (6) 8.13
7.0 Depot LS 100.00
8.0 Utilities R. Km. 1.625 2.00 3.25
9.0 R&R LS 1.00
10.0 Rolling Stock Each Nil 4.25 0.00
11.0 Total of all items except Land 156.32
General Charges @ 3 % on all
10.0 items except land 4.69
Total of all items including G.
12.0 Charges 455.41
13.0 Continegencies @ 3 % 13.66
14.0 Gross Total 469.07
Say 469 Cr.

Annexure 10.3 a
Airport link (Elevated)
Taxes and duties Total cost

S Total cost without custom works excise sale with tax &
No Item Taxes & duties duty tax duty tax total Duties
1 Land 4 4
Civil Engg.
2 Works
Elevated section 28.60 0.00 0.05 1.14 0.07 1.26 29.86
Station bldg ele. 12.00 0.00 0.02 0.48 0.03 0.53 12.53
Misc.like Utilities
etc. 4.90 0.00 0.01 0.00 0.01 0.02 4.92
Permanent way 6.44 2.67 0.01 0.27 0.02 2.96 9.40
3 Electrical works
Traction and
power supply 6.50 0.16 0.32 0.56 1.29 2.34 8.84
Lifts & Esclators 4.00 0.47 0.01 0.42 0.04 0.93 4.93
4 S and T Works
S&T 14.95 3.36 0.60 0.12 0.03 4.11 19.06
AFC 2.50 0.56 0.10 0.02 0.00 0.69 3.19
General Charges
5 and Contigencies 4.99 4.99
Total 88.88 7.23 1.11 3.01 1.49 12.84 101.72
Total Taxes &

Duties SAY 102 Crores

Annexure 10.3 b
Godrej Depot
Taxes and duties Total
cost
with
Total cost without custom works excise sale tax &
Taxes & duties duty tax duty tax total Duties
1 Land 294.4 294.4
2 Civil Engg. Works

Elevated section 27.78 0.00 0.00 1.11 0.00 1.11 28.89
Station bldg ele. 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Misc.like Utilities
etc. 4.25 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 4.25
Permanent way 8.04 3.33 0.00 0.33 0.00 3.67 11.71
3 Electrical works
Traction and
power supply 8.13 0.20 0.40 0.70 1.62 2.92 11.05
4 S and T Works
S&T 8.13 1.83 0.33 0.06 0.02 2.24 10.37
5 Depot 100.00 11.37 1.81 1.36 1.50 16.04 116.04
General Charges
5 and Contigencies 18.35 18.35
Total 469.08 16.74 2.54 3.57 3.13 25.98 495.06
Total with Taxes

& Duties SAY 495 Crores

Chapter 11 : Financing Viability, Fare Structure and Financing Option
CHAPTER 11
FINANCIAL VIABILITY, FARE STRUCTURE AND FINANCING

OPTIONS
11.1 INTRODUCTION
The Ghatkopar – Andheri – Versova Line of Mumbai Metro is proposed to be

constructed from 2006-2009. The fixed cost of the project at June 2004 prices
is estimated to be Rs. 1488 crore, excluding taxes and duties but including the
cost of land (Rs. 305 crore). With an estimated escalation factor of 5% p.a. the
project would cost Rs. 1720 crore on completion. This cost does not include
the element of interest during construction (IDC). Land cost is not escalated
since land acquisition would have to be completed in the initial two years of the
construction period and, hence, should not invite any escalation.
11.2 Costs
11.2.1 Investment Cost
11.2.1.1 For the purpose of calculating the Financial Internal Rate of Return (FIRR), the
completion cost of Rs. 1720 crore has been taken as the initial investment. The
cash flow of this investment is in Table –11.1 below.
Table 11.1 Year –wise Investment
Figs in Rs. Cr.
Construction
Year Cost (Fixed) Land Cost Completion Cost
2006-07 59 152.50 217
2007-08 414 152.50 628
2008-09 473 571
2009-10 177 225
2010-11 59 79
Total 1183 305 1720
11.2.1.2 Although the construction is expected to get over by 31st March 2009 the cash
flow spills up to March 2011 on account of payment normally required to be
made to the various contractors up to that period necessitated by contractual
clauses.
11.2.1.3 The land cost is divided into two initial years during which it is expected that
the land acquisition work would be over and related payments would have to
be released.
11.2.1.4 The escalation factor used is 5% p.a.
11.2.1.5 These costs do not take into account taxes and duties. In case taxes and
duties are taken into account the fixed cost at June 2004 prices is estimated
at Rs. 1670 crore and the completion cost at Rs. 1936 crore.

11.2.2 Additional Investment

Total additional investment cost of Rs.108 crore (at June 2004 price level)
has been provided in the years 2024 and 2034. These costs have been
provided to take care of increased requirement of Rolling Stock and related
equipment on account of the increased traffic since the existing rolling stock
would be insufficient to carry the traffic estimated in these years. These costs
have been brought to the current price level by using an escalation factor of
5% p.a.
11.2.3 Operation & Maintenance Costs

11.2.3.1 The Operation & Maintenance costs can be divided into three major parts:
(i) Staff costs
(ii) Maintenance cost which include expenditure towards upkeep
and maintenance of the system and consumables
(iii) Energy costs
11.2.3.2 The staff is assumed to be provided @ 45 persons per kilometer and the
annual cost on this account in the year 2009 is estimated at Rs. 20.19 crore.
The escalation factor used for staff costs is 9% per annum to provide for both
escalation and growth in salaries.
11.2.3.3 The cost of other expenses is based on the O & M unit cost expected for the
Delhi Metro Phase-1 project. The rate of electricity assumed in the Delhi
Metro study is about Rs. 2.30 per unit whereas at present in Mumbai the
applicable rate is Rs. 4.50 per unit. The latter has been used for all
calculations. The O&M cost for Mumbai metro (excluding staff cost) has been
obtained by providing an escalation of 5% per annum.
11.2.3.4 The total O&M cost in the year 2009 is expected to be Rs. 75.39 crore. The
year-wise O&M costs are as indicated in Table 11.2 below:
Table 11.2 Operation and Maintenance Costs

Figs in Rs. Cr.
Maintenance
Year Staff Expenses Energy Total
2009 20.19 36.25 18.95 75.39
2010 22.00 38.06 19.90 79.97
2011 23.98 39.97 20.90 84.85
2012 26.14 41.97 21.94 90.05
2013 28.49 44.06 23.04 95.60
2014 31.06 46.27 24.19 101.52
2015 33.85 48.58 25.40 107.83
2016 36.90 51.01 26.67 114.58
2017 40.22 53.56 28.00 121.79
2018 43.84 56.24 29.40 129.48
2019 47.79 60.23 30.87 138.89
2020 52.09 64.51 32.42 149.01
2021 56.78 75.86 37.28 169.92
2022 61.89 81.25 39.14 182.28
2023 67.46 87.02 41.10 195.57
2024 73.53 93.20 43.15 209.88
2025 80.14 99.81 45.31 225.27
2026 87.36 106.90 47.58 241.83

2027 95.22 114.49 49.96 259.66
2028 103.79 122.62 52.45 278.86
2029 113.13 131.32 55.08 299.53
2030 123.31 140.65 57.83 321.79
2031 134.41 165.40 66.51 366.32
2032 146.51 177.14 69.83 393.48
2033 159.69 189.72 73.32 422.74
2034 174.07 203.19 76.99 454.25
2035 189.73 217.62 80.84 488.19
2036 206.81 233.07 84.88 524.76
2037 225.42 249.62 89.12 564.16
2038 245.71 267.34 93.58 606.63
2039 267.82 286.32 98.26 652.40
2040 291.93 306.65 103.17 701.75
2041 318.20 328.42 108.33 754.95
2042 346.84 351.74 113.75 812.32
2043 378.05 376.71 119.43 874.20
11.2.4 Depreciation
Although depreciation does not enter the FIRR calculation (not being a cash
outflow) unless a specific depreciation reserve fund has been provided, in the
present calculation, depreciation calculations are placed for purpose of
record. These are taken @ 3% of the total completion cost adjusted for land
cost.
11.2.5 Replacement Cost
The replacement costs are provided for meeting the cost on account of
replacement of equipment due to wear and tear. With the nature of
equipment proposed to be provided for Mumbai Metro, it is expected that only
10% of the equipment comprising signalling and electrical works would
require replacement after 20 years. These roughly add up to 10% of the
project cost. Further, 25% of the project cost comprising Rolling Stock and
traction is expected to have a life of 30 years after which it shall be required to
be replaced. These costs have been provided duly escalated @ of 5% per
annum.
11.2.6 The interest charge on the loan is assumed to be 11%. The IDC element
forms part of the principal amount of the loan to be repaid as part of the loan.
11.3 Revenues
11.3.1 Fare box
11.3.1.1 Traffic
11.3.1.1 a. In the year 2009 traffic has been estimated at 3.91 lakh trips per
day. This is 50% of the traffic projected for full phase 1 operations. Traffic
has been taken as 60% of the projected traffic in the years 2021 &
2031.These percentages have been applied to full phase1 traffic since with a
single sectional functioning traffic is likely to be restricted to about 60%.
Further, for the year 2011 this has been taken as 50% since traffic develops
with a lagged effect. The traffic figure for 2009 has been derived from the
growth factor for the traffic from 2011-2021.
Year Trips per day @ 60% of full network

traffic
2009 3.91
2011 4.28 (50%)
2021 6.65
2031 8.83
11.3.1.1 b.The growth rate for traffic from 2011 to 2021 is assumed at 4.51% per annum
and after 2021 @ 2.88% per annum.
11.3.1.2 Trip Distribution
The distribution has been assumed as in Table 11.3 below: -
Table 11.3 Trip Distribution
Distance in kms. Percent distribution

0-3 20%
3-8 55%
>8 25%
The graphic presentation of the same is placed below in Figure-11.1.
Figure 11.1 –Trip Distribution
Trip Distribution
60.00%
50.00%
% of trips
40.00%
30.00%
20.00%
10.00%
0.00%
0-3 3.-8 >8
Average Distance (kms)
11.3.1.3 Fare Structure

The fare structure has been estimated @ 1.5 times of the ordinary bus fare
prevalent in the year 2009. The present bus fares have been merged into
three slabs and the bus fare for the year 2009 have been obtained by
escalating the existing BEST fares by an overall factor of 10%. The metro fare
obtained by multiplying the bus fare by 1.5 times has been rounded off to the
closest rupee. These fares have been escalated once every two years @ 5%
per annum since it is not possible to carry out changes in fare every year. The
fare table used is as depicted in Table 11.4.

Table 11.4 Fare Structure in 2009

Metro
Bus Fare - Bus Fare - 1.5 times fare -
Distance in kms 2004 2009 bus fare 2009
0-3 3 3.3 4.95 5
3.-8 5 5.5 8.25 8
>8 7.5 8.25 12.38 12
11.3.2 Other sources of revenues

Other revenues from Property Development and advertisement have been
estimated at 5% of the fare box revenues. Apart from development of
property on metro stations and depot it is possible to raise resources through
leasing of parking rights at stations, advertisement on trains and tickets,
advertisements within stations and parking lots, advertisements on viaducts,
columns and other metro structures, co-branding rights to corporates, film
shootings and special events on metro premises.
11.4 Financial Internal Rate of Return (FIRR) and Return on Equity

11.4.1 The Financial Internal Rate of Return (FIRR) obtained with the above
revenues and costs is 7.56 % over a horizon period of 30 years of operation
(2009-2039). This is produced in Table 11.5.
Table 11.5 –FIRR

Figs in cr. (Rs.)
Completion Runnin Net
Cost and g Replace Fare Cash
Additional Expens ment Total Box PD & Total Flow
Year Capital es Costs Costs Revenue ADVT Revenue For IRR
2006 217 217 0 -217
2007 628 628 0 -628
2008 571 571 0 -571
2009 225 75.39 300 114.73 5.7 120.46 -180
2010 79 79.97 159 119.90 6.0 125.89 -33
2011 0 84.85 85 138.15 6.9 145.06 60
2012 0 90.05 90 144.38 7.2 151.60 62
2013 0 95.60 96 166.36 8.3 174.68 79
2014 0 101.52 102 173.87 8.7 182.56 81
2015 0 107.83 108 200.33 10.0 210.35 103
2016 0 114.58 115 209.37 10.5 219.84 105
2017 0 121.79 122 241.24 12.1 253.30 132
2018 0 129.48 129 252.12 12.6 264.72 135
2019 0 138.89 139 290.50 14.5 305.02 166
2020 0 149.01 149 303.60 15.2 318.78 170
2021 82 169.92 252 349.81 17.5 367.30 116
2022 0 182.28 182 359.89 18.0 377.88 196
2023 0 195.57 196 408.20 20.4 428.61 233
2024 0 209.88 210 419.96 21.0 440.96 231
2025 0 225.27 225 476.34 23.8 500.16 275
2026 0 241.83 242 490.06 24.5 514.56 273

2027 0 259.66 260 555.85 27.8 583.64 324
2028 0 278.86 279 571.86 28.6 600.45 322
2029 0 299.53 289 588 648.63 32.4 681.06 93
2030 0 321.79 303 625 667.31 33.4 700.68 76
2031 267 366.32 633 756.90 37.8 794.74 162
2032 0 393.48 393 787.17 39.4 826.53 433
2033 0 422.74 423 902.57 45.1 947.70 525
2034 0 454.25 454 938.68 46.9 985.61 531
2035 0 488.19 488 1076.29 53.8 1130.10 642
2036 0 524.76 525 1119.34 56.0 1175.31 651
2037 0 564.16 564 1283.43 64.2 1347.61 783
2038 0 606.63 607 1334.77 66.7 1401.51 795
2039 0 652.40 2351 3004 1530.45 76.5 1606.97 -1397
2067 8146 2943 13157 17032 852 17884 7.56%
The FIRR, in case taxes and duties are included in the project cost, is placed
as Annexure 1. The various sensitivities with regard to increase/decrease in
capital costs, O&M costs and revenues are placed in Table 11.6 below: -
Table 11.6 –FIRR Sensitivity

CAPITAL COSTS
20% 10% 10% 5%
Increase Increase decrease Decrease
FIRR 6.02% 6.77% 8.43% 7.99%
REVENUES
5% 10% 10% 20%
Increase Increase Decrease decrease
FIRR 8.33% 9.04% 5.73% 3.12%
O&M COSTS
10% 10%
Increase Decrease
FIRR 6.75% 8.31%
These sensitivities have been carried out independently for each factor.
11.4.2 The post tax return on equity is 6.73% (Annexure 2). In case taxes and duties
are also included in the cost the return on equity falls to 5%. In such a
scenario it would be difficult to sustain the project on its own and government
support would be required. The level of support required (assuming inclusion
of taxes and duties in the project cost) in the scenario of debt equity ratio of
1.5:1 is as shown in Table 11.7.
Table 11.7
Government Return on
Support (Rs. Equity (post
Cr.) tax)
50 5.37%
100 5.76%
150 6.11%
200 6.46%
250 6.85%
300 7.23%
350 7.61%
400 8.01%
450 8.42%
500 8.86%
550 9.29%
600 9.70%
650 10.17%
700 10.61%
750 11.06%
Annexures 3 & 4 depict the cashflows with a grant of Rs. 500 crore and Rs.
750 crore respectively in the scenario of D/E ratio of 1.5:1. Annexures 5 & 6
show the cashflows with a grant of Rs. 500 crore and Rs. 750 crore in the D/E
ratio of 2:1.
11.5 Financing Options

11.5.1 Background
11.5.1.1 Rail-based systems are heavily capital intensive with long gestation periods.
They are viewed more as investments with a view to increasing the economic
benefits to the society at large rather than yielding high financial rates of
return. Very few metros all over the world are able to cover their operating
costs and therefore grants and subsidies for operations as well as additional
investments are the order of the day. However, history is full of examples
where volume of traffic is not very high except in areas like Japan and Hong
Kong. Since costs of operation are more or less fixed in nature, any increase
in passenger volumes would improve the viability of the system. There are
other issues peculiar to this nature of travel. The setting up of such systems
generates externalities which normally do not get monetised and flow back to
the system to sustain its development. In other words, the economic benefits
flowing to the society and other benefits generated by the setting up of metro
systems do not get translated to monetary benefits for the system itself. Very
few countries have been able to channelise these as sources of revenue back
to the system.
11.5.1.2 Since the governing objective of setting up these systems is social the fares
are set at levels which are publicly and politically acceptable thus setting in
the vicious cycle of deficits leading to a fallback on subsidies/government
support.
11.5.2 Alternative Models of Financing
11.5.2.1 A wide variety of models can be theoretically considered for financing of
metros ranging from completely government owned to totally privatised.
There are certain benefits and drawbacks of both. Whereas completely
government owned lack transparency and are shackled by bureaucracy the
completely privately owned ones would not serve the social sector but be
lured by the objective of profit maximisation. The social purpose of such
projects can never be ignored, however, at the same time it is of utmost
importance to run these systems with efficiency comparable to the private
sector. These purposes can be served by creating an SPV independent of the
bureaucratic controls and vested with sufficient powers to run the system
independently or be evolving some form of Public –Private partnership which
would bring together the strengths of both the public and private sectors. The
Delhi metro model is the SPV model which has been able to construct and
run the system efficiently without compromising the social objective.
11.5.2.2 SPV Approach: The Corporate model involves the formation of a special
purpose vehicle (SPV) to own/implement and also to operate the project.
There is a possibility/potential of involving some private sector entity as
equity holder. The financial structure of the project can then be determined
in such a way that a part of the capital cost is contributed as equity and the
remaining is borrowed as senior or subordinate debt from the government,
financial institutions, banks or bilateral / multilateral funding agencies.
Another source of funding which has been extensively used in Hong Kong is
funds from real estate development for financing capital expenditure. In this
case upfront contribution required from the equity holders is much less than
the project cost. The debt and the interest there on are repaid by the SPV
from its net revenue streams. Long time debt is normally possible only when
government guarantees are made available for repayment of loan as well as
for the interest charges there on. Because of the need for high volume of
debts, the project viability depends to a large extent on the rate of interest
and the tenure of the debt. The SPV, being a corporate body, has flexibility in
implementation and operation of the project. It can be responsive to
customer requirement and can attempt various ways of revenue
augmentation. SPV being a corporate body is liable to pay corporate tax and
other taxes if applicable. The above model can be further improved upon if
after construction the SPV hands over the operations and maintenance of the
same to a private body.
11.5.2.3 Public-Private Partnerships

11.5.2.3.1The various forms Public-private partnerships can take are Supply and
service contracts, Management contracts, Leases, Concessions, Joint
ventures and Divestiture. Supply and service contracts and management
contracts are in the nature of contracts awarded to a private party as out
sourced jobs or management of the operations. Concessions not only give
the private operator the responsibility of O&M of utility asset but also for
investment. The ownership remains with the government but full use rights
vest with the operator. Concessions are a form of lease in which the
contractor agrees to make certain fixed investments and retains the use of the
assets for a longer contract period. In this approach, the state (or municipality
or other public entity) delegates the right to provide a service to the private
sector and yet retains some control over the sector by incorporating a
concession contract or license defining the terms and conditions (including
the rights and obligations of the service provider) that will govern the
infrastructure project or company. This type of arrangement is most suited to
sectors with monopolistic characteristics. This may take the form of lease and
operate (or affermage) contract, under which the private contractor is
responsible at his own risk for providing the service, including operation and
maintenance of the infrastructure against payment of a lease fee. The other
forms of concession could be BOOT/BOT/BOO. These are used generally for
Greenfield projects. The concessionare in such projects is also responsible
for building and financing new investments. At the end of the concession term
the sector assets are returned to the state. BOO (build own operate) is a
similar scheme but it does not involve transfer of assets. All these forms of
concession stipulate transferring of the right and the obligation to provide an
infrastructure service to a private company. This company takes over
responsibility for the operations and at least for a part of the commercial risk
of service provision. The concessionaire is, by and large, held responsible for
achieving specified results in service delivery and is given some freedom to
choose the means for meeting those targets.
11.5.2.3.2 The success of this type of contracts depends on their duration which reflects
the number of years the investors need to recoup their investment. In the
French style concessions (affermage) the assets return to the state at the end
of the period free of charge or for a nominal amount. The public authority
remains responsible for financing most investments; hence, affermage are
shorter (10-15 years) than Greenfield BOTs or concessions requiring major
upfront capital expenditures. In the latter cases these can exceed 30 years.
11.5.2.3.3 The concessionaire approach has not been adopted in the rail based urban
transit system in India because the project construction costs are very high.
This naturally involves requirement of huge amount of debt to be raised from
the market sources to undertake such a project. The highway sector has been
quite successful in the country in developing Highway projects through the
BOT .Power sector has a very limited experience of project development
under BOO route.
11.5.2.3.4 It is important to understand that project beyond the size of Rs 300 cr have not
been successful in attracting debt in the Indian market. Recent experience of
road sector suggests that projects in the size of Rs 50 to Rs 200 cr could only
be developed under BOT mechanism, with majority of projects in the lower
end category. The success of these projects was solely dependent on the
assurance of traffic or revenue. These projects were based on a clearly
defined risk mitigation mechanism.
11.5.2.3.5 There is no available history to justify the development of mega transport
projects under BOT route in India except in the case of Konkan Railway
Corporation. KRCL was the first effort by the Indian Railways in the form of a
corporate enterprise for the construction of a railway track. The finances for
KRCL came from the promoters – the Ministry of Railways and the State
governments of Goa, Maharashtra, Karnataka and Kerala- and the issue of
tax-free bonds. The funds could be secured at an average cost of 11%. . This
emerges from the inability of the major debt market players to provide
resources for large projects. The other, and the most important factor
responsible for the inability of raise resources from the market is the inability
of project developer to come out with a risk mitigation mechanism acceptable
to the lenders.

11.5.3 Options for Financing of Mumbai Metro

11.5.3.1 The consultant is of the view that two possibilities regarding funding of
Mumbai metro can be examined. The first is the SPV model based on the
Delhi Metro approach. In this model the element of equity contribution by the
government is suggested at 40% against 28% in Delhi Metro since in the
case of the latter the exchange rate fluctuation risk is being borne by the
government. Apart from this the land cost should be made available by the
State government. The balance amount of funds (41% of project cost) should
be raised by external/ domestic debt. The external debt is characterised by
exchange rate fluctuation whereas the domestic debt rates are much higher
as compared to external funding. Government guarantees would be required
in both the cases.
11.5.3.2 The second possibility of funding Mumbai metro is through the PPP route.
The land would be made available to the concessionaire free of cost and of
the balance project cost 40% would be funded out of equity. The share of the
government in the equity would be 26% and the balance would have to be
brought in by the concessionaire. It is also presumed that the additional
capital required in the years 2024 and 2034 would be shared in the same
proportion as the original investment. The residual value of the investment at
the end of the concession would be nil. The cashflows showing the
concessionaire’s expected position are shown in Annexures 7 & 8.
11.5.3.3 In this option Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation’s (MMRC) role would be limited
to that of a regulatory authority. Thus MMRC would monitor the
implementation of the project and on its commissioning perform the tasks
such as laying down passenger fares, targets for the minimum number of
services to be run by the Concessionaire, their frequency, punctuality,
reliability and safety, etc. MMRC, in this option, will have to enter into an
agreement with the Concessionaire clearly listing out obligations and rights of
the Concessionaire and the client. Following are the important terms, which
are usually included in the agreement.
• Land required for the project and equity for the project shall be made
available to the Concessionaire. The balance project cost is to be
mobilised by the Concessionaire himself.
• Implementation of the project and its subsequent operation and
maintenance is to be the responsibility of the Concessionaire. The
concession is for a period of 30 years of construction plus the period of
construction.
• A guarantee for the minimum level of ridership would be required to be
given to the concessionaire. If this level of ridership does not
materialize for any reason, the Concessionaire will have to be
compensated for the shortfall.
• Operation and maintenance expenditure for the project shall be borne
by the Concessionaire. All revenues generated shall go to the
Concessionaire including revenues from property development,
advertisements, etc.
• Standards to which the assets of the project are required to be
maintained and the quality of the assets at the time of transfer of these
assets to the Client at the end of the concession period should be
clearly spelt out.

• Normally a metro system will require addition of assets like rolling

stock, etc. over a period of time due to increase in traffic. The source of
funding of the same is explicitly spelt out in the agreement — the
Concessionaire or the Client. Similarly, the responsibility of
replacement of assets on completion of their life, if due during the
period of Concession, is clearly spelt out — whether by the client or the
Concessionaire.
• A mechanism for quick resolution of disputes between the
Concessionaire and the Client is provided for.
• Insurance liability of the Concessionaire is indicated.
• The Concessionaire transfers all the assets to the Client at the end of
the concession period at a nominal residual value.
11.6 IMPLEMENTATION THROUGH PPP

Generally a MRTS project is high cost infrastructure project and normally
implemented through governmental support. There are very few examples of
undertaking an urban transport project through Public - Private Partnership
(PPP). However at present Government of India is encouraging private
participation in the infrastructure projects. It is felt that the MRTS on Versova -
Andheri - Ghatkopar corridor can be implemented through PPP due to
following reasons:
i) The corridor is very busy and congested.
ii) This will provide link between Central and Western Railway suburban
system connecting suburbs on the east and west side
iii) Considerable reduction in Journey time (more than 50%)
iv) Metro is more reliable, efficient and provides more comfort at very
reasonable price.
v) Commuters in Mumbai are habitual of public transport as modal share
in favour of public transport is 88%.
vi) The length of the corridor is about 12 km and doesn't cost very high for
private participation
vii) Likelihood of connecting with North - South Corridor which shall help in
increases in ridership.
However, the response for the same will be known only after testing the
market. The only risk involved is loss of time in case of insufficient response.
This would lead to cost overruns.
11.7 RISK ANALYSIS

Normally certain risks are involved with the implementation of such large
infrastructure projects. These risks are enhanced with implementation through
PPP. The major risks involved are:-
• Construction risk
• Revenue risk
• Operations risk
• Financial risk
• Legal risk
• Commercial risk
• Exchange rate risk
• Policy risk
• Guarantees
• Exclusivity
• Speed of process
Table 11.8 identifies some of the main risks in the project and suggested
mitigation measures. However, as mentioned earlier, the work of selection of
suitable concessionaire should be done through specialised consultant as
success of implementation of Metro project on PPP shall depend on suitable
concessionaire.
Table 11.8
Risk Mitigation Measures
Relevant
Document(s)/
Main Risks Risk Mitigation measures
contract(s) to
cover the risk
Commuter No competitive mode of public transport

Volume Risk Due diligence by concessionaire on traffic
risk
NIL
Traffic risk guarantee not a solution as the
same encourages inefficiencies
The fares of rail as well as well as competing Safety clause in

bus system should be set by an independent concession on
Passenger
regulator to ensure that bus fares are not setting up of
Fare Increase
subsidized regulator.
Risk
Better if independent regulator is in place
before grant of license or concession
Increase in
Lump sum fixed time construction contract
Capital Cost
with considerable penalty and bonus
and EPC Contract
provision
implementatio
n period
Technical audit by
Poor
Penalty for poor upkeep. Agreement should regulator to be
Maintenance
provide for detailed specification and provided for in
of
standards. concession/ license
Infrastructure
agreement.
Risk of Proper conditions in
bankruptcy in the agreement for
Competent financial advisor to help avoid
case of poor take over of assets
over-zealous bids.
financial and smooth O&M in
returns case of bankruptcy
Non Selection of competent consultant for bid
Performance process management
Relevant clauses in
by Proper pre-qualification and selection
the Bid document
Concessionair process
and Agreement
e Reasonable equity stake in project vehicle
compulsory for main operator

Adequate Performance Guarantees from the
Concessionaire
Poor
Agreement should
maintenance Penalty for poor upkeep.
provide for detailed
of rolling stock
specification and
standards.
Specific provisions
in agreement for
frequency during
Insufficient peak and non-peak
To be covered under minimum frequency
investment in period. Some
clause for which train sets for peak and non-
trains sets flexibility to
peak periods has to maintained
concessionaire
necessary for the
sake of financial
viability
Mandatory filing of safety plan with Regulator
and implementation of the same
Continuous monitoring of safety plan, with Concession/
Safety Risk stiff penalty for non compliance License Agreement
Proper Disaster Management Plan to be in
place in coordination with other civic
authorities
Government to assist concessionaire on
Law and order stations.
risk in trains, Concessionaire to hire security staff for
as well as, at security during operations. The
Agreement
stations concessionaire security staff to work under
Conditions
overall supervision of state police
Concession
Risks
Protection against fire, rioting, general Agreement to
associated
stampede provide for
with any public
Insurances and better management through insurances, as well
utility serving
trained security personnel in trains as well as as, for level of
people at
at stations. training required for
large.
the staff
Natural and Concession
Insurances, Insurance costs to be part of
force majeure Agreement and
cash flows
risks Contract
Agreements to
ensure proper
coverage

GOM to ensure payment of Debt Due and

Direct and equity investments on line of NHAI policy in
Concession
Indirect case of Direct and In-Direct political risk
Agreement to
Political Risk events
provide for
Political risk insurances may prove costly
payments in case
and counter productive for the project
of such events
Lower equity and investment and more
management commitment may reduce
overall political risk on investment.
Concession
Agreement to
Third party Insurances, Insurance costs to be part of specify amount and
Liability risk cash flows type of Insurances
to be maintained
and assignments
Concessionaire to bear the risk.
Pre-qualification process and specific
guarantee to ensure financial strength of the Concession/
Financing Risk
Concessionaire Financial closure condition License agreement
must before start of condition.
Regulatory
risk Concessionaire to bear the risk
Competent, independent Regulator. Concession
Clear and unambiguous scope of regulation Agreement
Appeal process should be available
Concession
Agreement to
GOM and Concessionaire
mention enactment
Legal Risk Enact and notify the required laws
of laws (if required)
as conditions
precedent
11.8 RECOMMENDATIONS
It is felt that the response to an attempt at PPP may not be encouraging
unless the government agrees to give an upfront subsidy of Rs. 500-750
crore (depending on the exemptions and relaxations made available) to the
project apart from the equity contribution. Hence, it is recommended that the
SPV model may be followed for Mumbai Metro. The component of debt, not
being very high in absolute terms, could be arranged through the domestic
market or by tapping external sources of debt. This effort would be
strengthened by the fact that the Project FIRR is 7.56%.

Annexure 1
PROJECT FIRR
Fare
Running Box Net Cash
Completion Expense Replacemen Total Revenu Pd & Total Flow For
Year Cost s Depreciation t Costs Costs e Advt Revenue IRR
2006 227 227 0 -227
2007 701 701 0 -701
2008 658 658 0 -658
2009 259 75.39 49.41 335 114.73 5.7 120.46 -214
2010 91 79.97 49.41 171 119.90 6.0 125.89 -45
2011 0 84.85 49.41 85 138.15 6.9 145.06 60
2012 0 90.05 49.41 90 144.38 7.2 151.60 62
2013 0 95.60 49.41 96 166.36 8.3 174.68 79
2014 0 101.52 49.41 102 173.87 8.7 182.56 81
2015 0 107.83 49.41 108 200.33 10.0 210.35 103
2016 0 114.58 49.41 115 209.37 10.5 219.84 105
2017 0 121.79 49.41 122 241.24 12.1 253.30 132
2018 0 129.48 49.41 129 252.12 12.6 264.72 135
2019 0 138.89 49.41 139 290.50 14.5 305.02 166
2020 0 149.01 49.41 149 303.60 15.2 318.78 170
2021 82 169.92 51.86 252 349.81 17.5 367.30 116
2022 0 182.28 51.86 182 359.89 18.0 377.88 196
2023 0 195.57 51.86 196 408.20 20.4 428.61 233
2024 0 209.88 51.86 210 419.96 21.0 440.96 231
2025 0 225.27 51.86 225 476.34 23.8 500.16 275
2026 0 241.83 51.86 242 490.06 24.5 514.56 273
2027 0 259.66 51.86 260 555.85 27.8 583.64 324
2028 0 278.86 51.86 279 571.86 28.6 600.45 322
2029 0 299.53 58.71 325 625 648.63 32.4 681.06 56
2030 0 321.79 66.05 341 663 667.31 33.4 700.68 37
2031 267 366.32 74.05 633 756.90 37.8 794.74 162
2032 0 393.48 74.05 393 787.17 39.4 826.53 433
2033 0 422.74 74.05 423 902.57 45.1 947.70 525
2034 0 454.25 74.05 454 938.68 46.9 985.61 531
2035 0 488.19 74.05 488 1076.29 53.8 1130.10 642
2036 0 524.76 74.05 525 1119.34 56.0 1175.31 651
2037 0 564.16 74.05 564 1283.43 64.2 1347.61 783
2038 0 606.63 74.05 607 1334.77 66.7 1401.51 795
2039 0 652.40 138.99 2649 3301 1530.45 76.5 1606.97 -1694
2285 8146 1864 3316 13747 17032 852 17884 6.60%

D/E
RETURN ON TOTAL EQUITY (PROJECT RATI
COST WITHOUT TAX) O 1.5 :1 ANNEXURE 2
Retu
rn Retur
Net IDC + on n on
Runnin Fare Cash Finan Equi Equity
Comple g Replace Box Total Flow Repay cing Cumula ty - -
tion Expens Depreciat ment Total Reven PD & Reven For Equi Loa ment Of Charg Intere tive PRE POST
Year Cost es ion Costs Costs ue Advt ue IRR ty n Loan es st PBT cash TAX TAX
2004 0
2005 0
2006 217 217 0 -217 189 0 -189 -189
2007 628 628 0 -628 189 177 13.86 -189 -189
2008 571 571 0 -571 189 424 42.20 0 -189 -189
114.7 120.4
2009 225 75.39 44.37 300 3 5.7 6 -180 0 231 6.74 66 -65 -21 -21 -21
119.9 125.9
2010 79 79.97 44.37 159 0 6.0 0 -33 0 16 2.36 92 -90 -67 -46 -46
138.1 145.0
2011 0 84.85 44.37 85 5 6.9 6 60 0 93 -77 -100 -33 -33
144.3 151.6
2012 0 90.05 44.37 90 8 7.2 0 62 0 100 -83 -138 -39 -39
166.3 174.6
2013 0 95.60 44.37 96 6 8.3 8 79 0 91 100 -66 -251 -112 -112
173.8 182.5
2014 0 101.52 44.37 102 7 8.7 6 81 0 91 100 -64 -361 -110 -110
200.3 210.3
2015 0 107.83 44.37 108 3 10.0 5 103 0 91 90 -32 -440 -79 -79

209.3 219.8
2016 0 114.58 44.37 115 7 10.5 4 105 0 91 80 -19 -506 -66 -66
241.2 253.3
2017 0 121.79 44.37 122 4 12.1 0 132 0 91 70 17 -536 -30 -30
252.1 264.7
2018 0 129.48 44.37 129 2 12.6 2 135 0 91 60 31 -552 -16 -16
290.5 305.0
2019 0 138.89 44.37 139 0 14.5 2 166 0 91 50 72 -527 25 25
303.6 318.7
2020 0 149.01 44.37 149 0 15.2 8 170 0 91 40 85 -488 39 39
349.8 367.3
2021 82 169.92 46.83 252 1 17.5 0 116 33 49 91 30 120 -412 43 13
359.8 377.8
2022 0 182.28 46.83 182 9 18.0 8 196 0 101 25 123 -343 69 69
408.2 428.6
2023 0 195.57 46.83 196 0 20.4 1 233 0 10 15 171 -135 208 208
419.9 440.9
2024 0 209.88 46.83 210 6 21.0 6 231 0 10 4 180 82 217 217
476.3 500.1
2025 0 225.27 46.83 225 4 23.8 6 275 0 10 3 225 344 262 262
490.0 514.5
2026 0 241.83 46.83 242 6 24.5 6 273 0 10 2 224 605 261 261
555.8 583.6
2027 0 259.66 46.83 260 5 27.8 4 324 0 0 1 276 927 323 323
571.8 600.4
2028 0 278.86 46.83 279 6 28.6 5 322 0 0 0 275 1249 322 322
648.6 681.0
2029 0 299.53 52.91 289 588 3 32.4 6 93 0 0 0 329 1342 93 93
2030 0 321.79 59.42 303 625 667.3 33.4 700.6 76 0 0 319 1418 76 76

1 8
756.9 794.7
2031 267 366.32 67.42 633 0 37.8 4 162 107 160 32 0 361 1814 290 290
787.1 826.5
2032 0 393.48 65.47 393 7 39.4 3 433 0 32 18 350 2198 383 245
902.5 947.7
2033 0 422.74 65.47 423 7 45.1 0 525 0 32 14 445 2676 479 305
938.6 985.6
2034 0 454.25 65.47 454 8 46.9 1 531 0 32 11 455 3165 489 311
1076. 1130.
2035 0 488.19 65.47 488 29 53.8 10 642 0 32 7 569 3800 635 415
1119. 1175.
2036 0 524.76 65.47 525 34 56.0 31 651 0 0 4 582 4447 647 422
1283. 1347.
2037 0 564.16 65.47 564 43 64.2 61 783 0 0 0 718 5231 783 509
1334. 1401.
2038 0 606.63 65.47 607 77 66.7 51 795 0 0 0 729 6025 795 515
-
1530. 1606. 139
2039 0 652.40 65.47 2351 3004 45 76.5 97 -1397 0 0 0 889 4629 7 -1058
105 7.81
2067 8146 1611 2943 13157 17032 852 17884 7.56% 7 1120 65 1077 7050 % 6.73%

Chapter 12 : Economic Analysis
Chapter 12
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
12.0 INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the undertaking an economic evaluation is to provide a overall

picture of the contributions of the MRT system to broadly defined social goals
thereby justifying its implementation. The economic viability is commonly
expressed in terms of Economic Internal Rate of Return (EIRR).
12.1 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS APPROACH
12.1.1 The economic appraisal of MRT Corridor from Varsova- Andheri to Ghatkopar
in Mumbai has been carried out within the broad framework of Social Cost –
Benefit Analysis Technique. It is based on the incremental costs and benefits
and involves comparison of project costs and benefits in economic terms
under the “with” and “without” project scenario. In the analysis, the cost and
benefit streams arising under the above project scenarios have been
estimated in terms of market prices and economic values have been
computed by converting the former using appropriate shadow prices. This has
been done to iron out distortions due to externalities and anomalies arising in
real world pricing systems. The annual streams of project costs and benefit
have been compared over the analysis period of 30 years to estimate the net
cost/ benefit and to calculate the economic viability of the project in terms of
EIRR.
12.1.2 The Economic Internal Rate of Return (EIRR) for the project has then been
arrived using Discounted Cash Flow technique to the net benefit stream at
economic prices.
12.2 EVALUATION ASSUMPTIONS
The key evaluation assumptions used in the economic evaluation are listed in
Table 12.1
Table 12.1 KEY EVALUATION ASSUMPTIONS
PARAMETER ASSUMPTION
Price Level June’2004
First year of operation 2009
Last year of operation 2039
Construction period 3 years (2006-2009)
Daily to annual factor 340
12.3 ESTIMATION OF COSTS
12.3.1 The project cost comprises capital cost, operation and maintenance cost .
Cost components considered for the purpose of this exercise include:
· Capital cost of infrastructure (civil engineering, land, track, power
supply, traction system, signalling and telecommunications, etc.) and
rolling stock.
· Operating cost of MRTS
Table 12.2 summarizes the estimated cost (Rs. in Crores) to economy for
Varsova - Andheri- Ghatkopar Corridor of Mumbai MRTS. The completion
cost is estimated at Rs. 1720 Cr. assuming escalation factor of 5%.
TABLE 11.2
ESTIMATED COST TO ECONOMY FOR VARSOVA - ANDHERI-
GHATKOPAR CORRIDOR OF MUMBAI MRTS IN 2010
SYSTEM COST Rs. In Crores
MRTS Capital cost

(AT JUNE 2004 PRICES) 1488
Completion Cost 1720
Operating Cost 79.97
12.4 ESTIMATION OF BENEFITS
12.4.1The Varsova - Andheri- Ghatkopar corridor of Mumbai MRTS will yield tangible
and non-tangible savings due to equivalent reduction in road traffic and
certain socio-economic benefits. Introduction of MRT will result in reduction in
number of buses, usage of private vehicles, air pollution and increase the
speed of road-based vehicles. This, in turn, will result in significant social
benefits due to reduction in fuel consumption, vehicle operating cost and
travel time of passengers. Reduction in accidents, pollution and road
maintenance costs are the other benefits to the society in general.
12.4.2.The benefit stream that has been evaluated and quantified includes:
· Capital and operating cost (on present congestion norms) of carrying

the total volume of passenger traffic by existing bus system and private
vehicles in case MRTS project is not taken up.
· Savings in operating costs of all buses and other vehicles due to de-
congestion including those that would continue to use the existing
transport network even after the MRTS is introduced.
· Savings in time of commuters using the MRTS over the existing

transport modes because of faster speed of MRTS.
· Savings in time of those passengers continuing on existing modes,

because of reduced congestion on roads.
· Savings on account of prevention of accidents and pollution with

introduction of MRTS.

· Savings in road infrastructure and development costs that would be

required to cater to increase in traffic, in case MRTS is not introduced.
· Savings in fuel consumption on account of less number of vehicles on

road and decongestion effect with introduction of MRTS are included in
those of vehicle operating cost.
The values used for various parameters used for the analysis are given in
Appendix –1.
12.4.3 Quantification of some of the social benefits has not been attempted because
universally acceptable norms do not exist to facilitate such an exercise.
However, it has been considered appropriate to highlight the same, as given
below:
· Reduced road stress

· Better accessibility to facilities in the influence area
· Economic stimulation in the micro region of the infrastructure
· Increased business opportunities
· Overall increased mobility
· Facilitating better planning and up-gradation of influence area.
· Improving the image of the city.
12.5 TRANSPORT DEMAND ON MRT CORRIDOR

12.5.1 At present the transport demand on Varsova - Andheri- Ghatkopar is being
met mostly by buses operated by BEST and by suburban trains with
interchange at Dadar station. Part of the demand is also met by IPT modes
and private modes. As explained in Chapter 11, the transport demand for
various years is given in Table 12.3. The growth of traffic between 2011 –
2021 is assumed at 4.51% per annum and after 2021 @ 2.88%.
TABLE 12.3
TRANSPORT DEMAND F ORECAST ON VARSOVA - ANDHERI-
GHATKOPAR CORRIDOR OF MUMBAI MRTS
ITEM 2011 2021 2031

Total Trips (Lakh) 8.56 11,08 14.72
Trips on MRTS (Lakh) 4.28 6.65 8.83
Trips by other modes (Lakh) 4.28 4.43 5.89
12.5.2 The traffic on MRTS will come from shifting from traffic from buses, train, IPT
and private modes. The major shifting of traffic would be from buses. It has
been estimated that 210 buses are likely to decrease with the introduction of
this MRT corridor. This will save Rs. 65.37 Crores in the year 2011 towards
capital and operating cost of bus system. The saving in respect of private
vehicles will be approx. Rs. 70.52Crores.

12.6 REDUCTION IN TRAFFIC CONGESTION

12.6.1 MRT will contribute towards reducing the congestion and journey time on
roads because of diversion of some traffic to MRTS. Reduction in traffic
congestion will save the necessary capital investment and vehicle operating
cost as well as increase in time saved per vehicle. With the implementation
this MRTS corridor, the savings from operating costs due to decongestion
effect of MRTS has been estimated to be Rs 55.60 Crore in the year 2011.
12.7 REDUCTION IN FUEL CONSUMPTION

12.7.1 Savings in fuel consumption with the introduction of Mumbai MRTS have
already been included in savings of vehicle operating cost. The effect of
MRTS on fuel savings alone has been calculated separately as follows. The
main fuels used in vehicles are CNG and petrol. The saving because of fuel
alone from the savings in vehicle operating costs and savings due to
decongestion effect for the year 2011 works out to Rs 47.22 Crore as shown
in Table 12.3.
TABLE 12.3
SAVINGS IN FUEL ALONE WITH THE PROJECT SCENARIO IN YEAR 2011
(Rs. in Crores)
PARAMETERS SAVINGS
Savings in CNG/Diesel due to

- Less number of vehicles 11.92
- Decongestion effect 1.69
Savings in Petrol due to
- Less number of vehicles 15.64
- Decongestion effect 17.96
TOTAL 47.22
12.8 PASSENGER TIME SAVING

12.8.1 With the introduction of Mumbai MRTS, there will be reduction in traffic
congestion on the roads and correspondingly, there will be saving in time of
commuters travelling by various modes of road transport. Similarly, MRTS
System itself being faster than conventional road transport modes, will also
lead to considerable saving in time of commuters travelling on MRTS. The
passenger timesavings per passenger would be maximum for train
passengers who are taking change over at Dadar. With the implementation of
the project the passenger timesavings are estimated at Rs.133.57 Crore for
the year 2011.
12.9 SAFETY
12.9.1 The reduction in traffic volumes on roads brought about by modal transfer to
Varsova - Andheri- Ghatkopar MRTS is expected to reduce number of
accidents. Any reduction in number of accidents will involve savings from
damage to vehicles and savings towards medical and insurance expenses to
persons involved in accidents. The benefits because of accidents prevented

with the introduction of this MRTS corridor works out to Rs.1.39 Crores in the
year 2011.
12.10 REDUCED AIR POLLUTION

12.10.1The benefits because of saving in cost of prevention of vehicular pollution,
with the implementation of Varsova - Andheri- Ghatkopar Corridor of Mumbai
MRTS in the year 2011 is expected to be Rs 10.13Crores.
.
12.11 SAVINGS IN ROAD INFRASTRUCTURE
12.11.1The MRT corridor may bring savings in investment in road infrastructure
because shifting of passengers to MRT and withdrawal of vehicles in the
project area. Since no local data is available concerning the road
infrastructure investment on this account, this saving has not been
incorporated into economic evaluation.
12.12 SHADOW PRICING

The value of Project cost and benefits have been expressed in terms of
market prices. These prices, however, do not reflect the real resource cost
and value of benefits derived from the project to the economy. The market
prices are distorted due to variety of factors. These factors could be
controlled/administered prices of inputs, monopolistic market of inputs, tax
structure etc. The factors used for converting project inputs and output to
economic costs are given in following Table 12.4
S.NO ITEM FACTOR

1 CAPITAL COST 0.85
2 OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE COST 0.80
3 SAVINGS IN CAPITAL & OPERATING COST OF 0.89
BUSES
4 SAVINGS IN CAPITAL & OPERATING COST OF 0.8
PRIVATE VEHICLES
5 SAVINGS IN PASSENGER TIME 1.0
6 SAVINGS IN VOC 1.1
7 SAVINGS IN ACCIDENT COSTS 1.0
8 SAVINGS IN POLLUTION COSTS 1.0
12.13 RESULT OF ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

12.13.1 The cost and benefit streams for 38-year period in the economic prices have
been worked out and presented in Tables 12.5 for Varsova - Andheri-
Ghatkopar corridor of Mumbai MRTS. The residual value of MRTS facilities
(e.g. Metro and Rail corridors, equipment for power supply and tele-
communication, rolling stock, etc.) in last year has not been taken into
account as benefit in these tables. The total cost worked out on the above
basis is then subtracted from the total benefits to estimate the net benefit of
the project. This flow is then subjected to the process of discounting to work
out the internal rate of return on the project, to examine the viability of the
Project in Economic terms. Thereafter, the Project EIRR in economic terms
has been arrived by using shadow prices.
12.13.2 The EIRR in economic terms works out to 21.53% for Varsova - Andheri-
Ghatkopar Corridor of Mumbai MRTS.
12.14 SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

12.14.1 A sensitivity analysis of the EIRR with 10% cost overrun and 10% reduction
in traffic materialisation (separately) has been carried out. The EIRRs under
these scenarios are given in Table 12.6.
TABLE 12.6
EIRRs - SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
SENSITIVITY EIRR (%)
Basic EIRR 21.53
With increase in cost by 10% 20.00
With reduction in traffic materialization by 10% 21.04
With 10% reduction in traffic and increase in cost by 19.55
10%
12.14.2 It can be seen from the above table that 10% increase in cost affect
economic viability more than it does in case of reduction in traffic the project.
Accordingly, it is recommended that controls should be exercised required for
to keep the cost of construction under control.

Chapter 13 – Implementation Plan
CHAPTER 13
IMPLEMENTATION PLAN
13.1 WAY FORWARD FOR IMPLEMENTING THE PROJECT
On receipt of the Detailed Project Report, following action will require to be

taken for implementing the Versova - Andheri - Ghatkopar section of Mumbai
Metro project:
· Approval of the Detailed Project Report by Maharashtra State

Government and the Central Government, both the Governments
committing to an investment decision.
· Signing of an MOU between Maharashtra State Government and the

Central Government for firming up arrangements for equity and other
related items pertaining to this project.
· Setting up of a special purpose vehicle for implementing the project. As

per current status MMRDA has been nominated for implementing this
corridor through Public – Private Partnership (PPP).

· In case the project cann't be implemented through PPP, the two

Governments to agree to financing of the debt portion of the project and
also to the time frame for completing the project.
Normally above actions will require about 6 to 8 months. However selection of

concessionai re may take one year. During this period the implementing agency
can go ahead with the following preliminary work.
· Preliminary action for diversion of utility and preparation of estimates

thereof.
· Reservation of land along the corridors, identification and survey for

acquisition.

13.2 INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENTS
To enable the Mumbai Metro rail project to be implemented without any loss of
time and cost over-run, effective institutional arrangements would need to be
set up. Details of these arrangements are explained below:
Two options are available to implement Mumbai Metro project. It may either be
implemented through PPP, as decided by the Government of Maharashtra or
as per DMRC model through SPV.
13.2.1 Special Purpose Vehicle
Experience of implementing Delhi Metro project has shown that a Special

Purpose Vehicle (SPV), vested with adequate powers, is an effective
organisational arrangement to implement and subsequently operate and
maintain a metro rail project. An SPV should, therefore, be set up for Mumbai
Metro and registered under the Companies Act, 1956. This SPV should be on
the same lines as Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd. (DMRC) and may be
named as ‘Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.’ (MMRC). Since equity will be
contributed in equal proportion by the State and the Central Governments, it will
have equal number of Directors on its Board from these two Governments.
While the Managing Director of MMRC should be the nominee of the State
Government, its Chairman should be the Secretary, Ministry of Urban
Development & Poverty Alleviation, being the nominee of the Central
Government. In order to avoid delays usually associated with bureaucratic
process of decision-making, the Board of Directors (BOD) of MMRC should be
vested with full powers needed to implement the project. The BOD, in turn,
should delegate adequate powers to the Managing Director to take all decisions
in day-to-day matters. The Managing Director should be a technocrat of proven
record and impeccable integrity. A railway background would be an added
advantage. A metro background would be most desirable.
13.3 Implementation Schedule (PPP)
The suggested implementation schedule for implementing the project on PPP

basis is given in Table 13.1. As stated earlier, MMRDA is the implementing
agency for Versova – Andheri – Ghatkopar corridor on PPP model.

Table 13.1
Suggested Implementation Schedule on BOT

3 Arranging Consultant for selection of Completed
concessionai re
4 Calling for Tender on BOT (Based on In progress
Feasibility Report)
5 Finalising Suitable Concessionaire 30.05.2005
6 Financial closer 30.11.2005
7 Execution of work and Procurement of 01.12.2008 – 31.12.2008
8 Testing and Commissioning 01.12.2008 – 3.12.2008
The land acquisition process can start immediately after approval of DPR so
that land is available before construction works take off.
It is also recommended to appoint an independent engineering consultant to
monitor and advise MMRDA during the execution phase.
13.4 IMPLEMENTATION THROUGH SPV
In case the PPP approach is not successful, the project can be implemented
through public sector as in case of Delhi. In such a case a SPV is to be formed
on the pattern of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (DMRC) and can be named as
MMRC (Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation). Once the SPV formed, it has to take
action for appointment of General Consultants for project management
including preparation of tender documents. Till the General Consultants are in
position, MMRC should appoint an interim Consultant for all preliminary and
enabling jobs such as land acquisition, detailed design of civil structures, utility
diversions, etc.
A suggested project implementation schedule is given below. The proposed

date of commissioning of the section with suggested dates of important
milestones is given in Table 13.2.

Table 13.2
Implementation Schedule through SPV

3 Attempt to fix Concessionaire 30.05.2005
4 Fix interim Consultant for preliminary 30.06.2005
works
5 Fix General Consultant 31.12.2005
6 Tender Finalisation for Civil Works for 30.06.2006
Viaduct
7 Execution of works and Procurement of 01.07.2006 - 31.06.2009
13.4.1 Civil Works
All civil contracts will be on “Construct” basis. Therefore all designs are to be
finalised and progress in advance.
· Detailed design contracts for elevated structures/stations.

· Construction contracts for elevated structures/stations.
The number of contracts can be decided when the detailed design work is in
progress. Architectural finishes, fire fighting arrangements and general
electrification, will form part of civil contracts.
13.4.2 System Contracts
· Design, construct and installation for Traction and Power Supply.

· Design, construct and installation of Signal and Telecommunication works.
· Design, construct and installation of lifts.
· Design, construct and installation of escalators.
· Design, construct and commissioning of Automatic Fare Collection System.
· Design and supply of rolling stock.
· Installation of track in Depot and on main line.
· Design and installation of Signages.

13.4.3 Depot Contracts
Following contracts are proposed for Depot works:
· Design of Depot layout and buildings.

· Construction of Depot including general electrification.
Supply of Depot Equipment, the number of contracts may be decided as and

when the work is in progress.
13. 5 ORGANIZATIONAL SET UP of MMRC
Implementing a metro project in a congested metropolis is indeed a challenge.

In sheer size, magnitude and technical complexity there are no parallels to
metro projects. Further, these projects are to be carried out in difficult urban
environment without dislocating city life, while at the same time preserving the
environment. The project involves integration of a number of complex technical
systems – some of these technologies used in these systems are totally new to
the country – each one of which is a major project by itself. Interfacing various
system contracts is a difficult and highly skilled exercise. Side by side, timely
and adequate funds have to be assured for implementation and lands, without
encumbrances, have to be taken possession of in time. Clearances from the
local authorities have to be taken permission to cut trees, diversion of utilities,
management of road traffic, etc., all of which will call for an efficient and
competent project implementing agency.
Metro projects cannot be executed the way Government agencies execute

projects in this country. Timely completion is very important to safeguard the
financial viability. Competent and skilled technical personal to man such an
organisation are difficult to mobilize. In fact such experienced persons are not
readily available in the country. Being a rail based project, for most of the
systems such as rolling stock, signaling, telecommunication, traction power
supply, etc., persons with railway background would be necessary. It is
therefore, impossible to have a single organisational set up which can be
responsible for all aspects of metro implementation, namely investigation,
planning, designs, drawing up of specifications, preparation of tender
documents, fixing of contractors, supervising the contractor’s works, ensuring
interface fusion between different contractors, ensuring quality and safety
during constructions, planning and supervising integration system trials and
getting the project commissioned on time.
It is, therefore, suggested that a two-tier organisation with well-defined

responsibilities for getting this project executed be set up. At the apex will be
the MMRC itself. It should be a lean but effective organisation with full mandate
and total power – with accountability- free from political and bureaucratic
control. The second level will be a project management team called “General

Consultants” who will be engaged by the MMRC on contract basis and who will
be fully responsible for planning, design and full project management. In fact
they will be the “Engineer” for the MMRC, who is the “client “The General
Consultants should be fixed on the basis of competitive bidding, the way
General Consultants were fixed for the Delhi Metro Project. If any further
detailed design consultants are needed, the same should be engaged by the
General Consultants as their sub-consultants within their own contract
responsibilities.
Learning from the Delhi Metro experience, we would recommend that all major
contracts are awarded on “construct basis” based on designs and specifications
finalised by the General Consultants. In certain system contracts such as
signaling, tele-communication, automatic fare collection, etc. it may be desired
to go for “design and construct” contracts based on broad technical
specifications and performance requirements drawn up by the General
Consultants. International Consultants are very expensive and should be
engaged only in area where Indian experts cannot manage and they should
invariably be part of the General Consultants’ team.
Since MMRC will not have the required expertise and experienced manpower to
check and monitor the General Consultants it may be necessar y to engage
proof Consultants from the very start who will do this job on behalf of MMRC.
Delhi Metro Rail Corporation can be considered for being appointed as Proof
Consultant to MMRC.
Generally the General Consultants will cost about 2.5% of the project and cost
the Proof Consultants about 0.5%.
The MMRC Organisation, as stated earlier, should be very lean but effective. It
will consist of a non-executive Chairman, a Managing Director with full
Executive Powers (in Schedule ‘A’) and three Functional Directors (in Schedule
‘B’) including Director (Finance). All the three Functional Directors will be full
members of the Management Board. The Directors will be assisted by Heads of
Departments in each of the major disciplines and they in turn will have Deputy
Heads of Departments. The organisation should be basically officer-oriented
with only Personal Assistants and Technical Assistants attached to senior
officers by eliminating unproductive layers of staff such as Peons, Clerks, etc.
We strongly recommend that the total organisational strength is limited to 45 to
50 eliminating too many tiers to enable faster decision-making. An
organizational chart for MMRC is enclosed .
It is necessar y for the MMRC officers to get exposed to the Metro technology
and Metro culture through study tours of some of the selected foreign Metros
and Delhi/Calcutta Metros.

13.5.1 High Power Committee
During the implementation of the project several problems with regard to

acquisition of land, diversion of utilities, shifting of structures falling on the
project alignment, rehabilitation of project affected persons, etc. are likely to
arise. For expeditious resolution of these problems, an institutional mechanism
needs to be set up at the State Government level. Towards this end, it is
recommended that a High Power Committee under the chairmanship of Chief
Secretary, Maharashtra should be set up. Other members of this Committee
should be Secretaries of the concerned Departments of the State Government
and Heads of civic bodies who will be connected in one way or the other with
the implementation of the project. This Committee should meet once a month
and sort out all problems brought before it by MMRC. For Delhi Metro also such
a High Power Committee was set up and it proved very useful in smooth
implementation of the Delhi Metro rail project.
13.5.2 Empowered Committee
At the Central Government level an Empowered Committee, under the

chairmanship of Cabinet Secretary, is presently functioning for Delhi Metro
project. Other members of this Committee are Secretaries of Planning
Commission, Ministry of Home Affairs, Ministry of Urban Development, Ministry
of Surface Transport, Ministry of Environment and Forests, Department of
Expenditure, Chief Secretary of Delhi Government and a representative from
the PMO. The Empowered Committee meets regularly and takes decisions on
matters connected with inter-departmental coordination and overall planning,
financing and implementation of the Delhi Metro project. It is suggested that the
role of this Empowered Committee should be enlarged to include Mumbai Metro
project also and the Chief Secretary, Maharashtra should be inducted as a
member of this Committee.
13.5.3 Group of Ministers
Union Cabinet had set up a Group of Ministers (GOM) to take decisions on

behalf of the Cabinet on policy matters concerning Delhi Metro project. The
Group of Ministers is chaired by the Home Minister. Other members of the
GOM are Minister of Urban Development and Poverty Alleviation, Minister of
Railways, Minister of Finance and Company Affairs and Deputy Chairman
Planning Commission. Chief Minister, Delhi and Lt. Governor, Delhi, are
permanent invitees to all meetings of the GOM. The GOM meets whenever any
problem requiring decision on behalf of the Union Cabinet is to be taken. It is
suggested that the role of this GOM should be enlarged to include Mumbai
Metro. The Chief Minister, Maharashtra should be inducted as a member and
should attend the meetings of GOM whenever any issue concerning Mumbai
Metro is to be deliberated upon.

13.6 LEGAL FRAMEWORK
Metro rail projects are undertaken in congested urban environment. Metro lines
have, therefore, to pass through heavily built-up areas. As vacant land for laying
these lines is seldom available, they have to be constructed either as elevated
or underground. When elevated, the metro lines are generally located along the
medians of the existing roads to obviate the need for acquiring land. Even in
such cases, land is to be acquired for sitting station buildings, traffic integration
areas, etc. Whenever underground, metro lines may have to pass under
privately owned buildings, involving use of underground space below such
buildings. After construction of a metro line is complete, it has to be certified as
‘safe’ by a statutory authority before it can be opened for public carriage of
passenger s. For operation and maintenance of a metro line, which has been
commissioned for traffic, several crucial issues having legal implications need to
be taken care of. These include continued monitoring of safety of train
operations, security of metro properties, maintaining law and order within metro
premises, enquiries into accidents involving metro trains whenever they
happen, deciding the extent of compensation payable for
damages/injuries/casualties arising out of such accidents, laying down
passenger fares and their subsequent revision etc. There has, therefore, to be a
proper legal frame-work to take care of such problems encountered during
construction as well as operation of metro rail lines. Hence the need for a
comprehensive legislation on Metro Railways.
13.6.1 Existing legislations
The subject of ‘Railways’ as per the Seventh Schedule of the Constitution falls
in the Central List. Metro Rail projects come under the category of Railways and
are, therefore, today a central subject. Despite this position the Central
Government has not so far enacted a comprehensive legislation to regulate
construction, operation and maintenance of Metro Railways in various cities of
the country.
Calcutta (now Kolkata) Metro Railway was the first metro system undertaken in
our country. To facilitate construction of Calcutta Metro Railway, a legislation
under the title ‘Metro Railways (Construction of Works) Act, 1978 was enacted.
This Act was initially applicable to Calcutta but there is a provision in this Act
that, by a notification in the Official Gazette, the Central Government may also
extend it to the metropolitan cities of Mumbai, Chennai and Delhi. In fact, in the
year 2000, the Central Government did extend this Act to the city of Delhi. This
Act, however, suffers from several deficiencies. Firstly, there is no provision in
this Act to extend it to cities, having population of a million or more other than
the four metro cities mentioned above. Secondly, this Act covers only the
construction stage of Metro Railways and does not provide legal cover to their
operation and maintenance stage. When the first section of Calcutta Metro had
to be opened for public carriage of passengers, the Central Government had to

hastily get an Ordinance titled ‘Calcutta Metro (Operation and Maintenance)
Temporary Provisions Ordinance, 1984’ promulgated. This Ordinance was
converted next year into Calcutta Metro Railway (Operation and Maintenance)
Temporary Provisions Act, 1985. This latter Act also suffers from several
deficiencies. As its very title indicates it is applicable to Calcutta Metro only,
there is no provision in it to enable the Central Government to extend it to other
cities of the country. Besides, it contains only bare minimum provisions, which
were essential to enable commissioning of Calcutta Metro Railway for public
carriage of passenger s. The Central Government’s intention probably was that
after sufficient experience in operating and maintaining Calcutta Metro has
been gained, many more provisions would be included in this Act to make it
self-contained and the word ‘Temporary Provisions’ would be dropped there
from. This has, however, not happened even after expiry of 18 years since the
passing of this legislation by the Parliament.
Construction of Delhi Metro is being done under the Metro Railways

(Construction of Works) Act, 1978, after the same was extended to the city of
Delhi. The Central Government had, however, to enact another legislation titled
‘Delhi Metro Railway (Operation and Maintenance) Act, 2002 before its first
section from Shahdara to Tis Hazari could be opened for public carriage of
passenger s. This Act, though comprehensive in nature, is applicable to Delhi
Metro only and cannot be extended to cover a metro railway in any other city of
the country.
13.6.2 Legal Cover for Mumbai Metro
Construction of Mumbai Metro phase I is expected to commence soon. Out of

its three corridors in phase I, the first corridor may be ready for commissioning
in about three years and other corridors may be ready for commissioning after a
further period of two years. Thus there is immediate need to have a legislation
to provide legal cover to the construction stage of Mumbai Metro. Enactment of
any new legislation is a time-consuming exercise. Experience has shown that it
takes a minimum of two to three years from conceptualisation stage for a new
legislation to be enacted. To enable construction of Mumbai Metro to
commence in the year 2005-06, it has, therefore, become necessar y to extend
the Metro Railways (Construction of Works) Act, 1978 to Mumbai.
As for the legal cover to the operation and maintenance stage of Mumbai Metro,
it is high time to go in for a comprehensive legislation which will cater to both
construction as well as operation and maintenance stages of Metro Railways in
all million plus cities. After that Act is enacted, the existing Acts, namely, Metro
Railways (Construction of Works) Act, 1978 and Delhi Metro (Operation and
Maintenance) Act, 2002 and the Calcutta Metro Railway (Operation and
Maintenance) Temporary Provisions Act, 1985 can be repealed. The
comprehensive legislation should, inter-alia, contain provisions for the following:

· Functions and powers of the organisation to be entrusted with the tasks
of implementing a metro system and its subsequent operation and
maintenance. This organisation should be conferred adequate powers to
enable it to expeditiously implement the metro system and later to
operate and maintain it without any problem.
· Acquisition of land for construction of a metro railway, including
acquisition of rights to use underground space below privately owned
buildings for laying a metro line.
· Safety organization for certifying safety of a metro line before it is opened
for public carriage of passenger s. This organization should also be
entrusted with the role of enquiring into the causes of accidents involving
metro trains and suggesting remedial measures for avoiding recurrence
of such accidents.
· Statutory authority for deciding the compensation payable for losses,
injuries, casualties, etc. arising out of accidents involving metro trains.
· Penalty for offences committed in metro trains or metro premises.
13.6.3 Applicability of Tramway Act
It is observed that Government of Maharashtra is considering taking up the

implementation of Rail-based Mass Rapid Transit System (MRTS) along
Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar corridor under Indian Tramways Act, 1886
amended from time to time vide Government Resolution NO. MUT-
1004/1671/Case No. 158/2004/UD-10 Dt. 19.08.04
Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar line in all respects is an elevated Metro line, even

though it is wholly located within a municipal area. To categories this line of
communication as a “Tramway” by merely relying on the fact that it lies wholly
within a municipal area may not stand the test of judicial scrutiny. Versova-
Andheri-Ghatkopar line has all the trappings of a Metro line, such as dedicated
right-of-way, maximum permissible speed as high as 80km/hr, six coach
trains, train frequency 3 minutes during peak hours, signaling system with ATP
etc. This line, therefore, does not qualify for being designated as a “Tramway”
since “Tramways” do not have dedicated right-of-way, their coaches operate
either singly or in consists of twos, they have low maximum speeds (as they
have to operate along with road vehicles on the same right-of-way), they do
not have signaling system, etc. Versova-Andheri-Ghatkopar line can be called
“Tramway” in terms of section 3 (5) of the Indian Tramways Act, 1886 only if it
is declared by an Act of Parliament not to be a Railway, in terms of Clause 30
of Article 366 of the constitution of India. If despite this position the State
Government goes ahead with this project under the “Tramways” Act, it is likely
to lead to legal complications at a later stage.

13.7 CONCESSIONS FROM GOVERNMENT
Metro rail projects need very heavy investment. Loans have invariably to be
taken to fund a part of the capital cost of the projects. These projects yield low
financial internal rate of return though their economic internal rate of return is
very high. With reasonable fair level, servicing of these loans often pose
problems. To make the project financially viable, therefore, the fares need to be
substantially increased to socially un-acceptable levels. This results in the
ridership coming down significantly, as it is sensitive to increases in the fare
level. Thus the very objective of constructing the metro rail system to provide an
affordable mode of mass travel for public is defeated. It, therefore, becomes
necessar y to keep the initial capital cost of a metro project as low as possible
so that the fare level of the metro system can be kept at reasonable level.
13.7.1Experience of Delhi Metro project has shown that the taxes and duties constitute
about 16 – 18% of the project cost. Following are the taxes and duties, which
have to be borne by a metro project:
· Custom Duty on all imported rolling stock and other equipment needed for
the project.
· Excise Duty on all indigenously manufactured rolling stock and other

indigenously finished goods required for the project.
· Sales Tax on all purchases made for implementation of the project whether
directly by the project implementation authority or by the contractors
executing the project.
· Sales Tax on works contracts to be executed for the implementation of the -

project.
· Tax on electricity required for operation and maintenance of the metro

system.
· Municipal Taxes.
13.7.2In the case of Delhi Metro project, the Union Government has granted
exemption from payment of Custom Duty and Excise Duty while the Delhi
Government has agreed to give exemption from payment of Sales Tax and
Sales Tax on works contracts. Delhi Metro Rail Corporation is also pursuing
with the Government for exemption from tax on electricity being consumed by
Delhi Metro for its operation and maintenance.
13.7.3 It is recommended that for Mumbai Metro similar exemptions from taxes and
duties be granted by the Central Government /Maharashtra Government for

Mumbai Metro. In this connection it may be mentioned that the Central
Government has been encouraging infrastructure projects in the country
through fiscal and non-fiscal concessions Cities have emerged as the engines
of growth and mass transport systems today are one of the most important pre-
requisites for the balanced growth of the city. The Government can demonstrate
the importance it attaches to this sector by granting the above concessions
which would not only help reduce the initial cost of the project so that Mumbai
Metro remains commercially viable during its operation phase but also send
strong signals to the effect that it is committed to a safer and pollution free city.
Moreover, public transport is employment-friendly and favours social balance in
a sustainable way since it allows access to jobs and services to all.
13.8 NEED FOR DEDICATED FUND FOR METRO PROJECT S
Metro Rail projects, being capital intensive projects, have to be funded jointly by
the Central Government and the State Government. In order to facilitate funding
of these projects, the Central Government should set up a non-lapsable
‘National Metro Transport Fund’ for financing its share of metro rail projects.
The 10 th Plan document has also recommended creation of such a Fund with
an initial seed money contribution of Rs.3,000 crores by the Central
Government, with another contribution of Rs.3,000 crores to be raised during
the 10 th Plan period through dedicated taxes. This Fund should be utilized to
meet the Central Government’s share towards equity contribution in the Special
Purpose Vehicles to be set up to implement the metro rail projects for various
cities. The Central Government may consider imposing of surcharge on petrol,
diesel and CNG to raise resources for this Fund.
To enable the State Governments to provide their share of equity in the Special
Purpose Vehicles set up for such projects, it would be necessary to constitute a
Special Metro Fund at the State Government level also. The State
Governments should resort to imposition of dedicated levies for raising
resources for these Funds. Following dedicated levies may be considered by
the State Governments for this purpose:
· A 50% cess on the tax levies for registration of road vehicles.
· A Surcharge on fuel (petrol, diesel and CNG).
The above two levies would also assist to discourage the use of personalised
vehicles and encourage the use of public transport, which would not only
reduce the pollution level in the city but also reduce traffic congestion on the
road.
· Metro Tax @ 2% on pay rolls of all establishments having more than 100
employees. Such cess is in existence in a number of Western countries for

raising resources for metro rail. The employer’s benefit a good deal by good
Metro System.
· Surcharge @ 10% on luxury tax on the earning of all Star Hotels. At present
level, the luxury tax is 10%. The surcharge will raise the level to only 11%.
Chinese cities have adopted this scheme.

Ch. 14 – Conclusion
CHAPTER 14
CONCLUSIONS
14.1 As discussed in previous chapters, Mumbai is the Commercial Capital of

India and it’s fast growth especially in the suburbs is causing heavy stress
on all infrastructure, especially the Transport. Being a linear city, the
existing sub-urban rail services are very effective and the modal split in
favour of public transport is about 88%, which is very high. Since the
existing transport infrastructure has been heavily loaded, it has been
observed that the population of private vehicle is increasing and it was
also predicted that, the modal split in favour of public transport may also
recede. Hence, it is proposed by MMRDA to introduce a rail based Mass
Transportation System in Greater Mumbai and a master plan has been
prepared for the same.
14.2 The master plan has recommended a total network of 146.5 Kms along
10 corridors for implementation three phases with horizon year as 2031.
14.3 The present corridor` Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar’ is one of the phase–I
corridors, with route length of 11.07 Kms.
14.4 Metro rail systems are superior to buses because they provide much
higher carrying capacity, require only 1/5th of the energy per passenger km
compared to road-based systems, cause no air pollution, occupy no road
space if underground and only about 2 meter width of the road if elevated.
A metro system can carry the same amount of traffic as 7 lanes of bus
traffic or 25 lanes of private motor cars, are more reliable, comfortable and
safer than road-based systems and reduce journey time by anything
between 50% and 75% depending on the road conditions. In view of this
position, Mumbai Metro should not be delayed. Any further delay in taking
up the project would escalate its cost and impose avoidable heavy price
for delaying a decision.
14.5 Experience of implementing Delhi Metro project has shown that a Special
Purpose Vehicle (SPV), vested with adequate powers, is an effective
organisational arrangement to implement and subsequently operate and
maintain a metro rail project. An SPV should, therefore, be set up for
Mumbai Metro and registered under the Companies Act, 1956. This SPV
should be patterned on the lines of Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.
(DMRC), with equal Equity participation by the State and the Central
Governments and may be named as ‘Mumbai Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.’
(MMRC). It will have equal number of Directors on its Board from these
two Governments. While the Managing Director of MMRC should be the
nominee of the State Government, its Chairman should be the Secretary,
Ministry of Urban Development & Poverty Alleviation, as the nominee of
the Central Government to ensure full involvement and support of the

Central Government in the project. In order to avoid delays usually
associated with bureaucratic process of decision making, the Board of
Directors (BOD) of MMRC should be vested with full powers needed to
implement the project. The BOD, in turn, should delegate adequate
powers to the Managing Director to enable him to take all decisions in day
to day matters.
Concessionai re model for implementing and later operating Mumbai Metro

has also being examined. Financial implications of the concessionaire
model vis-à-vis directly by MMRC have been spelt out. If concessionaire
model is adopted, the role of MMRC will be that of an regulatory body.
14.6 For the successful implementation of Mumbai Metro project, it is essential

that the Managing Director of MMRC should be very carefully chosen. The
Managing Director should be a technocrat of proven track record and
impeccable integrity. He should be preferably with a railway background
since metro projects are with rail-based complex technology. A metro rail
background with experience in underground and elevated construction
would be most desirable. If the project is to be completed as scheduled
and without any time or cost over-run, it would be necessary to allow the
Managing Director to function without any bureaucratic or political
interference. For ensuring accountability the tenure of the MD should be
at least 5 years.
14.7 On receipt of the Detailed Project Report, following advance action would
need to be taken urgently for implementing the Mumbai Metro project:
· Approval and acceptance of the Detailed Project Report by the

State Government of Maharasthra and the Central Government and
both Governments committing to the investment decision.
· Signing of an MOU between State Government Maharasthra and

the Central Government for firming up arrangements for equity,
interest free subordinate debt and other related items pertaining to
this project.
· Setting up of a Special Purpose Vehicle (MMRC) for implementing

the project and posting of its Managing Director.

· The two Governments to jointly decide on the financing of the debt

portion of the project and also to the time frame for completing the
project.
14.8 An implementation plan for Mumbai Metro project has been discussed in
Chapter 13 of this Report. If the actions listed as above are taken promptly
by the two Governments, it should be possible to start physical work on
this project in the financial year 2004-05 itself.
14.9 Procurement of rolling stock is generally the most critical activity in metro
commissioning. Energy efficient, light-weight and reliable rolling stock are
required to be made available in time for starting integrated trials before
commercial opening. Imported rolling stock is generally very expensive.
M/s BEML, Bangalore have the required facilities and capability for
indigenous manufacture of rolling stock on account of the transfer of
technology that would take place during the manufacture of metro
coaches for Delhi. However, BOT operator is free to bring Rolling Stock
from any where as long as the specifications are met.
14.10 Mumbai Metro will be a State-of-the-art Metro. It will have 25 kV ac

traction system & Automatic train protection (ATP). Ticketing will be
through Automatic Fare Collection system.
14.11 For successful implementation of any metro project, which by its very
nature is highly technical and complex, huge in size and to be executed in
difficult urban environments, there should be a political will and
commitment. The decision making process has to be fast and the
implementing agency must have the required work culture, commitment to
targets, commitments to safety, quality and cost consciousness. Any time
overrun will have disastrous consequences by way of serious cost
overruns.
14.12 Metro projects are highly capital intensive. On account of the high costs
involved and the need to maintain a fare structure within the affordable
reach of ordinary citizens, metro projects are not ordinarily financially
viable. But considering the overwhelming economic gains to the society
and the fact that cities with a population of more than ten million cannot
just survive without an efficient metro system, we strongly recommend the
Mumbai Metro system to be taken up for implementation in the financial
year 2004-2005 itself.
14.13 Capital cost of Mumbai Metro project at June, 2004 prices has been
estimated at Rs. 1475 crores. It is also proposed to provide a link to Sahar
International airport with cost of Rs.90 crores. Further if the maintenance
depot is provide at Godrej area (towards Eastern end ) in stead of at DN
Nagar, it’s cost will be Rs.315 Crores .The FIRR & EIRR have been
calculated taking project construction cost as Rs. 1475 crores and they
are 7.56% and 21.53%respectively.

14.14 This DPR is for one corridor of first phase only. Mumbai being one of the
fastest growing urban agglomerations of the country will need a bigger
metro network. The other corridors proposed in phase I will require to be
extended.


Metro Line 1 (Versova To Ghatkopar)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metro Line 1 (Versova To Ghatkopar)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Metro Line 1 (Versova To Ghatkopar)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Detailed Project Report

Mumbai MRTS Project

Client: Mumbai Metropolitan Region

prepared by Delhi Metro Rail Corporation Ltd.

5.1 Geometric Design Norms 1

MUMBAI MRTS PROJECT

1. Gauge (Nominal) 1435 mm

2. Route Length (between dead ends)

4. Traffic Forecast (Stand Alone System)

a) Designed PHPDT 14136 17670 23560

6. Design speed 80 kmph

7. Traction Power Supply

a) Traction system voltage 25 KV ac

a) 3.20 m wide modern rolling stock with stainless steel body.

Maintenance Depot - D N Nagar

10. Signalling, Telecommunication & Train Control

a) Type of Signalling Cab signalling and

b) Telecommunication i) Integrated System with

ii) Train information system,

11. Fare Collection Automatic Fare Collection

Elevated viaduct consisting prestressed concrete 'U'-shaped

14. Financial Indices of MRTS Phase-I Network with this corridor

Land Use Policy

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 1 / 30

Suburban Rail System

Bus Transport System

Need for Metro

Advantages of a Metro System

• Requires 1/5th energy per passenger km compared to road-based

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 3 / 30

• Occupies no road space if underground and only about 2 metres

(ii) Techno-Economic Feasibility of the 7th Rail Corridor: Indian

(iv) Comprehensive Transport Study (CTS) for MMR: A study was

(v) Mumbai Metro Study, by Mumbai Metro Planning Group: The

(vii) Sky Bus Metro Study by MMRDA: The Konkan Railway

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 4 / 30

0.2 EVOLUTION OF MUMBAI METRO MASTER PLAN

Transport problems of any city can be solved by integrated transport

Preliminary Net Work

Based on various criteria, such as ridership, availability of funds, limitation

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 5 / 30

0.3 TRAFFIC STUDY

Proposed Peak Hour Link loadings on Versova- Andheri – Ghatkopar

Station Station 2011 2021 2031

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 6 / 30

Peak Hour Boarding and Alighting

2011 2021 2031

0.4 System Selection

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 7 / 30

i) On main lines, 1 in 9 type turnout with a lead radius of 300

Traditionally, electric traction is used in Metro systems for requirement of

Keeping in view the ultimate traffic requirements, standardisation,

C. Signalling and Train Control

Metro carries large number of passengers at a very close headway requiring

Detailed Project Report for Phase-I Corridors of Mumbai MRTS 8 / 30

The telecommunication system acts as the communication backbone for

The telecommunication facilities proposed are helpful in meeting the

1. Supplementing the Signalling system for efficient train operation.